Navigation

  • Page 1

    USER’S MANUALB-63944EN/03Common to Lathe System/Machining Center SystemFANUC Series 30*/300*/300*s-MODEL AFANUC Series 31*/310*/310*s-MODEL A FANUC Series 32*/320*/320*s-MODEL A

  • Page 2

    • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series 30i/300i/300is-...

  • Page 3

    B-63944EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this sectio...

  • Page 4

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/03 s-2 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary infor...

  • Page 5

    B-63944EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-3 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WARNING 1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, ...

  • Page 6

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/03 s-4 WARNING 5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not need to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before making an...

  • Page 7

    B-63944EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-5 NOTE Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from ...

  • Page 8

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/03 s-6 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the supplied User’s Manual carefully such that you are fully familiar with their contents. ...

  • Page 9

    B-63944EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-7 WARNING 5 Constant surface speed control When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum allowabl...

  • Page 10

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/03 s-8 WARNING 11 Programmable mirror image Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is enabled. 12 Compensation function If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command is issue...

  • Page 11

    B-63944EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-9 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied User’s Manual carefully, such that you are fully familiar with their c...

  • Page 12

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/03 s-10 WARNING 5 Disabled override If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading, rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cau...

  • Page 13

    B-63944EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-11 WARNING 10 Manual intervention If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of...

  • Page 14

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/03 s-12 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE WARNING 1 Memory backup battery replacement When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with th...

  • Page 15

    B-63944EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-13 WARNING 2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open,...

  • Page 16

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63944EN/03 s-14 WARNING 3 Fuse replacement Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. Wh...

  • Page 17

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS..........................

  • Page 18

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-2 3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) .....................................39 3.1 G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ............................ 41 3.2 G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM .................................................... 45 4 INTERPOLA...

  • Page 19

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-3 5.4.2.1 Automatic override for inner corners (G62) .............................................. 166 5.4.2.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change.................................................... 168 5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR A R...

  • Page 20

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-4 9.6 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ........................................... 241 9.6.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor .......................................................................241 9.6.2 Spindle Indexing Function ................................

  • Page 21

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-5 12.2.1 File Name .............................................................................................................323 12.2.2 File Attributes.......................................................................................................325 1...

  • Page 22

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-6 16.7.3 Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1) .................................................................537 16.7.4 Macro Call Using a G Code .................................................................................540 16.7.5 Macro Call Using a G C...

  • Page 23

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-7 17.5 MACRO CALL ........................................................................................... 605 17.6 OTHERS.................................................................................................... 607 17.7 AXIS CONTROL COMMAND .........

  • Page 24

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-8 21.3 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM COMMAND (G50.4, G51.4, G50.5, G51.5, G50.6, AND G51.6)........................................................................................................ 715 21.4 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER ........

  • Page 25

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-9 22.5.1.3 Tool tip position (cutting point) command ................................................ 927 22.5.2 Cutter Compensation in Table Rotation Type Machine.......................................931 22.5.3 Cutter Compensation in Composite Type Machine ......

  • Page 26

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-10 2.1.3 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel..........................................................................1001 2.1.4 12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel..........................................................................1001 2.1.5 15" LCD CNC Di...

  • Page 27

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-11 3.10 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE................................. 1080 3.10.1 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment ...............................................1080 3.10.2 Reference Position Return...........................................

  • Page 28

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-12 5.5 DRY RUN ................................................................................................ 1184 5.6 SINGLE BLOCK ...................................................................................... 1185 5.7 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTIO...

  • Page 29

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-13 8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program...................................................................1246 8.2.1.1 Inputting a program.................................................................................. 1246 8.2.1.2 Outputting a program ......

  • Page 30

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-14 8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN............................................ 1303 8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program .........................................................................1304 8.3.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters...................

  • Page 31

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-15 10.10 EDITING PROGRAM CHARACTERS ..................................................... 1370 10.10.1 Available Keys ...................................................................................................1374 10.10.2 Input Mode ........................

  • Page 32

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-16 12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ................................................................1438 12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display .....................................................................................1439 12.1.6 Display of Run Time ...

  • Page 33

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-17 12.2.15 Program Check Screen (15-inch Display Unit)..................................................1533 12.2.16 Background Editing (15-inch Display Unit) ......................................................1534 12.2.17 Stamping the Machining Time (15-inch...

  • Page 34

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-18 12.3.18 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15-inch Display Unit)........................................................................................1650 12.3.19 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (15-inch Displ...

  • Page 35

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-19 12.4.9 Color Setting Screen...........................................................................................1738 12.4.10 Machining Parameter Tuning .............................................................................1741 12.4.11 Displaying ...

  • Page 36

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-20 12.4.27.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen (15-inch Display Unit) ............................................................................. 1837 12.4.27.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen (15-inch Display Unit)...

  • Page 37

    B-63944EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-21 13.2.1.1 GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen................... 1915 13.2.1.2 PATH GRAPHIC screen ......................................................................... 1922 13.2.1.3 PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen .................................

  • Page 38

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63944EN/03 c-22 E.4 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING ............................ 2309 F SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE..........................................................................2310 G CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE...

  • Page 39

    I. GENERAL

  • Page 40

  • Page 41

    B-63944EN/03 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 3 - 1 GENERAL This manual consists of the following parts: About this manual I. GENERAL Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this manual. II. PROGRAMMING Describes each function: Format used to program funct...

  • Page 42

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-63944EN/03 - 4 - Applicable models This manual describes the models indicated in the table below. In the text, the abbreviations indicated below may be used. Model name Abbreviation FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A 30i –A Series 30i FANUC Series 300i-MODEL A 300i–A Series 300i FA...

  • Page 43

    B-63944EN/03 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 5 - Special symbols This manual uses the following symbols: - M Indicates a description that is valid only for the machine center system set as system control type (in parameter No. 0983). In a general description of the method of machining, a machining center s...

  • Page 44

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-63944EN/03 - 6 - Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i /300is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A, Series 32i/320i /320is-A. This manual is indi...

  • Page 45

    B-63944EN/03 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 7 - Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series Table 2 Related manuals Manual name Specification number FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR ...

  • Page 46

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-63944EN/03 - 8 - 1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL CAUTION 1 The function of an CNC machine tool system depends not only on the CNC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system, the CNC, the operator's panels, etc. It is too difficult t...

  • Page 47

    B-63944EN/03 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 9 - 1.2 NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA CAUTION Machining programs, parameters, offset data, etc. are stored in the CNC unit internal non-volatile memory. In general, these contents are not lost by the switching ON/OFF of the power. However, it is possible that ...

  • Page 48

  • Page 49

    II. PROGRAMMING

  • Page 50

  • Page 51

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 13 - 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION .....................................................................14 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION ......................

  • Page 52

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 14 - 1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts figure (See II-4). Explanation The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs is called the interp...

  • Page 53

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 15 - - Tool movement along an arc • For milling machining WorkpieceTool Program G03 X_ Y_ R_ ; • For lathe cutting Program G02 X_ Z_ R_ ; or G03 X_ Z_ R_ ; WorkpieceZ X Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc The term interpolation refers to an operati...

  • Page 54

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 16 - 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. • For milling machining ToolWorkpieceTableFmm/min • For lathe cutting Tool WorkpieceChuck Fmm/min Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function Feedrates ca...

  • Page 55

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 17 - 1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT 1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position....

  • Page 56

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 18 - 1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System • For milling machining ZYXPart drawingZ Y XCoordinate systemZYXToolWorkpieceMachine toolProgramCommand CNC Tool • For lathe cutting Part drawingMac...

  • Page 57

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 19 - Explanation - Coordinate system The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations: (See II-7) 1 Coordinate system on part drawing The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on...

  • Page 58

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 20 - The positional relation between these two coordinate systems is determined when a workpiece is set on the table. • For milling machining Y YTableWorkpieceXXCoordinate systemspecified by the CNCestablished on the tableCoordinate system onpart drawing e...

  • Page 59

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 21 - - Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same position M To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, simple methods shall be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machinings. 1. Using a standard plane and point of th...

  • Page 60

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 22 - T The following method is usually used to define two coordinate systems at the same location. 1 When coordinate zero point is set at chuck face Workpiece X150 40Z6040 Workpiece XZChuck - Coordinates and dimensions on part drawing- Coordinate system on ...

  • Page 61

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 23 - 2. When coordinate zero point is set at workpiece end face. X Z6030 10080 30 X ZWorkpiece Workpiece Chuck - Coordinates and dimensions on part drawing- Coordinate system on lathe as specified by CNCProgram origin When the coordinate system on the part d...

  • Page 62

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 24 - 1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool (Absolute, Incremental Commands) Explanation Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See II-8.1). - Absolute command The tool moves to a poin...

  • Page 63

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 25 - - Incremental command Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position. • For milling machining Y ZAX=40.0Z=-10.0 Y-30.0 XBG91 X40.0 Y-30.0 Z-10.0 ;Distance and direction for movement along each axisTool Command specify...

  • Page 64

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 26 - - Diameter programming / radius programming Dimensions of the X axis can be set in diameter or in radius. Diameter programming or radius programming is employed independently in each machine. 1. Diameter programming In diameter programming, specify th...

  • Page 65

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 27 - 1.4 CUTTING SPEED - SPINDLE FUNCTION The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed. As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in min-1 unit. • For milling machin...

  • Page 66

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 28 - 1.5 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL FUNCTION Overview For each of various types of machining (such as drilling, tapping, boring, and milling for milling machining, or rough machining, semifinish machining, finish machining, threading...

  • Page 67

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 29 - 1.6 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY FUNCTION When a workpiece is actually machined with a tool, the spindle is rotated, coolant is supplied, and the chuck is opened/closed. So, control needs to be exercised on the spindle motor of the machine,...

  • Page 68

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 30 - 1.7 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off. In the program, spe...

  • Page 69

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 31 - Explanation The block and the program have the following configurations. - Block End of block Nxxxxx Gxx Xxxx.x Yxxx.x Mxx Sxx Txx ;1 block Sequence number Preparatory function Auxiliary function Spindle function Tool functi...

  • Page 70

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 32 - - Main program and subprogram When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a program, a program for the pattern is created. This is called the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program is called the main program. When a subpr...

  • Page 71

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 33 - 1.8 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can move is called the stroke. Stroke area MotorLimit switch Machine zero p...

  • Page 72

    2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 34 - 2 CONTROLLED AXES Chapter 2, "CONTROLLED AXES", consists of the following sections: 2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES.......................................35 2.2 NAMES OF AXES ................................................................

  • Page 73

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 35 - 2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES Explanation The number of controlled axes used with this NC system depends on the model and system control type as indicated below. NOTE 1 The maximum number of controlled axes that can be used is limited depending ...

  • Page 74

    2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 36 - 2.2 NAMES OF AXES Explanation The move axes of machine tools are assigned names. These names are referred to as addresses or axis names. Axis names are determined according to the machine tool. The naming rules comply with standards such as the...

  • Page 75

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 37 - 2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM Explanation The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) and least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the least increment for programming the travel distance. The least comm...

  • Page 76

    2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 38 - 2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE Explanation The maximum stroke controlled by this CNC is shown in the table below: Maximum stroke = Least command increment × 999999999 (99999999 for IS-A) Commands that exceed the maximum stroke are not permitted. Table 2.4...

  • Page 77

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 39 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block. G codes are divided into the following two types. Type Meaning One-shot G code The G code is effect...

  • Page 78

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 40 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Explanation 1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at power-up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states described below. (1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as in...

  • Page 79

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 41 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)3.1 G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM M Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G00 Positioning (rapid traverse) G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed) G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW ...

  • Page 80

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 42 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G37 Automatic tool length measurement G38 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : preserve vector G39 00 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : corner circular interpo...

  • Page 81

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 43 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G54 (G54.1) Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 select...

  • Page 82

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 44 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle G83 Peck drilling cycle G84 Tapping cycle G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format) G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format) ...

  • Page 83

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 45 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)3.2 G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM T Table 3.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse) G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed) G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW o...

  • Page 84

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 46 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position G29 G29 G29 Movement from reference position G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th refer...

  • Page 85

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 47 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G43 G43 G43 Tool length compensation + (Parameter TCT (No.5040#3) must be "1".) G44 G44 G44 Tool length compensation - (Parameter TCT (No.5040#3) must be &q...

  • Page 86

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 48 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G68 G68 G68 04 Mirror image on for double turret or balance cutting mode G68.1 G68.1 G68.1 Coordinate system rotation start or three-dimensional coordinate system c...

  • Page 87

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 49 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G96.1 G96.1 G96.1 Spindle indexing execution (waiting for completion) G96.2 G96.2 G96.2 Spindle indexing execution (not waiting for completion) G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 Spindl...

  • Page 88

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 50 - 4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Interpolation functions specify the way to make an axis movement (in other words, a movement of the tool with respect to the workpiece or table). Chapter 4, "INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS", consists of the ...

  • Page 89

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 51 - 4.1 POSITIONING (G00) The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an incremental programming at a rapid traverse rate. In the absolute programming, coordinate value of the end point ...

  • Page 90

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 52 - Limitation The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F. Even if linear interpolation type positioning is specified, nonlinear type interpolation positioning is used in the following cases. Therefore, be careful to ensure ...

  • Page 91

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 53 - 4.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final positioning from one direction is available. Start pointTemporary stopEnd pointOverrunStart point Format G60 IP_ ; IP_ : For a...

  • Page 92

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 54 - - Overview of operation • In the case of positioning of non-linear interpolation type (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 0) As shown below, single direction positioning is performed independently along each axis. Programmed end poi...

  • Page 93

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 55 - • In the cylindrical interpolation mode (G07.1), single direction positioning cannot be used. • In the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1), single direction positioning cannot be used. • When specifying single direction ...

  • Page 94

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 56 - 4.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) Tools can move along a line. Format G01 IP_ F_ ; IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an end point, and for an incremental programming, the distance the tool moves. F_ : Speed of tool feed...

  • Page 95

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 57 - A calculation example is as follows. G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ; This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows: 300402022+)(14907.0mm The feedrate...

  • Page 96

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 58 - - Feedrate for the rotary axis 90°(Start point) (End point) Feedrate is 300 deg/min G91G01C-90.0 F300.0 ;Feed rate of 300deg/min

  • Page 97

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 59 - 4.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) The command below will move a tool along a circular arc. Format Arc in the XpYp plane G02 I_ J_ G17 G03 Xp_ Yp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the ZpXp plane G02 I_ K_G18 G03 Zp_ Xp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the YpZp plane G...

  • Page 98

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 60 - Explanation - Direction of the circular interpolation "Clockwise"(G02) and "counterclockwise"(G03) on the XpYp plane (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positive-to-negative dir...

  • Page 99

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 61 - - Arc radius The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K. In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 18...

  • Page 100

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 62 - - Specifying an axis that is not contained in the specified plane If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded, an alarm PS0028 occurs. For example, For milling machining: If the X-axis and a U-axis parallel to the X-axis ...

  • Page 101

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 63 - Example M 1006040090120 140 200 6050Y axisX axis The above tool path can be programmed as follows; (1) In absolute programming G92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ; G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ; G02 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0 ; or G92X200.0 Y40.0Z0 ...

  • Page 102

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 64 - T - Command of circular interpolation X, Z Start pointXZ-axisX-axisCenter of arcEnd pointZKXZ-axisX-axis(Diameterprogramming)KZStart pointXZ-axisX-axisCenter of arcEnd pointZR(Diameterprogramming)(Absolute programming)(Absolute programmi...

  • Page 103

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 65 - 4.5 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands. Format Arc in the XpYp plane G...

  • Page 104

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 66 - The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate. Z XY Tool path If HTG is set to 1, specify a feedrate along the tool path about the linear axis. Therefore, the tangential velocity of the...

  • Page 105

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 67 - 4.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (G02, G03) The helical interpolation B function differs from the helical interpolation function just in that circular interpolation and a movement on four axes outside the specified plane can be simultaneously...

  • Page 106

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 68 - 4.7 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired increment (decrement) for the radius p...

  • Page 107

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 69 - - Conical interpolation XpYp plane G02 G17 G03 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Z_ Q_ L_ F_ ; ZpXp plane G02 G18 G03 Z_ X_ K_ I_ Y_ Q_ L_ F_ ; YpZp plane G02 G19 G03 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ X_ Q_ L_ F_ ; X, Y, Z : Coordinates of the end point L : Number of revolutions (...

  • Page 108

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 70 - Explanation - Function of spiral interpolation Spiral interpolation in the XY plane is defined as follows: 22020)Q'(R)Y(Y)X(X+=−+− X0 : X coordinate of the center Y0 : Y coordinate of the center R : Radius at the beginning of spiral...

  • Page 109

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 71 - - Difference between end points If the difference between the programmed end point and the calculated end point of a spiral exceeds a value specified in parameter No. 3471 about any axis of a selected plane, an alarm PS5123 will be issue...

  • Page 110

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 72 - - Tool radius compensation M The spiral or conical interpolation command can be programmed in tool radius compensation mode. This compensation is performed in the same way as described in "When it is exceptional" in "Tool ...

  • Page 111

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 73 - - Deceleration by acceleration During spiral interpolation, the function of deceleration by acceleration is enabled. The feedrate may decrease as the tool approaches the center of the spiral. - Dry run When the dry run signal is inve...

  • Page 112

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 74 - Example - Spiral interpolation The path indicated below is programmed with absolute and incremental values as follows: -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 –20 20 40 60 80 100 12020Y axisX axis40608010020. 20.-20-40-60-80-100-120120 This s...

  • Page 113

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 75 - - Conical interpolation The sample path shown below is programmed with absolute and incremental values as follows: +Z+Y+X(0,-37.5,62.5)25.0 25.025.025.0100.0-100.0 This sample path has the following values: • Start point : (0, 100.0...

  • Page 114

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 76 - 4.8 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (G12.1, G13.1) Overview Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (...

  • Page 115

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 77 - - Polar coordinate interpolation plane G12.1 starts the polar coordinate interpolation mode and selects a polar coordinate interpolation plane (Fig. 4.8 (a)). Polar coordinate interpolation is performed on this plane. Rotary axis (hypot...

  • Page 116

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 78 - Example) When a value on the X-axis (linear axis) is input in millimeters G12.1; G01 X10. F1000. ;.... A 10-mm movement is made on the Cartesian coordinate system. C20. ; ........................ A 20-mm movement is made on the Cartes...

  • Page 117

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 79 - - Movement along axes not in the polar coordinate interpolation plane in the polar coordinate interpolation mode The tool moves along such axes normally, independent of polar coordinate interpolation. - Current position display in the ...

  • Page 118

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 80 - - Shifting the coordinate system in polar coordinate interpolation In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, the workpiece coordinate system can be shifted. The current position display function shows the position viewed from the workp...

  • Page 119

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 81 - - Program restart For a block in the G12.1 mode, the program and the block cannot be restarted. - Cutting feedrate for the rotary axis Polar coordinate interpolation converts the tool movement for a figure programmed in a Cartesian coo...

  • Page 120

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 82 - - Automatic speed control for polar coordinate interpolation If the velocity component of the rotary axis exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate in the polar coordinate interpolation mode, the speed is automatically controlled. - Automat...

  • Page 121

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 83 - NOTE 1 While the automatic speed clamp function is working, the machine lock or interlock function may not be enabled immediately. 2 If a feed hold stop is made while the automatic speed clamp function is working, the automatic operation ...

  • Page 122

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 84 - Example Sample program for polar coordinate interpolation in a Cartesian coordinate system consisting of the X-axis (a linear axis) and a hypothetical axis N204N205N206N203N202N201N208N207N200ToolC axisHypothetical axisPath after cutter ...

  • Page 123

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 85 - 4.9 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) In cylindrical interpolation function, the amount of movement of a rotary axis specified by angle is converted to the amount of movement on the circumference to allow linear interpolation and circula...

  • Page 124

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 86 - - Circular interpolation (G02, G03) Circular interpolation can be performed between the rotary axis set for cylindrical interpolation and another linear axis. Radius R is used in commands in the same way as described. The unit for a radi...

  • Page 125

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 87 - Limitation - Arc radius specification in the circular interpolation In the cylindrical interpolation mode, an arc radius cannot be specified with word address I, J, or K. - Positioning In the cylindrical interpolation mode, positioning...

  • Page 126

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 88 - M - Coordinate system setting In the cylindrical interpolation mode, a workpiece coordinate system (G92, G54 to G59) or local coordinate system (G52) cannot be specified. - Tool offset A tool offset must be specified before the cylindr...

  • Page 127

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 89 - Example ZC R C2301901500 mm Z deg110 90 70 120 30 60 70270N05 N06N07N08 N09 N10N11N12N13 36060 Example of a Cylindrical Interpolation O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ); N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; N03 G07.1 C57299 ;*...

  • Page 128

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 90 - 4.10 CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the tool center so that the tool axis always moves along a specified path on the cylindrical surface, tow...

  • Page 129

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 91 - - Cutting point compensation (1) Cutting point compensation between blocks As shown in Fig. 4.10 (b), cutting point compensation is achieved by moving between blocks N1 and N2. (a) Let C1 and C2 be the heads of the vectors normal to N1 ...

  • Page 130

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 92 - ∆V : Cutting point compensation value (∆V2 - ∆V1) for movement of ∆L ∆V1 : C-axis component of the vector normal to N1 from the tool center of the start point of ∆L ∆V2 : C-axis component of the vector normal to N1 from the ...

  • Page 131

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 93 - (b) When bit 6 (CYS) of parameter No.19530 is set to 0 Cutting point compensation is not performed between blocks N1 and N2. Whether to apply cutting point compensation between block N2 and N3 is determined by taking the cutting point com...

  • Page 132

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 94 - (d) When, as shown in Fig. 4.10 (g), the diameter of an arc (R in the figure) is less than the value set in parameter No. 19535, cutting point compensation is not applied simultaneously with circular interpolation Z-axisC-axis on the cy...

  • Page 133

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 95 - (1) When the normal direction changes between blocks N1 and N2, cutting point compensation is also performed between blocks N1 and N2. As shown in Fig. 4.10 (i), cutting point compensation described in (1) in "Cutting point compensat...

  • Page 134

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 96 - (3) When a specified block is executed while the normal direction control axis is held in the normal direction set at the end point of the previous block, cutting point compensation is not performed, and cutting point compensation applie...

  • Page 135

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 97 - Fc : Speed component of cylindrical interpolation rotation axis before cutting point compensation Vcs: Rotation axis component of a tool contact point vector (Vs in the figure) at the start point at a point in time Vce: Rotation axis co...

  • Page 136

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 98 - - Parameter To enable this function, set bit 5 (CYA) of parameter No. 19530 to 1. Limitation - Overcutting during inner corner cutting Theoretically, when the inner area of a corner is cut using linear interpolation as shown in Fig. 4....

  • Page 137

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 99 - Example - Example of cutting point interpolation for cylindrical interpolation The sample program below indicates the positional relationships between a workpiece and tool. O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION1) ; N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02...

  • Page 138

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 100 - Workpiece Rotary axisRotary axis Tool Tool centerY-axisY-axisPositional relationship between the workpiece and tool of (1) Positional relationship between theworkpiece and tool of (2) Cutting surface20° 0° 0° WorkpieceRotary axisRota...

  • Page 139

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 101 - - Example of specifying cutting point interpolation for cylindrical interpolation and normal direction control at the same time Tool radius compensation No.01 is 30 mm. O0002 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION2) ; N01 G00 G90 X100.0 A0 ; N02 G0...

  • Page 140

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 102 - 4.11 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (G02.3, G03.3) Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore, exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation...

  • Page 141

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 103 - Format Positive rotation (ω = 0) G02. 3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ; Negative rotation (ω = 1) G03. 3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ; X_ : Specifies an end point with an absolute or incremental value.Y_ : Specifies an end point with a...

  • Page 142

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 104 - In Fig. 4.11 (b) an absolute value on the X-axis, Z-axis, or A-axis is expressed as a function of workpiece rotation angle θ, such as X(θ), Z(θ), and A(θ). Linear interpolation with the X-axis is performed for an axis other than the ...

  • Page 143

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 105 - - Span value K A movement on an axis is carried out as linear interpolation in units of values obtained by dividing the movement on the X-axis by the span value (address K). The following is obtained from Expression (5) 1))tan(*ln(*)(+=...

  • Page 144

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 106 - - Rotation axis θ In exponential interpolation, Expression (7) indicates the relationship between the X coordinate and the rotation angle θ about the A-axis. The expression in the parentheses of the natural logarithm ln in Expression...

  • Page 145

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 107 - - Taper angle I The machining profile and the sign of taper angle I have the following relationships: • If the profile tapers up toward the right, the I value is positive. • If the profile tapers down toward the right, the I value i...

  • Page 146

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 108 - Example N10 G90 G01 X5.0 Z1.575 ;N20 G02.3 X25.0 Z2.273 I3.0 J-45.0 K1.0 R1.238F1000 Q1000 ;ZAXr = 3.0Z(0) = 1.4J = 45°I = 3.0°U = 5.0X = 25.0B = 2.0°XeXsXs: Start point on theX-axisXe: End point on theX-axis The start point and end ...

  • Page 147

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 109 - 4.12 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (G05.1) Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. • For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactl...

  • Page 148

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 110 - When a program approximates a sculptured curve with line segments, the length of each segment differs between those portions that have mainly a small radius of curvature and those that have mainly a large radius of curvature. The length ...

  • Page 149

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 111 - Interpolated by smooth curveInterpolated by smooth curve(Example) N17 N16 N1 N2 N15N14N13N12N11N10 N9 N3 N4N5N6N7N8Linear interpolationLinear interpolation N17 N16 N1 N2 N15N14N13N12N11N10 N9 N3 N4N5N6N7N8 - Conditions for performing ...

  • Page 150

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 112 - - Checking the smooth interpolation mode Diagnostic data (No. 5000#0) indicates whether the smooth interpolation mode is enabled in the current block. If the smooth interpolation mode is enabled, "smooth interpolation on" bit...

  • Page 151

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 113 - 4.13 NANO SMOOTHING Overview When a desired sculptured surface is approximated by minute segments, the nano smoothing function generates a smooth curve inferred from the programmed segments and performs necessary interpolation. The nano...

  • Page 152

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 114 - Nano smoothing 2 enables specification of the basic three axes (X-, Y-, and Z-axes) or their parallel axes as axes on which to perform nano smoothing, as well as two rotary axes. If executing nano smoothing 2 simultaneously with tool cen...

  • Page 153

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 115 - - Conditions to enable nano smoothing Nano smoothing is enabled when the following conditions are satisfied. Nano smoothing is cancelled in a block which does not satisfy the conditions. A decision is made to perform nano smoothing from...

  • Page 154

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 116 - Explanation Generally, a program approximates a sculptured surface with minute segments with a tolerance of about 10 µm. ToleranceProgrammed pointDesired curve Many programmed points are placed on the boundary of tolerance. The progr...

  • Page 155

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 117 - - Nano smoothing 2 Nano smoothing 2 performs smooth interpolation for the basic three axes (or their parallel axes) and two rotation axes independently. : Command pointSmoothing on XYZ space : Command pointSmoothing on BC space X Y ZBC...

  • Page 156

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 118 - - Making a decision at a corner If the difference in angle (see the following figure) between adjacent programmed blocks exceeds the value specified in parameter No. 8487 in the nano smoothing mode, the nano smoothing mode is cancelled ...

  • Page 157

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 119 - - Tool length compensation To carry out tool length compensation, specify the command before specifying nano smoothing. Avoid changing the amount of compensation in the nano smoothing mode. If G43, G44, or G49 is specified in a block be...

  • Page 158

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 120 - - Continuity of a program Curve interpolation is carried out for multiple programmed blocks including buffered blocks in the nano smoothing mode. Therefore, the programmed commands must be executed continuously in the nano smoothing mod...

  • Page 159

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 121 - 4.14 NURBS INTERPOLATION (G06.2) Many computer-aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies....

  • Page 160

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 122 - NURBS interpolation can be performed for up to five axes (including two rotation axes). Therefore, NURBS interpolation can be performed for the basic three axes (X, Y, and Z) and two rotation axes at the same time. This enables five-axis...

  • Page 161

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 123 - Explanation - NURBS interpolation mode NURBS interpolation mode is selected when G06.2 is programmed. G06.2 is a modal G code of group 01. NURBS interpolation mode ends when a G code of group 01 other than G06.2 (G00, G01, G02, G03, etc...

  • Page 162

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 124 - - NURBS curve Using these variables: k : Rank Pi : Control point Wi : Weight Xi : Knot (Xi < Xi+1) Knot vector [X0, X1, . . . , Xm] (m = n+ k) t : Spline parameter, the spline basis function N can be expressed with the de Boor-...

  • Page 163

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 125 - Limitation - Controlled axes NURBS interpolation can be performed on up to five axes (including two rotary axes). The axes of NURBS interpolation must be specified in the first block. A new axis cannot be specified before the beginning ...

  • Page 164

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 126 - Example <Sample NURBS interpolation program> G90; ... G06.2 K0. X0. Z0.; K0. X300. Z100.; K0. X700. Z100.; K0. X1300. Z-100.; K0.5 X1700. Z-100.; K0.5 X2000. Z0.; K1.0; K1.0; K1.0; K1.0; G01 Y0...

  • Page 165

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 127 - 4.14.1 NURBS Interpolation Additional Functions In the FANUC Series 30i/31i, NURBS interpolation provides the following additional functions: - Parametric feedrate control The maximum feedrate of each segment is determined according t...

  • Page 166

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 128 - Example 1. Specified program G90 G06.2 X0. Y0. K0. F2000 ; X10. Y10. K0. F1500 ; X20. Y20. K0. F1800 ; X30. Y30. K0. ; X40. Y40. K1. X50. Y50. K2. K3. K3. K3. K3. 2. Specified speed Speed Time 1500 1800 2000 3. Parametric s...

  • Page 167

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 129 - - High-precision knot command If bit 1 (HIK) of parameter No. 8412 is set to 1, knot commands with a whole number of up to 12 digits and a decimal fraction of up to 12 digits can be specified. This function can be used only for knot com...

  • Page 168

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 130 - - Simple start command If bit 0 (EST) of parameter No. 8412 is set to 1, a control command may be omitted at the first control point. Because the same value is set for the knot in the first block and the knot in the second block, the kn...

  • Page 169

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 131 - 4.15 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION (G07) In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is enabled. When one of the circular interpolat...

  • Page 170

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 132 - Limitation - Manual operation The hypothetical axis can be used only in automatic operation. In manual operation, it is not used, and movement takes place. - Move command Specify hypothetical axis interpolation only in the increment...

  • Page 171

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 133 - 4.16 VARIABLE LEAD THREADING (G34) Specifying an increment or a decrement value for a lead per screw revolution enables variable lead threading to be performed. Fig. 4.16 (a) Variable lead screw Format G34 IP_ F_ K_ Q_ ; IP_ : End p...

  • Page 172

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 134 - 4.17 CIRCULAR THREADING (G35, G36) Using the G35 and G36 commands, a circular thread, having the specified lead in the direction of the major axis, can be machined. LL: Lead Fig. 4.17 (a) Circular threading Format A sample format fo...

  • Page 173

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 135 - T G35 I_ K_ G36 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ Q_ ; G35 : Clockwise circular threading command G36 : Counterclockwise circular threading command X(U), Z(W) : Specify the arc end point (in the same way as for G02, G03). I, K : Specify the arc cente...

  • Page 174

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 136 - T - Automatic tool compensation The G36 command is used to specify the following two functions: Automatic tool compensation X and counterclockwise circular threading. The function for which G36 is to be used depends on bit 3 (G36) of ...

  • Page 175

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 137 - Limitation - Range of specifiable arc An arc must be specified such that it falls within a range in which the major axis of the arc is always the Z-axis or always the X-axis, as shown in Fig. 4.17 (b), and (c). If the arc includes a po...

  • Page 176

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 138 - - End point not on an arc If the end point is not on an arc, a movement on an axis is made to a position of which coordinate matches the corresponding coordinate of the end point. Then, a movement is made on another axis to reach the en...

  • Page 177

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 139 - 4.18 SKIP FUNCTION (G31) Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupt...

  • Page 178

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 140 - Example - The next block to G31 is an incremental programming G31 G91 X100.0 F100;Y50.0;50.0100.0Skip signal is input hereActual motionMotion without skip signalYX Fig. 4.18 (a) The next block is an incremental programming - The next...

  • Page 179

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 141 - 4.19 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G31) In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4-point or 8-point ; 8-point when a high-speed skip signal is used) is t...

  • Page 180

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 142 - 4.20 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G31) The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input. Delay and...

  • Page 181

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 143 - 4.21 CONTINUOUS HIGH-SPEED SKIP FUNCTION Overview The continuous high-speed skip function is used to read absolute coordinates using high-speed skip signals HDI0 to HDI7. Inputting a high-speed skip signal in a G31P90 block causes absol...

  • Page 182

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 144 - Limitation The continuous high-speed skip function (G31P90) block must be a command for a single axis only. If an attempt is made to specify two or more axes, P/S alarm No. 5068 is issued.

  • Page 183

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 145 - 4.22 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP Overview Executing the move command following G31P99 (or G31P98) while overriding the torque limit*1 on the servo motor enables cutting feed in to be performed in the same way as in linear interpolation (G01). If,...

  • Page 184

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 146 - - Conditions for performing a skip operation Command Condition G31P98 G31P99 The torque limit value is reached. A skip operation is performed. A skip operation is performed. A skip signal is input. No skip operation is performed. A skip...

  • Page 185

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 147 - - Torque limit command If, with the torque limit skip command, no torque limit override value is specified with address Q and no torque limit command is issued from the PMC window, etc., alarm PS0035 is issued. When no toque limit comm...

  • Page 186

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 148 - Position during a skip operation Current position of the CNC Machine position Error Position compensated for by reflecting the delay Position not reflecting the delayCoordinate origin Stop point NOTE 1 Specify only a single axis with ...

  • Page 187

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 149 - 4.23 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION Overview Specifying an intermediate and end point on an arc enables circular interpolation in a 3-dimensional space. Format The command format is as follows: G02.4 XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ;...

  • Page 188

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 150 - - Movement along axes other than the three-dimensional circular interpolation axis In addition to the three-dimensional circular interpolation axis (X/Y/Z), up to two arbitrary axes (α/β) can be specified at a time. If / are omitted f...

  • Page 189

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 151 - Limitation - Cases in which linear interpolation is performed • f the start point, mid-point, and end-point are on the same line, linear interpolation is performed. • If the start point coincides with the mid-point, the mid-point co...

  • Page 190

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 152 - • Hypothetical axis interpolation...................................................G07 • Cylindrical interpolation..........................................................G07.1 • Advanced preview control.............................

  • Page 191

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 153 - - Unusable functions If the following function is specified in the three-dimensional circular interpolation mode, a warning is output: • MDI intervention If any of the following functions is specified in the three-dimensional circular...

  • Page 192

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 154 - 5 FEED FUNCTIONS Chapter 5, "FEED FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................155 5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE ..........................................

  • Page 193

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 155 - 5.1 OVERVIEW The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available: - Feed functions 1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse feedrate ...

  • Page 194

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 156 - - Tool path in a cutting feed When the movement direction changes between a specified block and the next block during cutting feed, the tool path may be rounded because of the relationship between the time constant and feedrate (Fig. 5.1(b)). 0...

  • Page 195

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 157 - 5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE Format G00 IP_ ; G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse) IP_ : Dimension word for the end point Explanation The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse. In rapid traverse, the next blo...

  • Page 196

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 158 - 5.3 CUTTING FEED Overview Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded with numbers after the F code. In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous bloc...

  • Page 197

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 159 - T Feed per minute G98 ; G code (group 05) for feed per minute F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min) Feed per revolution G99 ; G code (group 05) for feed per revolution F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/rev or inch/rev) Inverse time feed (G93) G93 ; ...

  • Page 198

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 160 - • For milling machining WorkpieceTableToolFeed amount per minute(mm/min or inch/min) • For lathe cutting Feed amount per minute (mm/min or Íinch/min) F Fig. 5.3 (b) Feed per minute CAUTION No override can be used for some commands such...

  • Page 199

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 161 - • For milling machining FFeed amount per spindlerevolution (mm/rev or inch/rev) • For lathe cutting Feed amount per spindle revolution(mm/rev or inch/rev)F Fig. 5.3 (c) Feed per revolution CAUTION When the speed of the spindle is low, fe...

  • Page 200

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 162 - G code for inverse time feed is a modal G code and belongs to group 05 (includes G code for feed per revolution and G code for feed per minute). When an F value is specified in inverse time specification mode and the feedrate exceeds the maximum ...

  • Page 201

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 163 - - To find the movement time required when F10.0 is specified 61060601(min)==×=FRNTIME 6 (sec) is required. • For circular interpolation (G02, G03) arcradiusfeedratetimeFRN==(min)1 Feedrate: mm/min (for metric input) inch/min (for inc...

  • Page 202

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 164 - 5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4 (a). Table 5.4 (a) Cutting Feedrate Control Function name G code Validity of G code Description Exact stop G09 This function is valid for specified bloc...

  • Page 203

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 165 - 5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64), Tapping Mode (G63) Explanation The inter-block paths followed by the tool in the exact stop mode, cutting mode, and tapping mode are different (Fig. 5.4.1 (a)). Tool path in the exact stop modeTo...

  • Page 204

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 166 - 5.4.2 Automatic Corner Override When tool radius compensation is performed, the movement of the tool is automatically decelerated at an inner corner and internal circular area. This reduces the load on the tool and produces a smoothly machined ...

  • Page 205

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 167 - - Override range When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner corner. The distances Ls and Le, where the feedrate is overridden, are distances from points on the tool center path to the...

  • Page 206

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 168 - Limitation - Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Override for inner corners is disabled during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. - Start-up/G41, G42 Override for inner corners is disabled if the corner is preceded by ...

  • Page 207

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 169 - 5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY AXIS Overview This function acquires movement feedrate on imaginary circle by synthetic movement distance is calculated from movement distance of a rotary axis by using instruction angle ...

  • Page 208

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 170 - Instruction feedrate(mm/min)Imaginary radius 半径XYProgram example N1G91G01X10.F10. N2C10. Instruction feedrate is feedrate of a rotary axis on imaginary circle in a radius specified by the parameter. Then, feedrate element of a rotary axis c...

  • Page 209

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 171 - 0mm in imaginary radius When an imaginary radius is assumed 0mm, synthesized distance is as follows because the movement distance of a rotary axis becomes 0mm. 222ZYXL∆+∆+∆=′ A movement feedrate of a linear axis can be instruction feedra...

  • Page 210

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 172 - 10mm36mmInstruction feedrate F=10mm/min Rotation feedrate when36mm setting.:(2) Rotation feedrate when 10mm setting.:(1) Fig. 5.5 (a) - Example 2 When a machine into which direction of a tool changes by a rotary axis like Fig2, movement feedr...

  • Page 211

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 173 - Limitation This function corresponds only the linear interpolation(G01). However, it doesn't correspond to the following functions. • Inverse time feed • Feed per revolution • Normal direction control • High-speed cycle cutting • Cylind...

  • Page 212

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 174 - 5.6 DWELL Format M G04 X_; or G04 P_; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted)P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted) T G04 X_ ; or G04 U_ ; or G04 P_ ; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (deci...

  • Page 213

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 175 - In the case of dwell per second, the specification unit for dwell time specified with P can be fixed at 0.001 second by setting bit 7 (DWT) of parameter No. 1015 to 1. NOTE 1 When X, U, or P is specified without a decimal point, the specificatio...

  • Page 214

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 176 - 6 REFERENCE POSITION A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position. Chapter 6, "REFERENCE POS...

  • Page 215

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 177 - 6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Overview - Reference position The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the reference position return function. For example, the reference position is...

  • Page 216

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 178 - - Reference position return check (G27) The reference position return check (G27) is the function which checks whether the tool has correctly returned to the reference position as specified in the program. If the tool has correctly returned...

  • Page 217

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 179 - Explanation - Automatic reference position return (G28) Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at the rapid traverse rate of each axis. Therefore, for safety, the compensation functions, such as the tool radius ...

  • Page 218

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 180 - - Reference position return check (G27) G27 command positions the tool at rapid traverse rate. If the tool reaches the reference position, the lamp for indicating the completion of reference position return lights up. When the tool returns...

  • Page 219

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 181 - - Setting of the reference position return feedrate Before a coordinate system is established with the first reference position return after power-on, the manual and automatic reference position return feedrates and automatic rapid traverse ...

  • Page 220

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 182 - Limitation - Status the machine lock being turned on The lamp for indicating the completion of reference position return does not go on when the machine lock is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returned to the reference positi...

  • Page 221

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 183 - Example G28G90X1000.0Y500.0 ; (Programs movement from A to B. The tool moves to reference position R via intermediate position B.) T1111 ; (Changing the tool at the reference position) G29X1300.0Y200.0 ; (Programs movement from B to C. ...

  • Page 222

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 184 - 6.2 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1) Tools ca be returned to the floating reference position. A floating reference point is a position on a machine tool, and serves as a reference point for machine tool operation. A floating refer...

  • Page 223

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 185 - Example YXWorkpieceIntermediate position (50,40)Floating referencepositionG30.1 G90 X50.0 Y40.0 ;

  • Page 224

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 186 - 7 COORDINATE SYSTEM By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes. When three progra...

  • Page 225

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 187 - 7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred to as the machine zero point. A machine tool builder sets a machine zero point for each machine. A coordinate system...

  • Page 226

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 188 - Limitation - Cancel of the compensation function When the G53 command is specified, cancel the compensation functions such as the cutter compensation, tool length compensation, tool nose radius compensation, and tool offset. - G53 specifica...

  • Page 227

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 189 - βReference positionMachine coordinate systemMachine zero pointα

  • Page 228

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 190 - 7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM Overview A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate s...

  • Page 229

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 191 - Explanation A workpiece coordinate system is set so that a point on the tool, such as the tool tip, is at specified coordinates. M If a coordinate system is set using G92 during tool length offset, a coordinate system in which the position be...

  • Page 230

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 192 - T (Example 1)Setting the coordinate system by the G50X128.7Z375.1;command (Diameter designation) (The tool nose is thestart point for the program.)(Example 2)Setting the coordinate system by the G50X1200.0Z700.0;command (Diameter designation)...

  • Page 231

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 193 - 7.2.2 Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described below. (For information about the methods of setting, see II-7.2.1.) (1) Once a workpiece coordinate system is set by a wor...

  • Page 232

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 194 - 7.2.3 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing an external workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin offset value. Three methods are available to ch...

  • Page 233

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 195 - - Changing by setting a workpiece coordinate system M G92 IP_ ; T G50 IP_ ; Explanation - Changing by inputting programmable data By specifying a programmable data input G code, the workpiece origin offset value can be changed for each wo...

  • Page 234

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 196 - Example M XX’Y’YTool positionA160100100100200If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the tool is positionedat (200, 160) in G54 mode, workpiece coordinate system 1(X' - Y') shifted by vector A is created.New workpiece coordinate systemOriginal...

  • Page 235

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 197 - Example T XX'Tool positionA160100100100200If G50X100Z100; is commanded when the tool ispositioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, workpiececoordinate system 1 (X' - Z') shifted by vector A iscreated.New workpiece coordinate systemOriginal workpie...

  • Page 236

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 198 - 7.2.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1) The workpiece coordinate system preset function presets a workpiece coordinate system shifted by manual intervention to the pre-shift workpiece coordinate system. The latter system is displace...

  • Page 237

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 199 - If an absolute position detector is provided, the workpiece coordinate system automatically set at power-up has its origin displaced from the machine zero point by the G54 workpiece origin offset value. The machine position at the time of pow...

  • Page 238

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 200 - Limitation - Tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation, tool length compensation, tool offset When using the workpiece coordinate system preset function, cancel compensation modes: Tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation, tool lengt...

  • Page 239

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 201 - 7.2.5 Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair (G54.1 or G54) Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiece coordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 or 300 additional workpiece coordinate systems (additional w...

  • Page 240

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 202 - As with the standard workpiece coordinate systems, the following operations can be performed for a workpiece origin offset in an additional workpiece coordinate system: (1) The workpiece origin offset value setting screen can be used to displ...

  • Page 241

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 203 - 7.2.6 Automatic Coordinate System Setting When bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 for automatic coordinate system setting is 1, a coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is performed. Once α, β, a...

  • Page 242

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 204 - 7.2.7 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift T Explanation When the coordinate system actually set by the G50 command or the automatic system setting deviates from the programmed workpiece system, the set coordinate system can be shifted (see III...

  • Page 243

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 205 - Limitation - Shift amount and coordinate system setting command Specifying a coordinate system setting command (G50 or G92) invalidates the shift amount that has already been set. Example) When G50X100.0Z80.0; is specified, a coordinate syst...

  • Page 244

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 206 - 7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system. Forma...

  • Page 245

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 207 - CAUTION 1 When ZCL (bit 2 of parameter No.1201) is set to 1 and an axis returns to the reference position by the manual reference position return function, the origin of the local coordinate system of the axis matches that of the workpiece co...

  • Page 246

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 208 - 7.4 PLANE SELECTION Select the planes for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and drilling by G-code. The following table lists G-codes and the planes selected by them. Explanation Table 7.4 (a) Plane selected by G code G code Sele...

  • Page 247

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 209 - 8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Chapter 8, "COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION", consists of the following sections: 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING .......210 8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21)..................

  • Page 248

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 210 - 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute programming, and the incremental programming. In the absolute programming, coordinate value of the end position is programme...

  • Page 249

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 211 - Example M Absolute programming Incremental programming G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ;G91 X-60.0 Y40.0 ;YX 70.030.040.0100.0 End point Start point T Tool movement from point P to point Q (diameter programming is used for the X-axis) G code s...

  • Page 250

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 212 - 8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be selected by G code. Format G20 ; Inch input G21 ; Metric input This G code must be specified in an independent block before settin...

  • Page 251

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 213 - Performing inch/metric conversion in the reference position (parameter No. 1240 is not 0) Conventionally, inch/metric conversion must be performed at the machine coordinate system origin. However, setting bit 2 (IRF) of paramete...

  • Page 252

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 214 - • Electronic gear box 2 pair synchronization cancel • Electronic gear box synchronization cancel • Constant surface speed control cancel In addition, performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the referenc...

  • Page 253

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 215 - Switching conditions Performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires satisfying all of the following conditions. Failing to satisfy any of the conditions results in alarm PS1298 being ...

  • Page 254

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 216 - 8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses: M X, Y, Z, U...

  • Page 255

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 217 - NOTE 1 A specified value less than the minimum unit is treated as described below. Example 1) When a value is specified directly at an address (in the case of IS-B) X1.2345 ; Treated as X1.235 X-1.2345 ; Treated as X-1.234...

  • Page 256

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 218 - 8.4 DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING Since the workpiece cross section is usually circular in CNC lathe control programming, its dimensions can be specified in two ways : Diameter and Radius ZaxisABD1X axisD2R1R2D1, D2 : Diameter...

  • Page 257

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 219 - 8.5 DIAMETER AND RADIUS SETTING SWITCHING FUNCTION Overview Usually, whether to use diameter specification or radius specification to specify a travel distance on each axis is uniquely determined by the setting of bit 3 (DIAx) of...

  • Page 258

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 220 - NOTE 1 When operating an input signal by using an M code, for example, during automatic operation, perform a switching operation according to the method below to reflect the state of diameter/radius specification switching in the ...

  • Page 259

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 221 - - Switching operation According to the switching methods above, diameter/radius specification is internally switched as described below. 1) Switching using a signal • When parameter DIAx = 0 (radius specification) → Operati...

  • Page 260

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 222 - - Data not switchable The following data follows the setting of parameter DIAx, so that diameter and radius switching is not performed: • Parameter • Offset • Workpiece coordinate system • Scale display on the graphic scr...

  • Page 261

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 223 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value following address S. Chapter 9, "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 9.1 SPECIF...

  • Page 262

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 224 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9.1 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A CODE When a value is specified after address S, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine to control the spindle rotation speed. A block can contain only one S code. ...

  • Page 263

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 225 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)9.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97) Specify the surface speed (relative speed between the tool and workpiece) following S. The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless of the position of t...

  • Page 264

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 226 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) Explanation - Constant surface speed control command (G96) G96 (constant surface speed control command) is a modal G code. After a G96 command is specified, the program enters the constant surface speed control mode (G96 ...

  • Page 265

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 227 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - Setting the workpiece coordinate system for constant surface speed control To execute the constant surface speed control, it is necessary to set the workpiece coordinate system , and so the coordinate value at the center of...

  • Page 266

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 228 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) Limitation - Constant surface speed control for threading The constant surface speed control is also effective during threading. Accordingly, it is recommended that the constant surface speed control be invalidated with G...

  • Page 267

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 229 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)Example T 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 110012001300 1400150010501475200375500300400700XZ1234N16N16N15N15N14N14N11N11100675600Programmed pathTool path after offsetRadius value φ600φ400 N8 G00 X1000.0Z1400.0 ; N9 T33; ...

  • Page 268

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 230 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9.4 SPINDLE POSITIONING FUNCTION Overview In turning, the spindle connected to the spindle motor is rotated at a certain speed to rotate the workpiece mounted on the spindle. This spindle control status is referred to as ...

  • Page 269

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 231 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)9.4.1 Spindle Orientation When spindle positioning is first performed after the spindle motor is used for normal spindle operation, or when spindle positioning is interrupted, the spindle orientation is required. Orientation ...

  • Page 270

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 232 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9.4.2 Spindle Positioning The spindle can be positioned with a semi-fixed angle or arbitrary angle. - Positioning with a semi-fixed angle Use an M code to specify a positioning angle. The specifiable M code value may be...

  • Page 271

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 233 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - Absolute commands and incremental commands Incremental commands are always used for positioning with a semi-fixed angle (using M codes). The direction of rotation can be specified with bit 1 (IDM) of parameter No. 4950. Abs...

  • Page 272

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 234 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9.4.3 Canceling Spindle Positioning When modes are to be switched from spindle positioning to normal spindle rotation, the M code set in parameter No. 4961 must be specified. Also, the spindle positioning mode is canceled...

  • Page 273

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 235 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)NOTE 1 M code commands for positioning of a spindle must be specified in a single block. Other commands must not be contained in the same block. (Also, M code commands for positioning of another spindle must not be contained i...

  • Page 274

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 236 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9.5 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION Overview With this function, an overheat alarm (OH0704) is raised and the spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle speed deviates from the spe...

  • Page 275

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 237 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)G26 enables the spindle speed fluctuation detection function. The values specified for P, Q, R, and I are set in the following parameters: No. 4914, No. 4911, No. 4912, and No. 4913, respectively. Each command address corre...

  • Page 276

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 238 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - Conditions to start spindle speed fluctuation detection If the specified spindle speed Sc changes, spindle speed fluctuation detection starts when one of the conditions below is met: <1> The actual spindle speed ...

  • Page 277

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 239 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)(Example 2) When an alarm OH0704 is issued before a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed Specified speed Actual speed TimeAlarmStart of check Specification ofanother speedCHECKNO CHECKCHECKSqSqSi Si Sr Sr PG26 mo...

  • Page 278

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 240 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) NOTE 1 An optional function of multi spindle control is necessary. 2 The spindle speed fluctuation detection function is effective for a single spindle. The function cannot be executed for two or more spindles. The spind...

  • Page 279

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 241 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)9.6 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR 9.6.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor - Command with a program This function provides SV speed control mode in which spindle rotation commands, S commands, are effective to a rotation a...

  • Page 280

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 242 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9.6.2 Spindle Indexing Function Format G96.1 P_ R_ ; After spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block is started. G96.2 P_ R_ ; Before spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block is s...

  • Page 281

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 243 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - SV speed control mode cancellation If G96.1 is used to perform spindle indexing, the SV speed control mode is canceled when spindle indexing is completed. If G96.2 is used to perform spindle indexing, G96.3 can be used to c...

  • Page 282

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 244 - 10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) Chapter 10, "TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION..........................................245 10.2 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION.............

  • Page 283

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 245 - 10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION By specifying an up to 8-digit numerical value following address T, a code signal and a strobe signal are transmitted to the machine tool. This is used to select tools on the machine. One T code can be ...

  • Page 284

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 246 - NOTE 1 The maximum number of digits of a T code can be specified by parameter (No.3032) as 1 to 8. 2 When parameter (No.5028) is set to 0, the number of digits used to specify the offset number in a T code depends on the number of to...

  • Page 285

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 247 - 10.2 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION Overview The tool management function totally manages tool information including information about tool offset and tool life. Explanation A tool type number is specified with a T code. The tool type n...

  • Page 286

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 248 - - Details of data The following details the tool management data registered for each data number: • Tool type number (T code) Item Description Data length 4byte Valid data range 0,1 to 99,999,999 • Tool life counter Item Descr...

  • Page 287

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 249 - • Tool life status Item Description Data length 1byte Detail data 0: Life management is not performed. 1: Tool not yet used 2: Life remains. 3: Life expired. 4: Tool breakage (skip) The machine (PMC) determines tool breakage a...

  • Page 288

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 250 - T • Tool geometry compensation number (G) Item Description Data length 2byte Valid data range 0 to 999 • Tool wear compensation number (W) Item Description Data length 2byte Valid data range 0 to 999 NOTE When the machine con...

  • Page 289

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 251 - NOTE For the maximum number of tool management function customization data items, refer to the relevant manual issued by the machine tool builder. - Cartridge management table The storage status of tools in cartridges is managed w...

  • Page 290

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 252 - - Multi-path system The tool management data and cartridge management table are common data among the paths. The spindle management table and standby position table, however, are treated as independent data for each path. When the ...

  • Page 291

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 253 - Tool management data- Data of each tool such as type number, life status, and compensation number - The number of sets of data is 64, 240, or 1000. Cartridge management table- This table indicates the cartridge and pot to which eac...

  • Page 292

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 254 - There are two types of tool life management counting methods: counting the number of use times and counting cutting time. One of the counting methods is set in tool information of tool management data. Other major specifications r...

  • Page 293

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 255 - - Tool search order Tools having a tool type number (T) specified by a program are searched sequentially from tool management data number 1 while registered data contents are checked. The following shows how a search operation is m...

  • Page 294

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 256 - - System variables The following tool management data of the tool being used as a spindle after a tool change by M06 and the tool to be used next which is specified by a T code can be read through custom macro variables: Being used ...

  • Page 295

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 257 - Being used Item #8464 Customize data 34 #8465 Customize data 35 #8466 Customize data 36 #8467 Customize data 37 #8468 Customize data 38 #8469 Customize data 39 #8470 Customize data 40 When a cartridge number of a spindle position (1...

  • Page 296

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 258 - - Specifying a tool compensation number M When parameter No. 13265 is 0, a compensation number registered as tool management data of a tool attached at a spindle position can be selected by specifying H99 or D99. (99 is treated as ...

  • Page 297

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 259 - Spindle selection When specifying compensation numbers of a tool attached to a spindle other than the first spindle, specify the spindle number with address P within the same block that contains H/D. When specifying the first spindl...

  • Page 298

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 260 - - Registering new tool management data Tool management data can be registered. When data is punched out to an external device from the tool management data screen, this format is used. The specification of those items that are not...

  • Page 299

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 261 - Modifying tool management data Tool management data can be modified. The specification of those items that are not modified may be omitted. G10 L75 P2 ; N_ ; T_ C_ L_ I_ B_ Q_ H_ D_ S_ F_ J_ K_ ; P_ R_ ; N_ ; : G11 ; Deleting ...

  • Page 300

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 262 - Modifying the cartridge management table Tool management data numbers in the cartridge management table can be modified. G10 L76 P2 ; N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ; N cartridge-number P pot-number ...

  • Page 301

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 263 - Naming customization data The display name of customization data (0 to 40) can be set. G10 L77 P1 ; N_ ; P_ R_ ; P_ R_ ; ; N_ ; P_ R_ ; P_ R_ ; G11 ; N_: Customization data No. (0 to 40) P_: Character No. (1 to 16) R_: Character...

  • Page 302

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 264 - Naming tool life states The display name of a tool life state (0 to 4) can be set. G10 L77 P2 ; N_ ; P_ R_ ; P_ R_ ; N_ ; P_ R_ ; P_ R_ ; G11 ; N_: Tool life state (0 to 4) P_: Character No. (1 to 12) R_: Character code (ANK or...

  • Page 303

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 265 - 10.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT EXTENSION FUNCTION Overview The following functions have been added to the tool management function: 1. Customization of tool management data display 2. Setting of spindle position/standby position display 3. In...

  • Page 304

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 266 - R Item Display widthRemarks 5 T-INFORMATION 10 6 L-COUNT 10 7 MAX-LIFE 10 8 NOTICE-L 10 9 L-STATE 6 or 12 The display width is switched by bit 1 of parameter No. 13201. 10 S (Spindle speed) 10 11 F (Feedrate) 10 12 Tool figure ...

  • Page 305

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 267 - Items related to customize data R Item Display widthRemarks 80 CUSTOM 0 10 81 CUSTOM 1 10 82 CUSTOM 2 10 83 CUSTOM 3 10 84 CUSTOM 4 10 85 CUSTOM 5 10 86 CUSTOM 6 10 87 CUSTOM 7 10 88 CUSTOM 8 10 89 CUSTOM 9 10 90 CUSTOM 10 10 9...

  • Page 306

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 268 - Example Example of setting tool offset memory A G10L77P3; Set tool management data screen display customization N1 R1; Set No. as number 1 N2 R2; Set TYPE-NO. as number 2 N3 R3; Set MG as number 3 N4 R4; Set POT as number 4 N5 R5; Se...

  • Page 307

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 269 - Example 1: Page 2 NOTE 1 This setting is enabled when bit 0 (TDC) of parameter No. 13201 is set to 1. 2 Up to 20 pages can be set. 3 Be sure to specify an end. 4 If an item that requires the corresponding option is specified witho...

  • Page 308

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 270 - 10.3.2 Setting of Spindle Position / Standby Position Display In MG on the tool management data screen, a spindle position or standby position is displayed as a number such as 11, 12, and 13. With the spindle position/standby posit...

  • Page 309

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 271 - - Character number (P_) Specify a character number (1 to 3). Up to three characters are displayed. If a character string to be specified is shorter than three characters, specify 0 in the leading blank character position(s). A ch...

  • Page 310

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 272 - 10.3.3 Input of Customize Data with the Decimal Point With the function for input of customize data with the decimal point, the number of decimal places can be set using the G10 format for each customize data item (customize data 1,...

  • Page 311

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 273 - Example 1 When customize data 1 and customize data 2 are input with three decimal places G10L77P5; Set the number of decimal places for customize data N1 R3; Set the number of decimal places to 3 for customize data 1 N2 R3; Set the n...

  • Page 312

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 274 - Example 2 (Example 1) Condition: "3" is set as the decimal point position of customize data 1. "1" is set as the decimal point position of customize data 2. Operation: Data is transferred from customize data 1 ...

  • Page 313

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 275 - 10.3.4 Protection of Various Tool Information Items with the KEY Signal When tool management data is in the edit state, various information items can be modified. By setting bit 0 of parameter No. 13204 to 1, tool management data c...

  • Page 314

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 276 - 10.3.6 Each tool Data Screen All data for a specified tool can be extracted and displayed. 10.3.7 Total Life Time Display for Tools of The Same Type The remaining lives of tools with the same type numbers are totaled, and totals a...

  • Page 315

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 277 - 10.4 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION FOR OVERSIZE TOOLS Overview Tool management function for oversize tools is added to the tool management function. The figure of an oversize tool can be defined freely, and the figure of each oversize to...

  • Page 316

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 278 - NOTE 1 If a target tool is registered in a cartridge and interferes with other tools in registration or modification of tool figure data of the tool management data, alarm PS5360 is issued. (The data is not input.) 2 If a tool inter...

  • Page 317

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 279 - 10.5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Tools are classified into several groups, and a tool life (use count or use duration) is specified for each group in advance. Each time a tool is used, its life is counted, and when the tool life expires, ...

  • Page 318

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 280 - - Life management B function If the tool life management B function is enabled, the maximum tool life value can be extended, and the tool life expiration prior notice signal can be output to post tool life expiration in advance when...

  • Page 319

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 281 - 10.5.1 Tool Life Management Data Tool life management data consists of tool group numbers, tool numbers, codes for specifying a tool offset value, tool life values, arbitrary group numbers, and remaining life settings. Whether to us...

  • Page 320

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 282 - - Codes for specifying a tool offset value M Codes for specifying a tool offset value include an H code (for tool length offset) and a D code (for cutter compensation). Numbers up to 999 (up to three digits long) can be register...

  • Page 321

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 283 - - Remaining life setting Bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is used to specify which value, a value set for each group or a parameter-set value (parameters No. 6844 and 6845), is to be used as the remaining life setting until a new t...

  • Page 322

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 284 - 10.5.2 Registering, Changing, and Deleting Tool Life Management Data By programming, tool life management data can be registered in the CNC, and registered tool life management data can be changed or deleted. Explanation The progra...

  • Page 323

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 285 - T Format Meaning G10L3; P-L-; T-(D-); T-(D-); : P-L-; T-(D-); T-(D-); : G11; M02(M30); G10L3: Register data after deleting data of all groups. P-: Group number L-: Tool life value T-: For turret type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter N...

  • Page 324

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 286 - - Change of tool life management data M Format Meaning G10L3P1; P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : G11; M02(M30); G10L3P1: Start changing group data. P-: Group number L-: Tool life value T-: Tool number H-: Code ...

  • Page 325

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 287 - - Setting of tool life count type Format Meaning G10L3 (or G10L3P1); P-L-Q-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : G11; M02(M30); Q: Life count type (1: Use count. 2: Duration.) CAUTION If the Q command is omitted, the life count type ...

  • Page 326

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 288 - T The function for specifying an arbitrary group number is available only if the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1). If the tool change type is the ATC type, the format used for setting an arbitr...

  • Page 327

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 289 - Tool life value - If the life management B function is disabled If the tool life management B function is disabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 0), a tool life value is registered as a duration or a use count according to th...

  • Page 328

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 290 - 10.5.3 Tool Life Management Commands in Machining Program Explanation M - Commands The following commands are used for tool life management: T○○○○○○○○; Specifies a tool group number. The tool life management fu...

  • Page 329

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 291 - H00; Cancels tool length offset. D99; Selects the D code registered in tool life management data for the currently used tool to perform cutter compensation. Parameter No. 13266 can be used to enable compensation according t...

  • Page 330

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 292 - NOTE If a tool group number is specified and a new tool is selected, the new tool selection signal is output. - Tool length compensation in tool axis direction - Tool center point control For these functions, a compensation val...

  • Page 331

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 293 - Example: Suppose that the tool offset is specified with the lower two digits, and that two offset numbers are set for the same tool number in group 1 with the following two T codes: T10001 T10002 The first T199 command issued si...

  • Page 332

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 294 - Example: If there are one to nine tool offsets: Lowest digit If there are 10 to 99 tool offsets: Lower two digits If there are 100 to 999 tool offsets: Lower three digits NOTE Offset start and cancel operations involve compensat...

  • Page 333

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 295 - Examples M - Tool change type A If a block specifying a tool change command (M06) also contains a tool group command (T code), the T code is used as a command for returning the tool to its cartridge. By specifying a tool group num...

  • Page 334

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 296 - - Tool change types B and C If a block specifying a tool change command (M06) also contains a tool group command (T code), the T code is used to specify a tool group number for which life counting is to be performed by the next tool...

  • Page 335

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 297 - - Tool change type D For a tool selected by a tool group command (T code), life counting is performed by a tool change command (M06) specified in the same block as the tool group command. Specifying a T code alone does not results ...

  • Page 336

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 298 - T For the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1), commands are specified in the same manner as for the M series except that D99 rather than H99 is used. For the ATC type, see the description for the M series. The following...

  • Page 337

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 299 - 10.5.4 Tool Life Counting and Tool Selection Either use count specification or duration specification is selected as the tool life count type according to the state of bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800. Life counting is performed f...

  • Page 338

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 300 - - Duration specification (LTM=1) After all registered tool life management data is deleted, programmed tool life management data is registered. If a tool group command (T code) is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is sele...

  • Page 339

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 301 - Setting bit 2 (LFV) of parameter No. 6801 enables the life count to be overridden according tool life count override signals. An override from 0 times to 99.9 times can be applied. If 0 times is specified, counting is not performed...

  • Page 340

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 302 - - M99 If the life count is specified by use count and bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 6802 is 1, the tool change signal TLCH<Fn064.0> is output and the automatic operation is stopped if the life of at least one tool group has exp...

  • Page 341

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 303 - 10.5.5 Tool Life Count Restart M Code Explanation M If the life count is specified by use count, the tool change signal is output if the life of at least one tool group has expired when a tool life count restart M code is issued. ...

  • Page 342

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 304 - T If the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1), the same specifications as for the M series apply. See the description for the M series. The following explanation assumes that the tool change type ...

  • Page 343

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 305 - 10.5.6 Disabling Life Count Explanation M T If bit 6 (LFI) of parameter No. 6804 is “1”, the tool life count disable signal LFCIV can be used to select whether to cancel the tool life count. If the tool life count disable si...

  • Page 344

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 306 - 11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION Overview There are two types of auxiliary functions ; auxiliary function (M code) for specifying spindle start, spindle stop, program end, and so on, and secondary auxiliary function (B code) for specifying index table...

  • Page 345

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 307 - 11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION) When a numeral is specified following address M, code signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on or off its functions. Usually, only one M code can be s...

  • Page 346

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 308 - 11.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. By setting bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 to 1, however, up to three M codes can be specified simultaneously in one block. Up to three M ...

  • Page 347

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 309 - 11.3 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION Overview Classifying a maximum of 500 M codes into a maximum of 127 groups allows the user: • To receive an alarm if an M code that must be specified alone is included when multiple M codes are specified in a...

  • Page 348

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 310 - In the “DATA” field, the M code group number corresponding to each M code is displayed. - Setting a group number To set an M code group number on the “M code group setting screen (Fig. 11.3 (a)),” use he following procedure: 1 Sel...

  • Page 349

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 311 - (2) When <1> = 200, <2> = 0, <3> = 550, and <4> = 800 are set M code groups can be set for M0000 to M0099, M0200 to M0299, M0550 to M0649, and M0800 to M0899. (The setting of parameter <2> is invalid because...

  • Page 350

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 312 - 11.3.2 Setting an M Code Group Number Using a Program You can execute a program to set an M code group number and M code name. The command format is shown below. Format G10 L40 Pn Rg ; Pn: “n” specifies an M code. Rg: “g” specifie...

  • Page 351

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 313 - 11.3.3 M Code Group Check Function When multiple M commands in a single block (enabled when bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1) are used, you can check the following items. You can also select whether to check the items using bi...

  • Page 352

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 314 - 11.4 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) Overview If a value with a maximum of eight digits is specified after address B, the code signal and strobe signal are transferred for calculation of the rotation axis. The code signal is retained ...

  • Page 353

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 315 - 2. When a command with a decimal point or a negative command is enabled (When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No.3450 is set to 1) When the desktop calculator decimal point setting is not specified (when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.3401 is set t...

  • Page 354

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 316 - The magnification is determined as shown below according to the setting unit of the reference axis (specified by parameter No.1031) and bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No.3405. Table 11.4 (a) Magnifications for an output value when the second au...

  • Page 355

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 317 - 12 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Chapter 12, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", consists of the following sections: 12.1 FOLDERS ..............................................................................318 12.2 FILES ..................................

  • Page 356

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 318 - 12.1 FOLDERS Overview Folders can be created in program memory. 12.1.1 Folder Configuration The following folders can be created: • Folder names are up to 32 characters long. • The following characters can be used in folder names: Alp...

  • Page 357

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 319 - [Initial folder configuration]/ SYSTEM///CNC_MEMMTB1/ USER/ PATH1/ PATH2/ LIBRARY/(1) Root folder (2) System folder (SYSTEM) (3) MTB dedicated folder 1 (MTB1)(5) User folder (b) Common program folder (LIBRARY)(a) Path folders (PATHn) The de...

  • Page 358

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 320 - - User created folders Folders other than the initial folders are called user created folders. User created folders can be created in the following initial folders: • User folder • Path folders User created folders can contain user crea...

  • Page 359

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 321 - 12.1.2 Folder Attributes The following attributes can be set for folders except the root folder: • Edit disable • Edit/display disable - Edit disable Editing of the programs and folders in a folder can be disabled. A program in the fo...

  • Page 360

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 322 - 12.1.3 Default Folders Default folders are folders on which operations are performed when no folder is specified. There are two types of default folders as follows: • Foreground default folder • Background default folder - Foreground...

  • Page 361

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 323 - 12.2 FILES Overview Desired file names can be given to part programs in program memory. 12.2.1 File Name File names can be set as follows: • File names are up to 32 characters long. • The following characters can be used in file names...

  • Page 362

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 324 - - Displaying File Names and Program Numbers The file name of the program selected or being executed as the main program is displayed as shown in Figs. 12.2.1 (a) to 12.2.2 (c). • For file names that can be handled as program numbers, the...

  • Page 363

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 325 - 12.2.2 File Attributes The following attributes can be set for files: • Edit disable • Edit/display disable • Encoding • Change protection level/output protection level - Edit disable Editing of a specified program can be disabled...

  • Page 364

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 326 - 12.3 RELATION WITH CONVENTIONAL FUNCTIONS This section explains relation with conventional functions when folder names and file names are used. 12.3.1 Relation with Folders This subsection explains how folders are used for operations and ...

  • Page 365

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 327 - - Program editing A program in any folder can be edited. - Program I/O The following functions are performed for default folders: • Program input from external devices • Program output to external devices (Except the format with fol...

  • Page 366

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 328 - 12.3.2 Relation with File Names File names can be used with the following functions: • Subprogram call (M98) • Macro call (simple call G65/modal call G66, G66.1) • Interruption type macro call (M96) • Subprogram call in figure copyi...

  • Page 367

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 329 - NOTE 1 When characters in <> are read, they are treated in the same way as for characters in comments. So, note that these characters are treated differently from other significant information portions. Refer to Appendix B “PROGRAM...

  • Page 368

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 330 - 12.3.4 Part Program Storage Size / Number of Registerable Programs The following table lists the combinations of program storage sizes and the total number of registrable programs. Part program storage sizeNumber of registerable programs Nu...

  • Page 369

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 331 - 13 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION Overview - Main program and subprogram There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encoun...

  • Page 370

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 332 - - Program components A program consists of the following components: Table 13 (a) Program components Components Descriptions Program code start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a progra...

  • Page 371

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 333 - 13.1 PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN PROGRAM SECTIONS This section describes program components other than program sections. See II-13.2 for a program section. %TITLE;O0001 ;M30 ;%(COMMENT)Program code startProgram sectionLeader sectionPro...

  • Page 372

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 334 - - Program start The program start code is to be entered immediately after a leader section, that is, immediately before a program section. This code indicates the start of a program, and is always required to disable the label skip func...

  • Page 373

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 335 - CAUTION If a long comment section appears in the middle of a program section, a move along an axis may be suspended for a long time because of such a comment section. So a comment section should be placed where movement suspension may o...

  • Page 374

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 336 - 13.2 PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION This section describes elements of a program section. See II-13.1 for program components other than program sections. %(COMMENT)%TITLE ;O0001 ;N1 ... ;M30 ;Program sectionProgram numberSequence number...

  • Page 375

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 337 - - File name A file name can be assigned instead of a program number. When coding a file name, be sure to place the file name enclosed in "<" and ">" at the beginning of a program. Example) % ; <PARTS_1> ;...

  • Page 376

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 338 - - TV check (Vertical parity check) A parity check is made for each block of input data. If the number of characters in one block (starting with the code immediately after an EOB and ending with the next EOB) is odd, a P/S alarm (No.002) ...

  • Page 377

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 339 - NOTE (*) In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can also be used as the address of a program number. N_ G_ X_ Y_ F_ S_ T_ M_ ;Sequence number Preparatory function Dimension word Feed-function Spindle speed function Tool function Auxiliary funct...

  • Page 378

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 340 - Function Address Input in mm Input in inch Increment system IS-A 0 to 999999.99 sec 0 to 999999.99 sec Increment system IS-B 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec Increment system IS-C 0 to 9999.9999 sec 0 to 9999.9999 sec Increment syste...

  • Page 379

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 341 - Input signal and program code Input signal Start code to be ignored BDT1 / or /1(NOTE) BDT2 /2 BDT3 /3 BDT4 /4 BDT5 /5 BDT6 /6 BDT7 /7 BDT8 /8 BDT9 /9 NOTE 1 Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more optional block skips...

  • Page 380

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 342 - 3. When the signal BDTn is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block that contains /n, the block is ignored. BDTn "1""0"Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200.; N234 . . . .This range of information is ign...

  • Page 381

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 343 - - Program end The end of a program is indicated by programming one of the following codes at the end of the program: Table 13.2 (d) Code of a program end Code Meaning usage M02 M03 For main program M99 For subprogram If one of the prog...

  • Page 382

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 344 - 13.3 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99) If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify the program. A subprogram can be called from the main progra...

  • Page 383

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 345 - - Called program and folders to be searched The order in which folders are searched depends on the method of calling a subprogram. Folders are searched in sequence and the program found first is called. For details, see the "Manag...

  • Page 384

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 346 - Explanation When the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one-level subprogram call. Thus, subprogram calls can be nested up to ten levels as shown below. O0001 ; M98P0010 ; M30 ; Main program O0090 ;M99 ;O0010 ; M98P0020 ...

  • Page 385

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 347 - Special usage - Specifying the sequence number for the return destination in the main program If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram is terminated, control does not return to the block after the calling block, but re...

  • Page 386

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 348 - - Using a subprogram only A subprogram can be executed just like a main program by searching for the start of the subprogram with the MDI. (See III-10.4 for information about search operation.) In this case, if a block containing M99 is ...

  • Page 387

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 349 - O0001 ; N0010…; N0020 M98 (P0001) Q0050 ; N0030…; N0040…; N0050…; N0060…; N0070…M99; For a call within the same program, specification of Pxxxx in a block can be omitted when the block includes M98. This function is usable...

  • Page 388

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 350 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING 14 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Chapter 14, "FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING", consists of the following sections: 14.1 FIGURE COPYING (G72.1, G72.2)......................................351 14.2 THREE-DIM...

  • Page 389

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 351 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING14.1 FIGURE COPYING (G72.1, G72.2) Machining can be repeated after moving or rotating the figure using a subprogram. Format - Rotational copying Xp-Yp plane (specified by G17) : G72.1 P_ L_ Xp_Yp_R_ ; Zp-Xp plane (specifi...

  • Page 390

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 352 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Explanation - First block of the subprogram Always specify a move command in the first block of a subprogram that performs a rotational or linear copying. If the first block contains only the program number such as O1234; ...

  • Page 391

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 353 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Increment in angular displacement or shift In a block with G72.1, an increment in angular displacement is specified with address R. The angular displacement of the figure made by the n-th rotation is calculated as follows : ...

  • Page 392

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 354 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Disagreement between end point and start point If the end point of the figure made by the n-th copy does not agree with the start point of the figure to be made by the next (n + 1) copy, the figure is moved from the end p...

  • Page 393

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 355 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGLimitation - Specifying two or more commands to copy a figure G72.1 cannot be specified more than once in a subprogram for making a rotational copying (If this is attempted, alarm PS0160 will occur). G72.2 cannot be specified ...

  • Page 394

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 356 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Example - Rotational copying Start point Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 X40.0 Y50.0 ; N20 G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; (P0)N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P1) N40 G72.1 P2000 L3 X0 Y0 R120.0 ; N50 G40 G01 X_ Y_ I_ ...

  • Page 395

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 357 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Rotational copying (spot boring) Main programO3000 ;N10 G92 G17 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0)N20 G72.1 P4000 L6 X0 Y0 R60.0 ;N30 G80 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0)N40 M30 ;SubprogramO4000 N100 G90 G81 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ ;...

  • Page 396

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 358 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Combination of rotational copying and linear copying (bolt hole circle) Main programO1000 ;N10 G92 G17 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0)N20 G72.1 P2000 X0 Y0 L8 R45.0 ;N30 G80 G00 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0)N40 M30 ;Sub...

  • Page 397

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 359 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING14.2 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION Coordinate system conversion about an axis can be carried out if the center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement are specified. This funct...

  • Page 398

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 360 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Format M G68 XpX1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rα ; Starting three-dimensional coordinate system : conversion : Three-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode G69 ; Canceling three-dimensional coordinate system convers...

  • Page 399

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 361 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGWhen this block is executed, the center of the original coordinate system is shifted to (x1, y1, z1), then rotated around the vector (i1, j1, k1) by angular displacement α. The new coordinate system is called X'Y'Z'. In the N2...

  • Page 400

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 362 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Format error If one of the following format errors is detected, alarm PS5044 occurs: 1. When I, J, or K is not specified in a block with G68 (a parameter of coordinate system rotation is not specified) 2. When I, J, and...

  • Page 401

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 363 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGConversion matrices for rotation on two-dimensional planes are shown below: (1) Coordinate system conversion on the XY plane −=1000cossin0sincosθθθθM (2) Coordinate system conversion on the Y...

  • Page 402

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 364 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Angular displacement R A positive angular displacement R indicates a clockwise rotation along the axis of rotation. Specify angular displacement R in 0.001 degrees within the range of -360000 to 360000. To specify angula...

  • Page 403

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 365 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGT G90 Absolute programming (when G code system B or C is used.) G91 Incremental programming (when G code system B or C is used.) G94 Feed per minute (when G code system B or C is used.) G95 Feed per revolution(when G code s...

  • Page 404

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 366 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Reset If a reset occurs during three-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, the mode is canceled and the continuous-state G code is changed to G69. Bit 2 (D3R) of parameter No. 5400 determines whether just the G69...

  • Page 405

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 367 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Mirror image M Programmable mirror image can be specified, but external mirror image (mirror image by the mirror image signal or setting) cannot be specified. Three-dimensional coordinate system conversion is carried out aft...

  • Page 406

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 368 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - PMC axis control In the three-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, PMC axis control cannot be performed for the three axes related to the conversion (alarm). - Manual operation When manual feeding is performe...

  • Page 407

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 369 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGExample N1 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Carries out positioning to zero point H. N2 G68 X10. Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R30. ; Forms new coordinate system X'Y'Z'. N3 G68 X0 Y-10. Z0 I0 J0 K1 R-90. ; Forms other coordinate system X''Y''Z''. The origin...

  • Page 408

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 370 - 15 COMPENSATION FUNCTION Chapter 15, "COMPENSATION FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 15.1 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49) ........371 15.2 SCALING (G50, G51) .................................................

  • Page 409

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 371 - 15.1 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49) This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool length assumed during programming and the actual tool length of the tool used into the offset memory. It is possible to co...

  • Page 410

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 372 - Explanation - Selection of tool length compensation Select tool length compensation A, B, or C, by setting bits 0 (TLC) and 1 (TLB) of parameter No.5001 . Parameter No.5001 Bit 1 (TLB) Bit 0 (TLC) Type 0 0 Tool length compensation A 1 0...

  • Page 411

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 373 - - Specification of the tool length compensation value The tool length compensation value assigned to the number (offset number) specified in the H code is selected from offset memory and added to or subtracted from the moving command in ...

  • Page 412

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 374 - - Performing tool length compensation along two or more axes Tool length compensation B can be executed along two or more axes when the axes are specified in two or more blocks. By setting bit 3 (TAL) of parameter No. 5001 to 1, tool len...

  • Page 413

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 375 - NOTE 1 If offset is executed along two or more axes, offset along all axes is canceled by specifying G49. If H0 is used to specify cancellation, offset along only the axis normal to a selected plane is canceled in the case of tool length...

  • Page 414

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 376 - Example Actual positionProgrammed position Offset value =4mm #1203030120 #3 #2+Y +X3050 +Z 3353018228Tool length compensation (in boring holes #1, #2, and #3) (1) (2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7) (8)(9) (13)(10) (11) (12) Program H1=-4.0 (Tool length...

  • Page 415

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 377 - 15.1.2 G53, G28, G30, and G30.1 Commands in Tool Length Compensation Mode This section describes the tool length compensation cancellation and restoration performed when G53, G28, G30, or G31 is specified in tool length compensation mode...

  • Page 416

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 378 - CAUTION If tool length compensation is applied along multiple axes, the offset vector along the axis on which a reference position return operation has been performed is canceled. - Tool length compensation vector restoration Tool len...

  • Page 417

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 379 - 15.2 SCALING (G50, G51) Overview A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). Two types of scaling are available, one in which the same magnification rate is applied to each axis and the other in which different magnificati...

  • Page 418

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 380 - T NOTE This function is available when the G-code system B or C is set. CAUTION 1 Specify G51 in a separate block. 2 After the figure is enlarged or reduced, specify G50 to cancel the scaling mode. NOTE 1 Entering electronic calculat...

  • Page 419

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 381 - CAUTION With the move command subsequent to the G51 block, execute an absolute (G90 mode) position command. If no absolute position command is executed after the G51 block, the position assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the scal...

  • Page 420

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 382 - Y axisX axisbada/b: Scaling magnification of X axisc/d: Scaling magnification of Y axis o : Scaling centerProgrammed figureScaled figureoc Fig. 15.2 (b) Scaling of each axis CAUTION Specifying the following commands at the same time ...

  • Page 421

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 383 - - Scaling of circular interpolation Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular interpolation, the tool will not trace an ellipse. G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0; G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000; (A magnification of...

  • Page 422

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 384 - - Scaling and coordinate system rotation If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the same time, scaling is performed first, followed by coordinate system rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotati...

  • Page 423

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 385 - - Scaling and optional chamfering/corner R ChamferingScalingx 2 in the X directionx 1 in the Y directionCorner RIf different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner R results ina spiral, not an arc, because scaling is a...

  • Page 424

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 386 - - Invalid scaling M Scaling is not applied to the travel distance during canned cycle shown below. • Cut-in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle (G83, G73). • Fine boring cycle (G76) • Shift value Q of X and Y axes...

  • Page 425

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 387 - CAUTION 1 If a parameter setting value is employed as a scaling magnification without specifying P, the setting value at G51 command time is employed as the scaling magnification, and a change of this value, if any, is not effective. 2 ...

  • Page 426

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 388 - Example Sample program of a scaling in each axis O1; G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I750 J250; (× 0.75 in the X direction, × 0.25 in the Y direction) G00 G90 X60.0 Y50.0; G01 X120.0 F100; G01 Y90; G01 X60; G01 Y50; G50; M30; Y axisX axis100...

  • Page 427

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 389 - 15.3 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with respect to a programmed axis of symmetry (Fig. 15.3 (a)). Y100605050X60100(1)(2)(3)(4)(1) Original image of a programmed command(2...

  • Page 428

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 390 - Explanation - Mirror image by setting If the programmable mirror image function is specified when the command for producing a mirror image is also selected by a CNC external switch or CNC setting (see III-4.5), the programmable mirror im...

  • Page 429

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 391 - 15.4 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) Overview When a tool with a rotation axis (C-axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that the C-axis is always perpend...

  • Page 430

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 392 - Center of the arc Programmed tool path Tool center path Tool center path Programmed tool path Fig. 15.4 (b) Normal direction control, left (G41.1) Fig. 15.4 (c) Normal direction control, right (G42.1) Explanation - Angle of the C ax...

  • Page 431

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 393 - In single-block operation, the tool is not stopped between a command for rotation of the tool and a command for movement along the X- and Y-axes. A single-block stop always occurs after the tool is moved along the X- and Y-axes. SN1N2SN3...

  • Page 432

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 394 - - C axis feedrate Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executed at the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at that time, the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along the X...

  • Page 433

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 395 - - Movement for which arc insertion is ignored Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with the same normal direction as that of the preceding block. • Linear movement When distance N2, shown below, is smaller tha...

  • Page 434

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 396 - T NOTE 1 In the normal direction control mode, the following commands cannot be issued. An attempt to issue any of them results in alarm PS1471 being raised. - Plane selection command (G17, G18, G19) - Automatic reference position return...

  • Page 435

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 397 - 15.5 WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION When a workpiece is placed on the machine, the workpiece is not always placed at an ideal position. With this function, a displaced workpiece can be machined according to the program. This functi...

  • Page 436

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 398 - Explanation - Workpiece setting error A workpiece setting error is defined by the following eight variables: • X direction error ∆x • Y direction error ∆y • Z direction error ∆z • Rotation direction error ∆a (rotation err...

  • Page 437

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 399 - [About ∆a, ∆b, and ∆c] ∆a, ∆b, and ∆c are defined as described below. The workpiece coordinate system obtained by rotating a workpiece coordinate system about the X-axis by angle ∆a, about the Y-axis by angle ∆b, and about...

  • Page 438

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 400 - The example of Fig. 15.5 (b) assumes that ∆a = ∆b = 0 and ∆c represents a nonzero value. [About table rotation axis position 1 and table rotation axis position 2] The table rotation axis position means the machine coordinate on th...

  • Page 439

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 401 - When the workpiece setting error of No. 02 is selected, workpiece setting error compensation is performed based on the following: ∆x = 10.000+0.800 = 10.800 ∆a = 1.800 If the setting of table rotation axis position 1/table rotati...

  • Page 440

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 402 - When the workpiece setting error of No. 01 is selected, workpiece setting error compensation is performed as follows based on the converted error values based on C = 0.000: ∆x = 10.000+0.000 = 10.000 ∆y = 0.000+5.000 = 5.000 ∆c = 2....

  • Page 441

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 403 - [About table rotation axis position 1 and table rotation axis position 2] The unit of data follows the least input increment of each corresponding rotation axis. Unit system of rotation axis IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Least input incr...

  • Page 442

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 404 - - Workpiece setting error compensation mode By specifying G54.4 Pn (n: 1 to 7), the workpiece setting error compensation mode is set. With Pn, select a workpiece setting error from No. 01 to No. 07. In the workpiece setting error compens...

  • Page 443

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 405 - - Tool direction compensation on a 5-axis machine With a 5-axis machine, tool direction compensation must be performed by setting bit 0 (RCM) of parameter No. 11200 to 1. This means that rotation axis position compensation is performed ...

  • Page 444

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 406 - Parameter No. Description 1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode1772 Acceleration/deceleration change time in bell-shaped acceleration/d...

  • Page 445

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 407 - If linear interpolation or circular interpolation is specified on a machine of table rotation type or composite type, linear interpolation or circular interpolation is performed as viewed from the workpiece on the table. <Example> ...

  • Page 446

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 408 - - "Rotation axis closer to the tool" and "rotation axis closer to the workpiece" on a 5-axis machine When tool direction compensation is performed on a 5-axis machine, a singular point and singular point posture need ...

  • Page 447

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 409 - - Singular point and singular point posture on a 5-axis machine A tool posture is uniquely determined when the angles of the two rotation axes are determined. Usually, however, a combination of the angles of the two rotation axes for ac...

  • Page 448

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 410 - - Conditions to decide that Tool is in singular posture When the angle between the tool and the singular posture is less than the parameter No.11204, it is decided that the tool is in singular posture. In the descriptions below, the desc...

  • Page 449

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 411 - Assume that the workpiece setting error around the Y-axis exists, and the tool posture after the compensation of tool direction becomes like following figure. (The tools before and after movement are in singular point posture.) ...

  • Page 450

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 412 - (b) When the absolute position after movement in real time is singular, the rotation axis closer to the workpiece moves as commanded. Example: The rotation axis about the Z-axis is the master axis, the rotation axis about the Y-axis is ...

  • Page 451

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 413 - (2) In the case that the current machine position is not singular and the position after movement in real time is singular. : The rotation axis closer to workpiece does not move. Example: The rotation axis about the Z-axis is the master...

  • Page 452

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 414 - (3) In the case that the current machine position is singular and the position after movement in real time is not singular. : In order to position the tool to the correct direction, there are two pairs of solutions of rotation axes angles...

  • Page 453

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 415 - (4) In the case that the current machine position is not singular and the position after movement in real time is not singular. : In order to position the tool to the correct direction, there are two pairs of solutions of rotation axes an...

  • Page 454

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 416 - - When the tool posture is closer to a singular point posture on a 5-axis machine If tool direction compensation is performed on a 5-axis machine, and the tool posture gets closer to a singular point posture during execution of a block, ...

  • Page 455

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 417 - The following is an example that the movement direction(area) depends on position of the rotary axes before starting workpiece setting error compensation. The Master axis is C axis around Z axis, and the Slave axis is B axis around Y axis...

  • Page 456

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 418 - At N50, machine position moves to B90.0 and C90.0, as commanded. Next, suppose there is the error -2.0deg around Y axis and Workpiece setting error ∆b=-2.000 is set, and the block N25 is added as follows : On...

  • Page 457

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 419 - O2 N10 G5.1 Q1 N20 G90 G01 B-1.0 C0 F1000 ; B axis machine position is between the lower limit and the singular point N25 G54.4 P1 N30 G43.4 H1 N40 X0 Y0 Z0 N50 B90.0 C90.0 During N50, Machin...

  • Page 458

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 420 - O3 N10 G5.1 Q1 N20 G90 G01 B1.0 C0 F1000 ; B axis machine position is between the upper limit and the singular point N25 G54.4 P1 N30 G43.4 H1 N40 X0 Y0 Z0 N50 B90.0 C90.0 X Y Z N40 end B ...

  • Page 459

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 421 - This time, machine position moves to B90.0,C90.0 during N50. As the result, B axis does not move over the lower limit of B axis movable range. In O2, the case that B axis moves over the limit of movable range is the case t...

  • Page 460

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 422 - At N50, the machine position moves to B90.0,C90.0. As the result, B axis does not move over the lower limit of B axis movable range. X Y Z N40 end B C Absolute 1.00.0Machine -1.00.0 X Y Z N50 ...

  • Page 461

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 423 - - Error for which the singular point processing is unnecessary Even if tool direction compensation must be performed in a 5-axis machine, the above mentioned singular point processing becomes unnecessary if all workpiece setting errors i...

  • Page 462

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 424 - - Absolute position display Whether absolute coordinates in the workpiece setting error mode are to be displayed in the workpiece coordinate system or workpiece setting coordinate system can be chosen by using bit 6 (DAK) of parameter No...

  • Page 463

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 425 - Examples - Example 1 O1 represents a program that cuts each side of a square. Fig. 15.5 (e) Operation when there is no workpiece setting error Suppose that the workpiece is displaced from the "correct wo...

  • Page 464

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 426 - The workpiece coordinate system, when rotated by -20.000 deg about the Z-axis, shifted by 10.000 in the X direction, and shifted by 20.000 in the Y direction, is to match the workpiece setting coordinate system. At this time, set the fol...

  • Page 465

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 427 - - Example 2 O2 is a program for cutting each side of a square by using tool center point control. The machine is of tool rotation type, the C-axis is the master rotation axis and rotates about the Z-axis, and the B-axis is the slave axis...

  • Page 466

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 428 - Suppose that the workpiece is displaced from the correct workpiece setting position as with example 1, and set a workpiece setting error in the same was as in Example 1. Moreover, add N15,N16,N135 and N136 to O2 as indicated below to vali...

  • Page 467

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 429 - Fig. 15.5 (h) Operation of tool center point control when there is a workpiece setting error Restrictions (general) Described below is the restriction related to workpiece setting compensation errors. Note that, ...

  • Page 468

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 430 - G41.6 3-dimensional cutter compensation left (type 2) (only if also tool center point control is used) G42.2/G42.4/G42.5 3-dimensional cutter compensation right (type 1) (only if also tool center point control is used) G42.6 3-dimension...

  • Page 469

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 431 - G40 Tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation / 3-dimensional cutter compensation cancel G49 (G49.1) Tool length compensation cancel G50 Scaling cancel G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel G50.2 Polygon turning cancel G54 to G59, ...

  • Page 470

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 432 - - Rapid traverse command When using workpiece setting error compensation, specify linear rapid traverse (by setting set bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 to 1). - Relationships with other modal commands The commands for the functions l...

  • Page 471

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 433 - - Feedrate override When tool direction is compensated (bit 0 (RCM) of parameter No.11200=1), the rotation axis compensation is performed to the movement which is modified by the override signals. If a large movement of rotary axis occur...

  • Page 472

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 434 - - Reset To cancel the workpiece setting error compensation mode, be sure to use a reset by resetting bit 2 (D3R) of parameter No. 5400 to 0. Performing tool length compensation (including tool center point control) in the workpiece setti...

  • Page 473

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 435 - - Acceleration/deceleration at a corner When a command for linear interpolation is specified, linear interpolation is performed as viewed from the workpiece on the table. So, even when the command specifies a linear interpolation, the c...

  • Page 474

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 436 - - Combination with tool center point control If bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No. 19696 = 0 (table coordinate system command), starting tool center point control with the table rotation axis position not set at 0 usually causes the workpiece ...

  • Page 475

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 437 - 16 CUSTOM MACRO Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general programs such as p...

  • Page 476

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 438 - 16.1 VARIABLES An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric value; examples are G100 and X100.0. With a custom macro, numeric values can be specified directly or using a variable number. When a...

  • Page 477

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 439 - - Local variable (#1-#33) A local variable is a variable that is used locally in a macro. That is, local variable #i used by a macro called at a certain time is different from that used by a macro called at another time, regardless of whether t...

  • Page 478

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 440 - - System variable A variable whose usage does not vary in the system. The attribute of a system variable is READ only, WRITE only, or READ/WRITE enabled depending on the nature of a system variable. - System constant A system constant can be r...

  • Page 479

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 441 - - Undefined variable When the value of a variable is not defined, such a variable is referred to as a "null" variable. Variables #0 and #3100 are always null variables. They cannot be written to, but they can be read. (a) Quotation ...

  • Page 480

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 442 - • When 0 is assigned to #1 Conditional expression #1 EQ #0 #1 NE 0 #1 GE #0 #1 GT 0 #1 LE #0 #1 LT 0 Evaluation result Not established (false) Not established (false) Established (true) Not established (false) Established (true) Not established ...

  • Page 481

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 443 - - System constant #0, #3100-#3102 (Attribute: R) Constants used as fixed values in the system can be used as system variables. Such constants are called system constants. The system constants provided are shown below. Constant number Constant...

  • Page 482

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 444 - [Example] SETVN 510[TOOL_NO, WORK_NO, COUNTER1, COUNTER2]; The command above names the variables as follows. Variable Name #510 TOOL_NO #511 WORK_NO #512 COUNTER1 #513 COUNTER2 The names specified by the command can be used in a program. For ex...

  • Page 483

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 445 - 16.2 SYSTEM VARIABLES System variables can be used to read and write internal CNC data such as tool compensation values and current position data. System variables are essential for automation and general-purpose program development. List of sy...

  • Page 484

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 446 - - Tool compensation value M Tool compensation memory A System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #2001-#2200 #10001-#10999 [#_OFS[n]] R/W Tool compensation value Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 20...

  • Page 485

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 447 - Tool compensation memory C when bit 3 (V15) of parameter No.6000 = 0 System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #2001-#2200 Tool compensation value (H code, wear) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 200). ...

  • Page 486

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 448 - - Tool compensation value T Without tool geometry/wear compensation memory System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #2001-#2064 #10001-#10999 [#_OFSX[n]] R/W X-axis compensation value (*1) Note) Subscript n represents a...

  • Page 487

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 449 - With tool geometry/wear compensation memory System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #2001-#2064 #10001-#10999 [#_OFSXW[n]] R/W X-axis compensation value (wear) (*1) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to...

  • Page 488

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 450 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #2801-#2849 #16001-#16999 [#_OFSZG[n]] R/W Z-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 49). When the number of sets is larger...

  • Page 489

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 451 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #3006 [#_MSGSTP] W Stop with a message. #3007 [#_MRIMG] R Status of a mirror image (DI and setting) #3008 [#_PRSTR] R Restarting/not restarting a program - Time System variable numb...

  • Page 490

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 452 - - Modal information M System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #4001-#4030 [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (G code) Note) Subscript n represents a G code group number. #410...

  • Page 491

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 453 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #4320 [#_ACTT] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (T code) #4330 [#_ACTWZP] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (additional workpiece coor...

  • Page 492

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 454 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #4120 [#_BUFT] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (T code) #4130 [#_BUFWZP] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (a...

  • Page 493

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 455 - - Position information System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #5001-#5020 End point position of the previous block (workpiece coordinate system) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20) #100001-#100050 [#_ABS...

  • Page 494

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 456 - - Tool offset value T System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #5081, #100201 [#_TOFSWX] X-axis tool offset (wear) #5082, #100202 [#_TOFSWZ] Z-axis tool offset (wear) #5083, #100203 [#_TOFSWY] Y-axis tool offset (wear) ...

  • Page 495

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 457 - - Distance to go System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #5181-#5200 Distance to go Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #100801-#100850 [#_DIST[n]] R The numbers to the left can also be used. Note) Subsc...

  • Page 496

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 458 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #100551-#100600 [#_WZG58[n]] R/W G58 workpiece origin offset value Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 50). #100601-#100650 [#_WZG59[n]] R/W G59 workpiece origin offset ...

  • Page 497

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 459 - T System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #5201-#5220 [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #5221-#5240 [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset v...

  • Page 498

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 460 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #7941-#7960 [#_WZP48[n]] R/W G54.1P48 workpiece origin offset value Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #101001-#101050 [#_WZP1[n]] R/W G54.1P1 workpiece origin off...

  • Page 499

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 461 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #5541-#5560 Standard fixture offset value (second set) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #117101-#117150 [#_FOFS2[n]] R/W The numbers to the left can also be used...

  • Page 500

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 462 - - Second geometry tool offset value T System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #5801-#5832 #27001-#27999 [#_OFSX2G[n]]R/W Second geometry tool offset X-axis compensation value Note) Subscript n represents a compensation...

  • Page 501

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 463 - System variable number System variable nameAttributeDescription #118251-#118300 [#_DOFS5[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value (fifth set) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 50). #118301-#118350 [#_DOFS6[n]] R/W Dynamic s...

  • Page 502

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 464 - Explanation R, W, and R/W are attributes of a variable and represents read-only, write-only, and read/write enabled, respectively. - Interface signal #1000-#1031, #1032, #1033-#1035 (Attribute: R) #1100-#1115, #1132, #1133-#1135 (Attribute: ...

  • Page 503

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 465 - Variable valueInput signal 1.0 Contact closed0.0 Contact opened Since the read value is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system, the unit system must be considered when a macro is created. The input signals at 32 points can be read at a time by ...

  • Page 504

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 466 - Variable number Variable name Point Interface input signal #1125 [#_UO[25]] 1 UO025 (225) #1126 [#_UO[26]] 1 UO026 (226) #1127 [#_UO[27]] 1 UO027 (227) #1128 [#_UO[28]] 1 UO028 (228) #1129 [#_UO[29]] 1 UO029 (229) #1130 [#_UO[30]] 1 UO030 (2...

  • Page 505

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 467 - Example Structure of DI 215 2142132122112102928272625 24 23 222120 Used for other purposes Sign102 101 100 Structure of DO 28272625 24 23 222120 Not used Used for other purposes Address <...

  • Page 506

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 468 - - Tool compensation value #2001-#2800, #10001-#13999 (Attribute: R/W) M The compensation values can be obtained by reading system variables #2001 to #2800 or #10001 to #13999 for tool compensation. The compensation values can also be changed b...

  • Page 507

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 469 - When bit 3 (V15) of parameter No.6000 = 1 Wear Geometry Compensation number Variable numberVariable nameVariable number Variable name1 #2201 [#_OFSW[1]] #2001 [#_OFSG[1]] 2 #2202 [#_OFSW[2]] #2002 [#_OFSG[2]] 3 #2203 [#_OFSW[3]] #2003 [#_OFSG[3]]...

  • Page 508

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 470 - When bit 3 (V15) of parameter No.6000 = 1 H code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable nameVariable number Variable name1 #2001 [#_OFSHG[1]] #2201 [#_OFSHW[1]] 2 #2002 [#_OFSHG[2]] #2202 [#_OFSHW[2]] 3 #2003 [#_OFSHG[3]] #2203...

  • Page 509

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 471 - D code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable nameVariable number Variable name1 #13001 [#_OFSDG[1]] #12001 [#_OFSDW[1]]2 #13002 [#_OFSDG[2]] #12002 [#_OFSDW[2]]3 #13003 [#_OFSDG[3]] #12003 [#_OFSDW[3]]: : : : : 998 #13998 [#_OF...

  • Page 510

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 472 - - Tool compensation value #2001-#2964, #10001-#19999 (Attribute: R/W) T The compensation values can be obtained by reading system variables #2001 to #2964 or #10001 to #19999 for tool compensation. The compensation values can also be changed b...

  • Page 511

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 473 - • When the number of compensations is more than 64 (For compensation with a compensation number of 64 or less, #2001 to #2449 can also be used.) Compensation number Variable numberVariable nameDescription 1 #10001 [#_OFSX[1]] 2 #10002 [#_OFSX[2...

  • Page 512

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 474 - <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory • When the number of compensations is 64 or less Compensation number Variable numberVariable nameDescription 1 #2001 [#_OFSXW[1]] 2 #2002 [#_OFSXW[2]] 3 #2003 [#_OFSXW[3]] : : : 63 #2063 [#_...

  • Page 513

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 475 - Compensation number Variable numberVariable nameDescription 1 #2901 [#_OFSRG[1]] 2 #2902 [#_OFSRG[2]] 3 #2903 [#_OFSRG[3]] : : : 63 #2963 [#_OFSRG[63]] 64 #2964 [#_OFSRG[64]] Tool nose radius compensation value (geometry) 1 #19001 [#_OFSYG[1]] 2 #...

  • Page 514

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 476 - Compensation number Variable numberVariable nameDescription 1 #15001 [#_OFSXG[1]] 2 #15002 [#_OFSXG[2]] 3 #15003 [#_OFSXG [3]] : : : 998 #15998 [#_OFSXG [998]]999 #15999 [#_OFSXG [999]]X-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1) 1 #16001 [#_OFSZG[1]...

  • Page 515

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 477 - - Alarm #3000 (Attribute: W) When an error is detected in a macro, an unit can enter the alarm state. In addition, an alarm message of up to 60 characters with alphabet and numerals can be specified between a control-out and a control-in after ...

  • Page 516

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 478 - - Controlling of single block stop and waiting for the auxiliary function completion signal #3003 (Attribute: R/W) Assigning the following values in system variable #3003 allows the specification of whether single block stop is disabled in the ...

  • Page 517

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 479 - - Enabling of feed hold, feedrate override, and exact stop check #3004 (Attribute: R/W) Assigning the following values in system variable #3004 allows the specification of whether feed hold and feedrate override are enabled in the following bloc...

  • Page 518

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 480 - - Settings #3005 (Attribute: R/W) Settings can be read and written. Binary values are converted to decimals. #3005 #15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8 Setting FCV #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Setting SEQ INI ISO TVC#9 (FCV) : Whether to use the ...

  • Page 519

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 481 - NOTE 1 The status of a programmable mirror image is not reflected on this variable. 2 When the mirror image function is set for the same axis by the mirror image signal and setting, the signal value and setting value are ORed and then output. 3 Wh...

  • Page 520

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 482 - - Type of tool compensation memory #3980 (Attribute: R) M System variable #3980 can be used to read the type of compensation memory. Variable numberVariable nameDescription #3980 [#_OFSMEM] Types of tool compensation memory0: Tool compensatio...

  • Page 521

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 483 - - Modal information #4001-#4130, #4201-#4330, #4401-#4530 (Attribute: R) The modal information specified before the previous block of the macro statement that reads system variables #4001 to #4130 can be obtained in the block currently being loo...

  • Page 522

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 484 - CategoryVariable numberVariable name Description <1> <2> <3> #4119 #4319 #4519 [#_BUFS] [#_ACTS] [#_INTS] Modal information (S code) <1> <2> <3> #4120 #4320 #4520 [#_BUFT] [#_ACTT] [#_INTT] Modal information (T ...

  • Page 523

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 485 - NOTE 1 Previous block and running block Since the CNC reads the block that is ahead of the block currently being executed by the machining program, the block being retrieved by the CNC is normally different from that currently being executed. ...

  • Page 524

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 486 - - Position information #5001-#5080, #100001-#100200 (Attribute: R) The end position of the previous block, the specified current position (for the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system), and the skip signal position can be ob...

  • Page 525

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 487 - - Tool length compensation value #5081-#5100, #100201-#100250 (Attribute: R) M Tool length compensation in the block currently being executed can be obtained for each axis by reading system variables #5081 to #5100 or #100201 to #100250. Varia...

  • Page 526

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 488 - <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory Variable number Variable namePosition information Read operation during movement #5081 #5082 #5083 #5084 : #5100 [#_TOFSWX] [#_TOFSWZ] [#_TOFSWY] [#_TOFS[4]] : [#_TOFS[20]] X-axis tool offset ...

  • Page 527

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 489 - - Servo position deviation #5101-#5120, #100251-#100300 (Attribute: R) The servo position deviation for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5101 to #5120 or #100251 to #100300. Variable number Variable namePosition informatio...

  • Page 528

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 490 - - Distance to go #5181-#5200, #100801-#100850 (Attribute: R) The distance to go value for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5181 to #5200 or #100801 to #100850. Variable numberVariable name Position information Read operati...

  • Page 529

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 491 - - Workpiece origin offset value #5201-#5340, #100301-#100650 (Attribute: R/W) The workpiece origin offset value can be obtained by reading system variables #5201 to #5340 or #100301 to #100650. The offset value can also be changed by assigning...

  • Page 530

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 492 - Variable number Variable nameControlled axis Workpiece coordinate system#100501 #100502 : #100550 [#_WZG57[1]] [#_WZG57[2]] : [#_WZG57[50]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset 2nd axis workpiece origin offset : 50th axis workpiece origin offset G57 #...

  • Page 531

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 493 - T The following variables can be used to maintain compatibility with conventional models. Axis Function Variable number 1st axis External workpiece origin offset value #2550 G54 workpiece origin offset value #2551 G55 workpiece origin offset ...

  • Page 532

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 494 - T NOTE To use variables #2550 to #2856, #5201 to #5340, and #100301 to #100650, optional variables for the workpiece coordinate systems are necessary. - Workpiece origin offset value of the additional workpiece coordinate system #7001-#7960, ...

  • Page 533

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 495 - M Variable number Variable nameControlled axis Additional workpiece system number#14001 #14002 : #14020 [#_WZP1[1]] [#_WZP1[2]] : [#_WZP1[20]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value : 20th axis workpiece orig...

  • Page 534

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 496 - M NOTE 1 When variables exceeding the number of control axes are specified, the alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE” occurs. 2 The workpiece origin offset of additional workpiece coordinate system for 20th or earlier axis can be used with...

  • Page 535

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 497 - NOTE 1 When variables exceeding the number of control axes are specified, the alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE” occurs. 2 The skip position (detection unit) for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5421 to #5440. 3 To specify these v...

  • Page 536

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 498 - - Reference fixture offset value #5521-#5680, #117051-#117450 (Attribute: R/W) M The reference fixture offset values in the rotary table dynamic fixture offset function can be obtained by reading system variables #5521 to #5680 or #117051 to #1...

  • Page 537

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 499 - - Second geometry tool offset value #5801-#5896, #27001-#29999 (Attribute: R/W) T By reading the values of system variables #5801 to #5896 and #27001 to #29999, it is possible to determine the second geometry tool offset value, and by assigning ...

  • Page 538

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 500 - - Dynamic reference tool compensation value #118051-#118450 (Attribute: R/W) M The dynamic reference tool compensation value in the rotary head dynamic tool compensation function can be obtained by reading system variables #118051 to #118450. ...

  • Page 539

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 501 - - Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap #100851-#100900 (Attribute: R/W) The feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap can also be changed by setting values to the system variables #100851 to #100900. Variable numberVari...

  • Page 540

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 502 - 16.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION Various operations can be performed on variables. Program an arithmetic and logic operation in the same way as for a general arithmetic expression. #i=<expression> <Expression> The expression to t...

  • Page 541

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 503 - Explanation - Angle units The units of angles used with the SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN, and ATAN functions are degrees. For example, 90 degrees and 30 minutes is represented as 90.5 degrees. - ARCSIN #i = ASIN[#j]; • The solution ranges are ...

  • Page 542

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 504 - - Natural logarithm #i = LN[#j]; • When the antilogarithm (#j) is zero or smaller, an alarm PS0119 is issued. • A constant can be used instead of the #j variable. - Exponential function #i = EXP[#j]; • When the result of the operation ove...

  • Page 543

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 505 - - Rounding up and down to an integer (FUP and FIX) With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding up to...

  • Page 544

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 506 - Limitation • Caution concerning decreased precision When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0 • Addition and subtraction Note that when an absolute value is subtracted from another absolute value in addition or subtraction, the rela...

  • Page 545

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 507 - This is because an error may occur in operation N20 and the result may not be #2=2.0000000000000000 but a value a little smaller than 2 such as the following: #2=1.9999999999999997 To prevent this, specify N30 as follows: N30 #3=FIX[#2+0...

  • Page 546

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 508 - Example: When an attempt is made to assign the following values to variables #1 and #2: #1=9876543210123.456 #2=9876543277777.777 the values of the variables become: #1=9876543200000.000 #2=9876543300000.000 In this case, when #3=#2-#...

  • Page 547

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 509 - 16.4 INDIRECT AXIS ADDRESS SPECIFICATION Overview When the custom macro function is enabled, you can use AX[(axis-number)] in an axis address specification to indirectly specify an axis with its axis number and not to directly specify it with its...

  • Page 548

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 510 - - AXNUM function You can use AXNUM[ ] to obtain an axis number. AXNUM[(axis-name)]; If an invalid axis name is specified, an alarm PS0332 occurs. When the number of controlled axes is 3, the name of the first axis is X, that of the second axi...

  • Page 549

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 511 - 16.5 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS The following blocks are referred to as macro statements: • Blocks containing an arithmetic or logic operation (=) • Blocks containing a control statement (such as GOTO, DO, END) • Blocks containing ...

  • Page 550

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 512 - 16.6 BRANCH AND REPETITION In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetition operations are used: Branch and GOTO (unconditional branch) repetition IF (conditional...

  • Page 551

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 513 - 16.6.2 GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers When the GOTO statement is executed in a custom macro control command, a sequence number search is made for sequence numbers stored at previous execution of the corresponding blocks at a high sp...

  • Page 552

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 514 - A branch to N10 before the GOTO statement occurs. A branch to N10 after the GOTO statement occurs. WARNING Do not specify multiple blocks with the same sequence number in a single program. It is very dangerous to specify the sequence number of t...

  • Page 553

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 515 - 16.6.3 Conditional Branch (IF Statement) Specify a <conditional expression> after IF. IF[<conditional expression>]GOTOn If the specified <conditional expression> is satisfied (true), a branch to sequence number n occurs. If th...

  • Page 554

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 516 - - Relational operators Relational operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value. Note that the equal sign (=) and inequality s...

  • Page 555

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 517 - 16.6.4 Repetition (WHILE Statement) Specify a conditional expression after WHILE. While the specified condition is satisfied, the program from DO to END is executed. If the specified condition is not satisfied, program execution proceeds to the...

  • Page 556

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 518 - - Nesting The identification numbers (1 to 3) in a DO-END loop can be used as many times as desired. Note, however, when a program includes crossing repetition loops (overlapped DO ranges), an alarm PS0124 occurs. Processing1. The identificatio...

  • Page 557

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 519 - Limitation - Infinite loops When DO m is specified without specifying the WHILE statement, an infinite loop ranging from DO to END is produced. - Processing time When a branch to the sequence number specified in a GOTO statement occurs, the seq...

  • Page 558

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 520 - 16.7 MACRO CALL A macro program can be called using the following methods. The calling methods can roughly be divided into two types: macro calls and subprogram calls. A macro program can also be called during MDI operation in the same way. Mac...

  • Page 559

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 521 - 16.7.1 Simple Call (G65) When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Data (argument) can be passed to the custom macro program. P : Number of the program to calll : Repetition count (1 by default)Argument : Data ...

  • Page 560

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 522 - Example - When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 0, I_J_K_ means that I = #4, J = #5, and K = #6 while K_J_I_ means K = #6, J = #8, and I= #10 because argument specification II is used. - When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 1, K_J_I_ mean...

  • Page 561

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 523 - - Mixture of argument specifications I and II The CNC internally identifies argument specification I and argument specification II. If a mixture of argument specification I and argument specification II is specified, the type of argument specifi...

  • Page 562

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 524 - Address Metric input Inch input F (G93 mode) 3 F (G94 mode) 0 2 F (G95 mode) 2 (NOTE 5) 4 (NOTE 5) NOTE 1 When V is used in a call using a specific code, the number of decimal places is determined according to the setting for the reference axis. ...

  • Page 563

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 525 - T When a value is specified with no decimal point, the number of decimal places is determined as follows. Address For a non-axis address For an axis address H, M, Q, S, or T 0 D or R α (NOTE 1) A, B, C, I, J, K, U, V, W, X, Y, or Z α (NOTE ...

  • Page 564

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 526 - NOTE 3 γ is determined according to the increment system for the reference axis (axis specified with parameter No. 1031) as listed in the following table. (When bit 7 (BDX) of parameter No. 3450 is set to 1, γ is also determined in the same wa...

  • Page 565

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 527 - - Local variable levels • Local variables from level 0 to 5 are provided for nesting. • The level of the main program is 0. • Each time a macro is called (with G66, G66.1, Ggg, or Mmm), the local variable level is incremented by one. The v...

  • Page 566

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 528 - Sample program (bolt hole circle) M A macro is created which drills H holes at intervals of B degrees after a start angle of A degrees along the periphery of a circle with radius I. The center of the circle is (X,Y). Commands can be specified in...

  • Page 567

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 529 - - Macro program (called program) O9100; #3=#4003; ................................ Stores G code of group 3. G81 Z#26 R#18 F#9 K0; (Note)... Drilling cycle. .................................................. Note: L0 can also be used. IF[#3 EQ 9...

  • Page 568

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 530 - Sample program (Drill cycle) T Move the tool beforehand along the X- and Z-axes to the position where a drilling cycle starts. Specify Z or W for the depth of a hole, K for the depth of a cut, and F for the cutting feedrate to drill the hole. Z...

  • Page 569

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 531 - - Macro program (called program) O9100; #1=0 ;............................... Clear the data for the depth of the current hole. #2=0 ;............................... Clear the data for the depth of the preceding hole. IF [#23 NE #0] GOTO 1 ;....

  • Page 570

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 532 - 16.7.2 Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66) Once G66 is issued to specify a modal call a macro is called after a block specifying movement along axes is executed. This continues until G67 is issued to cancel a modal call. G66 P p L l...

  • Page 571

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 533 - [Example] G66 P9100 ; O9100 ; O9200 ; X10.0 ; (1-1) Z50.0 ; (2-1) X60.0 ; (3-1) G66 P9200 ; M99 ; Y70.0 ; (3-2) X15.0 ; (1-2) M99; G67 ; Cancels P9200. G67 ; Cancels P9100. X-25.0 ; (1-3) Execution order of the above program (blocks not con...

  • Page 572

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 534 - Sample program M The same operation as the drilling canned cycle G81 is created using a custom macro and the machining program makes a modal macro call. For program simplicity, all drilling data is specified using absolute values. Operation 1Op...

  • Page 573

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 535 - - Macro program (program called) O9110; #1=#4001; .......................Stores G00/G01. #3=#4003;.........................Stores G90/G91. #4=#4109;.........................Stores the cutting feedrate. #5=#5003;.........................Stores...

  • Page 574

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 536 - Sample program T This program makes a groove at a specified position. U - Calling format G66 P9110 Uu Ff U : Groove depth (incremental programming) F : Cutting feed of grooving - Program that calls a macro program O0003 ; G50 X100.0 Z200.0 ;...

  • Page 575

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 537 - 16.7.3 Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1) In this macro call mode, the specified macro is unconditionally called for each NC command block. All data other than O, file name, N, and G codes that is specified in each block is not executed and is...

  • Page 576

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 538 - - Modal call nesting For a single modal call (when G66.1 is specified only once), the specified macro is called for each NC command block. When nested modal macro calls are specified, the macro at the next higher level is also called in a block ...

  • Page 577

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 539 - Limitation • G66.1 and G67 blocks are specified in pairs in the same program. If a G67 code is specified not in the G66.1 mode, an alarm PS1100 occurs. Bit 0 (G67) of parameter No. 6000 can be set to 1 to specify that the alarm does not occur ...

  • Page 578

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 540 - 16.7.4 Macro Call Using a G Code By setting a G code number used to call a macro program in a parameter, the macro program can be called in the same way as for a simple call (G65). O0001 ; :G81 X10.0 Y20.0 Z-10.0 ; :M30 ;O9010 ; : : ...

  • Page 579

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 541 - - Repetition As with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address L. - Argument specification As with a simple call, two types of argument specification are available: Argument specification I and argu...

  • Page 580

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 542 - 16.7.5 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions) By setting the starting G code number used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program to be called, and the number of definitions, macro calls using multipl...

  • Page 581

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 543 - 16.7.6 Macro Call Using a G Code with a Decimal Point (Specification of Multiple Definitions) When bit 0 (DPG) of parameter No. 6007, by setting the starting G code number with a decimal point used to call a macro program, the number of the start...

  • Page 582

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 544 - 16.7.7 Macro Call Using an M Code By setting an M code number used to call a macro program in a parameter, the macro program can be called in the same way as with a simple call (G65). O0001 ; : M50 A1.0 B2.0 ; : M30 ; O9020 ; : :...

  • Page 583

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 545 - Limitation • An M code used to call a macro program must be specified at the start of a block. • To call another program in a program called using an M code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be used normally. • When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter ...

  • Page 584

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 546 - 16.7.9 Subprogram Call Using an M Code By setting an M code number used to call a subprogram (macro program) in a parameter, the macro program can be called in the same way as with a subprogram call (M98). Explanation By setting an M cod...

  • Page 585

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 547 - 16.7.10 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions) By setting the starting M code number used to call a subprogram, the number of the starting subprogram to be called, and the number of definitions, subprogram calls u...

  • Page 586

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 548 - 16.7.11 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code By enabling subprograms to be called with a T code in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time the T code is specified in the machining program. O0001 ; : T23 ; : M30 ;O9000 ; : :...

  • Page 587

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 549 - 16.7.12 Subprogram Calls Using an S Code By enabling subprograms to be called with an S code in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time the S code is specified in the machining program. O0001 ; : S23 ; : M30 ;O9029 ; : ...

  • Page 588

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 550 - 16.7.13 Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary Function By enabling subprograms to be called with a secondary auxiliary function in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time the secondary auxiliary function is specified in the mach...

  • Page 589

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 551 - 16.7.14 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address By enabling subprograms to be called with a specific address in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time the specific address is specified in the machining program. O0001 ; : B100. ; ...

  • Page 590

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 552 - T Address Parameter setting A 65 B 66 F 70 H 72 I 73 J 74 K 75 L 76 M 77 P 80 Q 81 R 82 S 83 T 84 NOTE When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set. - Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers and between...

  • Page 591

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 553 - Conditions • The cumulative usage time of each of tools T01 to T05 is measured. No measurement is made for tools with numbers greater than T05. • The following variables are used to store the tool numbers and measured times: #501 Cumulativ...

  • Page 592

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 554 - - Program that calls a macro program O0001; T01 M06; M03; : M05; ......................................... Changes #501. T02 M06; M03; : M05; ......................................... Changes #502. T03 M06; M03; : M05; .............

  • Page 593

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 555 - 16.8 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to be performed next. This operation is referred to as buffering. For example, many NC statements are buffered during look-ahead by AI contour control and s...

  • Page 594

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 556 - - Buffering the next block in other than cutter compensation mode (G41, G42) N1N2N3N4N4>N1 X100.0 ;> : Block being executed : Block read into the bufferNC statementexecutionMacro statementexecutionBufferN2 #1=100 ;N3 #2=200 ;N4 Y200.0 ; ...

  • Page 595

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 557 - 16.9 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can be registered and edited in the same way as subprograms. The storage capacity is determined by the total length of tape used to store both custom ...

  • Page 596

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 558 - 16.10 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN CUSTOM MACROS In addition to the codes used in ordinary programs, the following codes are used in custom macro programs. Explanation - Codes (1) When the ISO code is used or when bit 4 (ISO) of parameter N...

  • Page 597

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 559 - 16.11 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following macro commands are available. They are referred to as external output commands. • BPRNT • DPRNT • POPEN • PCLOS These commands are provided t...

  • Page 598

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 560 - (i) Specified characters are converted to the codes according to the setting data (ISO) that is output at that time. Specifiable characters are as follows: • Letters (A to Z) • Numbers • Special characters (*, /, +, -, ?, @, &, _)...

  • Page 599

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 561 - (i) For an explanation of the DPRNT command, see Items (i), (iii), and (iv) for the BPRNT command. (ii) When outputting a variable, specify # followed by the variable number, then specify the number of digits in the integer part and the number of ...

  • Page 600

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 562 - - Close command PCLOS The PCLOS command releases a connection to an external input/output device. Specify this command when all data output commands have terminated. DC4 control code is output from the CNC. - Required setting Specify the spec...

  • Page 601

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 563 - 16.12 RESTRICTIONS - Sequence number search A custom macro program cannot be searched for a sequence number. - Single block Even while a macro program is being executed, blocks can be stopped in the single block mode. A block containing a mac...

  • Page 602

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 564 - - Reset With a reset operation, local variables and common variables #100 to #199 are cleared to null values. They can be prevented from clearing by setting bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No.6001. System variables #100 to #199 are not cleared. A rese...

  • Page 603

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 565 - 16.13 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program ...

  • Page 604

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 566 - 16.13.1 Specification Method Explanation - Interrupt conditions A custom macro interrupt is available only during program execution. It is enabled under the following conditions • When memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation is sele...

  • Page 605

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 567 - 16.13.2 Details of Functions Explanation - Subprogram-type interrupt and macro-type interrupt There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram-type interrupts and macro-type interrupts. The interrupt type used is selected by bit 5 (M...

  • Page 606

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 568 - - Custom macro interrupts and NC statements When performing a custom macro interrupt, the user may want to interrupt the NC statement being executed, or the user may not want to perform the interrupt until the execution of the current block is co...

  • Page 607

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 569 - Type II (when an interrupt is performed at the end of the block) (i) If the block being executed is not a block that consists of several cycle operations such as a drilling canned cycle and automatic reference position return (G28), an interrup...

  • Page 608

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 570 - T NOTE During execution of a program for cycle operations, interrupt type II is performed regardless of whether bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003 is set to 0 or 1. Cycle operations are available for the following functions: <1> Automatic r...

  • Page 609

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 571 - When the status-triggered scheme is selected by this parameter, a custom macro interrupt is generated if the interrupt signal (UINT) is on at the time the signal becomes valid. By keeping the interrupt signal (UINT) on, the interrupt program can ...

  • Page 610

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 572 - - Return from a custom macro interrupt To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the interrupted program, specify M99. A sequence number in the interrupted program can also be specified using address P. If this is specified, the progra...

  • Page 611

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 573 - - Custom macro interrupt and modal information A custom macro interrupt is different from a normal program call. It is initiated by an interrupt signal (UINT) during program execution. In general, any modifications of modal information made by ...

  • Page 612

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 574 - Modal information when control is returned by M99 The modal information present before the interrupt becomes valid. The new modal information modified by the interrupt program is made invalid. Modal information when control is returned by M99 Px...

  • Page 613

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 575 - - System variables (position information values) for the interrupt program Position information can be read as follows. Macro variableCondition Position information value Until the first NC statement appears Coordinates of point A After an NC s...

  • Page 614

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 576 - - Custom macro interrupt and program restart In program restart, when the interrupt signal (UINT) is input during dry run recovery after a search, the interrupt program is called after restart of all axes is completed. That is, interrupt type II ...

  • Page 615

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 577 - 17 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO Chapter 17, "REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO", consists of the following sections: 17.1 TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS................581 17.2 VARIABLES........................................................

  • Page 616

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 578 - Overview Used with an NC program, the real time custom macro function controls peripheral axes and signals. If a macro statement is used together with an NC statement, a program using the conventional custom macro function executes the ...

  • Page 617

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 579 - The operation above is programmed using real time macro commands. Program O0001 ; G92 X0 ; //1 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 30. ] #IOG[99,5] = 1 ; //2 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 50.] ZDO ; G91 G00 Y100 ; ZEND ; //3 ZEDGE [#100101GE 80. ] #IOG[99,5] = 0 ; G9...

  • Page 618

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 580 - - Real time macro statement (RTM statement) The real time macro statement (RTM statement) is a statement included in an RTM command. One or more RTM statements make up an RTM command. An RTM statement consists of a macro command and axi...

  • Page 619

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 581 - 17.1 TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS 17.1.1 Modal Real Time Macro Command / One-shot Real Time Macro Command Explanation A command with ’//’ followed by an RTM statement is referred to as a one-shot real time macro command (one-s...

  • Page 620

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 582 - - End of a real time macro command When one of the following conditions is satisfied, the RTM command is terminated. Termination conditions common to one-shot RTM and modal RTM commands • When RTM command processing is completed • ...

  • Page 621

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 583 - NOTE 3 Do not restart a program that includes an RTM command. 4 When an NC statement used as a trigger for an RTM command represents an auxiliary function, execution continues even if the FIN signal is awaited. If the following program i...

  • Page 622

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 584 - When the program above is executed, the RTM commands are executed in the following order: #RV[0]=1 #RV[0]=2 #RV[0]=3 So, the value of #RV[0] is 3. Example 2) Priority of modal RTM commands and a one-shot RTM command O0001 ; //3...

  • Page 623

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 585 - ZEND ; //2 #RV[1]=1 ; G04 P10 ; M30 ; Example 5) In the RTM command priority, ZEDGE in a modal command with its ID value being 1 is always a false control code (detailed later). The RTM command priority of #RV[0]=1 in a modal comm...

  • Page 624

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 586 - NOTE 3 If an NC statement to be used to trigger an RTM command is specified in a block (e.g., small block) that ends in a very short time, an RTM statement programmed to start at a different timing may be executed simultaneously. If the...

  • Page 625

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 587 - - Reserved words The following reserved words are used with real time custom macros: - Reserved words dedicated to real time custom macros ZDO, ZEND, ZONCE, ZWHILE, ZEDGE - Reserved words shared with custom macros AND, OR, XOR,...

  • Page 626

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 588 - 17.2 VARIABLES Overview With real time custom macros, the following variables can be handled: - System variables dedicated to real time custom macros - Variables (RTM variables) dedicated to real time custom macros - System variables f...

  • Page 627

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 589 - 17.2.1 Variables Dedicated To Real Time Custom Macros These variables are dedicated to real time custom macros. The variables are classified as system variables and RTM variables. 17.2.1.1 System variables System variables dedicated ...

  • Page 628

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 590 - Specify an address by using m and n. Example: #IOF[1, 3] F1.3 bit type #IOG[1, 5] G1.5 bit type #IOFB[32] F32 byte type #IOGB[12] G12 byte type Read/write operations are performed in the same as for an ordinary macro statement. ...

  • Page 629

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 591 - Set whether to enable a write to each address of Y and G on a byte-by-byte basis. For each of addresses D and R, set a write-enabled range. For the unwritable signals (X, F), the screen is not displayed. Before changing an address on t...

  • Page 630

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 592 - 17.2.1.2 Real time macro variables (RTM variables) The real time macro variables (RTM variables) are variables dedicated to real time custom macros. The RTM variables are classified as volatile real time macro variables (volatile RTM v...

  • Page 631

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 593 - Example of output % G10L87P0(3FE0000000000000) G10L87P1(4000000000000000) : G10L87P30(4010000000000000) G10L87P31(4014000000000000) G10L88P0(4008000000000000) G10L88P1(3FD9999999800000) : G10L88P98(3FF0000000000000) G10L88P99(4010000000...

  • Page 632

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 594 - 17.2.2 Custom Macro Variables With real time custom macros, a part of the custom macro variables (part of the system variables) can be handled. 17.2.2.1 System variables With real time custom macros, position-related information among...

  • Page 633

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 595 - - Servo positional deviation #100251 to #100282 (Attribute: Read only) By reading the values of system variables #100251 to #100282, the servo positional deviation on each axis can be found. Variable No. Position information #100251 #...

  • Page 634

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 596 - 17.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGICAL OPERATION With the real time custom macros, the following arithmetic and logical operations can be specified: Table 1.3 Arithmetic and logical operation Type of operation Operation Description (1) Definitio...

  • Page 635

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 597 - NOTE 1 The ADP function is not available. 2 With an RTM statement, the external output commands (BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN, and PCLOS) are unavailable. 3 The FS16i compatibility specifications are not applicable. Bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. ...

  • Page 636

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 598 - 17.4 CONTROL ON REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS Explanation By using a reserved word for controlling statements in an RTM command, the flow of the RTM command can be changed or multiple statements can be controlled as a set of statements. Fou...

  • Page 637

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 599 - 17.4.1 Conditional Branch (ZONCE Statement) After ZONCE, <conditional-expression> and <real-time-macro-statement> are coded. - //(n) ZONCE [<conditional-expression>] <real-time-macro-statement> If <conditio...

  • Page 638

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 600 - Similarly, use ZDO...ZEND for a multi-statement including an axis control command. If the workpiece coordinate on the second axis is equal to or less than 10, a movement on the V-axis starts and the Y1.0 signal is set to 1. //1 ZONCE [...

  • Page 639

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 601 - <real-time-macro-statement-2> ; : ZEND ; On the falling edge of the X address signal, a movement on the B-axis is started and the Y1.0 signal is set to 1. // ZEDGE [#IOX[1,3] EQ 0] ZDO ; G91 G00 B10. ; #IOY[1,0] = 1 ; ZEND ; ...

  • Page 640

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 602 - Explanation While <conditional-expression> is true, the command or commands between ZDO and ZEND after ZWHILE are executed. If <conditional-expression> is not satisfied, the command after ZEND is processed. The same <condi...

  • Page 641

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 603 - - Nesting ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, and ZDO...ZEND cannot be nested and overlapped. For details, see the following: - Endless loop An endless loop is formed if the conditional expression enclosed in brackets after t...

  • Page 642

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 604 - Sample program The sample program below exercises the following three control operations at the same time. (1) A cutting operation is performed on the X-axis and Z-axis. (2) On each rising edge of the X signal 5.2, 20 is fed on the perip...

  • Page 643

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 605 - 17.5 MACRO CALL A series of RTM statements can be formed into a subprogram, which can be called from the main program. When G65 is specified in an RTM command, the real time macro specified in address P is called. Explana...

  • Page 644

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 606 - - Call destination real time program In a called real time macro program, only an RTM statement can be coded. In a called real time macro program, no additional RTM command may be executed. (The RTM command symbol ‘//’ may not be ...

  • Page 645

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 607 - 17.6 OTHERS If an axis control command is followed by a macro command in an RTM command, the execution of the macro command starts when the axis control command is completed or deceleration starts. If deceleration on the X-axis starts u...

  • Page 646

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 608 - 17.7 AXIS CONTROL COMMAND In an RTM statement, a G code for specifying a movement can be specified. For axis control, the PMC axis control interface is used. The specifications differ from the specifications for the G code used with a...

  • Page 647

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 609 - - Relationship with PMC axis control Axis control based on an RTM statement uses the PMC axis control interface. So, the specifications for a move command in each block within an RTM statement are generally equivalent to the specificat...

  • Page 648

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 610 - CAUTION With the G codes (inch input/metric input) of group 06, the same information as the modal information of an NC statement is used in an RTM statement. Do not change the modal information of group 06 with an NC statement in a b...

  • Page 649

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 611 - Example 2) Modal information is initialized when the execution of each RTM command is started. Even if the same program includes RTM commands with the same ID, the modal information of the RTM command executed first is not inherited by...

  • Page 650

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 612 - - Reset Even when the CNC is reset by an MDI reset, the external reset signal (ERS), or the reset and rewind signal (RRW), the axis control command of an RTM statement does not stop immediately but stops at the time of termination of th...

  • Page 651

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 613 - - Machine lock The same machine lock signals (all axes/each axis) as used with an NC statement are used. However, by disabling machine lock for PMC axis control with the following parameters, machine lock can be disabled for the axis b...

  • Page 652

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 614 - - Mirror image At enabling mirror image for the axis being controlled by an RTM statement, set bit 0 (EMR) of parameter No. 8008 to 1, and set either bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No.0012 or mirror image signal MIx to '1'. Programmable mirr...

  • Page 653

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 615 - Command details - Rapid traverse A movement is made at a rapid traverse rate on an axis from the current position to the point separated by a specified value. Format // ZDO ; G91 G00 IP _ ; ZEND ; G91 : G code for incremental comman...

  • Page 654

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 616 - NOTE 1 Only one axis can be specified in one block. 2 The absolute command (G90) cannot be specified. 3 The block overlap function cannot be used. 4 When IS-A is used, a feedrate below 10 mm/min is discarded. 5 The feedrate cannot be cla...

  • Page 655

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 617 - NOTE 1 The second feedrate override function cannot be used. 2 The feedrate override function cannot be disabled using #3004. • Override cancel With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the feedrate override cancel si...

  • Page 656

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 618 - - Feed with a specified feedrate (feed per revolution) A movement is made at a feedrate specified in F on an axis from the current position to the point separated by a specified value. Format // ZDO ; G95 G91 G01 IP _ F_ ; ZEND ; G9...

  • Page 657

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 619 - • Feedrate override With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the feedrate override signal (*FV) for an NC statement or the feedrate override signal (*EFV) dedicated to PMC axis control can be chosen. NOTE 1 The second f...

  • Page 658

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 620 - - Reference position return A movement is made at the rapid traverse rate to the first reference position on a specified axis. Upon completion of reference position return, the return completion lamp is turned on. Format // ZDO ; G...

  • Page 659

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 621 - - Machine coordinate system selection When a position in the machine coordinate system is specified, a movement is made to the position on the axis by rapid traverse. The G53 code for machine coordinate system selection is a one-shot G...

  • Page 660

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 622 - 17.8 NOTES - Address without the decimal point In general, an NC address without the decimal point is subject to calculator-type decimal point input when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 or bit 0 (AXDx) of parameter No. 3455 is set to...

  • Page 661

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 623 - - One-digit F code feed - Scaling - Coordinate system rotation - Polar coordinate interpolation - Balance cutting - Feed stop - Constant surface speed control - Positioning function based on optimal acceleration, etc. CAUTION In an RT...

  • Page 662

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 624 - 17.9 LIMITATION Major general notes on RTM commands are provided below. - Background drawing The RTM command has no effect in background drawing. Do not specify an RTM command during background drawing. - Interrupt-type custom macr...

  • Page 663

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 625 - - Operation in each event If an event such as an emergency stop or alarm occurs during execution of an RTM command, the NC command and RTM command generally operate as indicated below. Event NC command RTM command consisting of a macro...

  • Page 664

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 626 - 18. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) 18 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) Overview The values of parameters and pitch error compensation data can be entered in a program. This function is used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are ch...

  • Page 665

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 627 - 18.PROGRAMMABLEPARAMETER INPUT (G10)Explanation - Setting value (R_) Do not use a decimal point in the setting (R_) of a parameter or pitch error compensation data. As the value of R, a custom macro variable can be used. When a parameter of real type is used, ...

  • Page 666

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 628 - 18. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) Example 1. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 G10L52 ; Parameter entry mode N3404 R 00000100 ; SBP setting G11 ; Cancel parameter entry mode 2. Change the values for the Z-axis (3rd axis) and A-axis (4th axis...

  • Page 667

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 629 - 19 PATTERN DATA INPUT Chapter 19, "PATTERN DATA INPUT", consists of the following sections: 19.1 OVERVIEW...........................................................................630 19.2 EXPLANATION ...............................

  • Page 668

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 630 - 19.1 OVERVIEW In the program of the fixed form processing with the custom macro, the operator select the processing pattern on the menu screen and specified the size, number and so on to the variable on the custom macro screen. As above men...

  • Page 669

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 631 - 19.2 EXPLANATION This function is consist of Pattern menu screen and Custom macro screen. The process pattern is selected on the pattern menu screen. Then the process pattern is selected, the custom macro screen is displayed. On this custom...

  • Page 670

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 632 - Fig. 19.2 (b) Pattern data menu screen (15-inch) (2) Custom macro screen The name of varialbe and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen. The menu title and pattern name on the pattern menu screen and the variable name...

  • Page 671

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 633 - Fig. 19.2 (d) Custom macro screen (parameter No. 11318#0=1) (10.4-inch) Fig. 19.2 (e) Custom macro screen (15-inch)

  • Page 672

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 634 - 19.3 EXPLANATION OF OPERATION The following explains how to display the pattern menu screen. For 7.2-, 8.4-, and 10.4-inch LCDs 1 Press function key . 2 Press continous menu key . 3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU]. For a 15-inch LCD 1 Press...

  • Page 673

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 635 - Fig. 19.3 (g) Pattern menu screen (15-inch) Select the pattern on this screen The following two methods are effective. • Selection by cursor Move the cursor to the pattern name with the cursor move keys , and press the softkey [SELECT]...

  • Page 674

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 636 - Custom macro variable screen The following custom macro screen is displayed. Fig. 19.3 (h) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (10.4-inch) Fig. 19.3 (i) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (15-inch) When th...

  • Page 675

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 637 - NOTE 1 The variable name that is displayed cannot be used as the common variable name of the NC program. 2 When the common varialbe name is defined by SETVN command, the varialbe name defined by pattern data input function is given priority....

  • Page 676

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 638 - 19.4 DEFINITION OF THE SCREEN The definition of the screen is performed by NC program. Program configuration This function is consist of one program for the definition of pattern menu screen and maximum ten programs for the definition of c...

  • Page 677

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 639 - 19.4.1 Definition of the Pattern Menu Screen Menu title and pattern name are defined as follows. Fig. 19.4.1 (a) Pattern menu screen Definition of menu title The character string displayed in the menu title of the pattern menu scree...

  • Page 678

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 640 - Definition of pattern name The character string displayed in the pattern name which becomes a menu item is defined. The pattern name is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size letter. - For...

  • Page 679

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 641 - 19.4.2 Definition of the Custom Macro Screen The title, variable name and comment are defined as follows. Fig. 19.4.2 (a) Custom macro screen Definition of title The character string displayed in the title of the custom macro screen ...

  • Page 680

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 642 - Definition of macro variable The character string displayed in the macro variable name is defined. The macro variable is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size letter. The variable which ca...

  • Page 681

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 643 - Definition of a comment The character string of the comment displayed on the custom macro screen is defined. The comment is specified by up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter per one block. ...

  • Page 682

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 644 - Example The following is example of the custom macro screen. Fig. 19.4.2 (c) Custom macro screen (No. 11318#0=0) Fig. 19.4.2 (d) Custom macro screen (No. 11318#0=1) O9501; N1 G65 H92 P066079 Q076084 R032072 I079076 J069032; ................

  • Page 683

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 645 - 19.4.3 Setting the Character-codes The character cannot be used to specify the NC program. Therefor, the code corresponding to the character is specified. One character is consist of three figures in a half size letter and six figures in a...

  • Page 684

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 646 - Characters and codes to be used for the patterndata input function Character Code Comment CharacterCode Comment A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056 D 068 9 057 E 069 032 Space F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark G 071 ” 034 Quotation ...

  • Page 685

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 647 - The characters and the codes of the katakana is as follows. Character Code Comment CharacterCode Comment ア 177 ム 209 イ 178 メ 210 ウ 179 モ 211 エ 180 ヤ 212 オ 181 ユ 213 カ 182 ヨ 214 キ 183 ラ 215 ク 184 ...

  • Page 686

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 648 - The characters and the codes of the hiragana and the kanji are as follows. The following hiraganas and kanjis use two characters of the alphanumeric character. ぁ あ ぃ い う う ぇ え ぉ お 002 000 002 002 002 004 002 006 002 0080...

  • Page 687

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 649 - 登 録 再 処 理 描 画 過 容 編 003 200 003 202 003 204 003 206 003 208003 210003 212003 214 003 216 003 218集 未 対 相 座 標 示 名 歯 変 003 220 003 222 003 224 003 226 003 228003 230003 232003 234 003 236 003 238呼 推 ...

  • Page 688

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 650 - 求 球 究 級 欠 結 口 語 誤 交 005 180 005 182 005 184 005 186 005 188005 190005 192005 194 005 196 005 198厚 項 刻 告 黒 財 策 糸 試 資 005 200 005 202 005 204 005 206 005 208005 210005 212005 214 005 216 005 218事 持 ...

  • Page 689

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 651 - 納 義 丸 汎 固 毎 当 的 詳 鳥 007 160 007 162 007 164 007 166 007 168007 170007 172007 174 007 176 007 178適 論 額 縁 温 給 界 混 監 締 007 180 007 182 007 184 007 186 007 188007 190007 192007 194 007 196 007 198護 己 ...

  • Page 690

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 652 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 20 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Chapter 20, "HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 20.1 AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION I AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION II (G05.1)...................653 20.2...

  • Page 691

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 653 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20.1 AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION I AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION II (G05.1) Overview The AI contour control I and AI contour control II functions are provided for high-speed, high-precision machining. This function enables suppr...

  • Page 692

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 654 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 Always specify G08 and G05 in an independent block. 2 G05 can be specified only for AI contour control II. 3 The AI contour control mode is also canceled by a reset. 4 Valid functions are limited depending on the command ...

  • Page 693

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 655 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - Setting an acceleration A permissible acceleration for the linear acceleration/deceleration of each axis is set in parameter No.1660. For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, acceleration change time (B) (period of transition ...

  • Page 694

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 656 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Method of determining the tangent acceleration Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the largest tangent acceleration/deceleration that does not exceed the acceleration set for each axis. (Example) X-axis permissible acc...

  • Page 695

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 657 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - Deceleration Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the block. Deceleration can be performed over several blocks. FeedrateTimeDecelerationstart pointDeceleratio...

  • Page 696

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 658 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS In such a case, set bit 3 (BCG) of parameter No. 7055 to 1. Then, the internal acceleration and vector time constant of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation are changed to make the acceleration/deceleration pattern as ...

  • Page 697

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 659 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - Automatic feedrate control function In AI contour control mode, the feedrate is automatically controlled by the reading-ahead of blocks. The feedrate is determined using the following conditions. If the specified feedrate exceed...

  • Page 698

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 660 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner By using the speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, if a feedrate change occurs on an axis on each axis at a corner, the...

  • Page 699

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 661 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSIn this case, the deceleration feedrate differs if the travel direction differs, even if the shape is the same. Deceleration to500 mm/minDeceleration to354 mm/min(Example)If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and thepermissible...

  • Page 700

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 662 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation When high-speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or spiral interpolation, the actual tool path has an error with respect to the pr...

  • Page 701

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 663 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - Speed control with the acceleration on each axis When consecutive small lines are used to form a curve, as in the example shown in the figure below, the feedrate differences on each axis at the individual corners are not very lar...

  • Page 702

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 664 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on the setting of bit 6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500. If "0" is set, the highest feedrate that does not cause the permissible acceleration s...

  • Page 703

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 665 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - Smooth speed control In speed control with acceleration, the smooth speed control function recognizes the entire figure from preceding and following blocks including blocks read ahead to make a smooth feedrate determination. When...

  • Page 704

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 666 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Smooth speed control obtains the acceleration by using the figure recognized from the preceding and following blocks including blocks read ahead, so smooth speed control is enabled even in parts in which the acceleration increase...

  • Page 705

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 667 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS The descent angle θ during descent on the Z-axis (angle formed by the XY plane and the tool center path) is as shown in the figure. The descent angle is divided into four areas, and the override values for the individual areas ar...

  • Page 706

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 668 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS CAUTION 1 The speed control with the cutting feed is effective only when the tool is parallel with the Z-axis. Thus, it may not be possible to apply this function, depending on the structure of the machine used. 2 In the speed ...

  • Page 707

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 669 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSLimitation - Conditions for temporarily canceling the AI contour control mode If one of the commands listed below is issued in the AI contour control mode, the AI contour control mode is canceled temporarily. If the system becomes ...

  • Page 708

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 670 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 20.2 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION Overview By setting a speed- or precision-focused parameter set in an AI contour control function and specifying a precision level in accordance with the machining conditions during ma...

  • Page 709

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 671 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20.3 JERK CONTROL 20.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis Overview In portions in which acceleration changes largely, such as a portion where a programmed figure changes from a straight line to curve, vibratio...

  • Page 710

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 672 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Setting the permissible acceleration change amount The permissible acceleration change amount for each axis is set in parameter No. 1788. When 0 is set in this parameter for a certain axis, speed control with change of accele...

  • Page 711

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 673 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS - For successive linear interpolations When there are successive linear interpolations, speed control with change of acceleration obtains the deceleration feedrate from the change in acceleration between the start point and end poi...

  • Page 712

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 674 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 20.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation Overview In look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpo-lation performs smooth acceleration/deceleration by changing the acc...

  • Page 713

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 675 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSExplanation - Setting the jerk change time The jerk change time is set in parameter No. 1790 by using the percentage to the acceleration change time. The actual jerk change time is represented by the percentage to the acceleration ...

  • Page 714

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 676 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 20.4 OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION Overview This function enables execution of acceleration/deceleration adapted to the torque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the machine due to the friction a...

  • Page 715

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 677 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSExplanation Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration selects the acceleration pattern set with parameters on the basis of the axial movement direction and the acceleration/deceleration state, determines the acceleration for each axi...

  • Page 716

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 678 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Setting acceleration pattern data AccelerationSpeedFb FaAaP1P2P3P4 P5 AbAcceleration patternP0 Fig. 20.4 (c) Setting acceleration pattern Set the speed and the acceleration at each of the acceleration setting points P0 t...

  • Page 717

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 679 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSThe speed at P0 is 0, and the speed at P5 is the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter No. 1420. The speeds at P1 to P4 are to be set into speed parameters Nos. 19541 to 19544 as ratio to the rapid traverse speed (parameter ...

  • Page 718

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 680 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 02040608010001000200030004000Speed(min-1)Torque(Nm) Fig. 20.4 (e) Torque for Acc/Dec with consideration of friction Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y (Kgm2), and the ball screw pitch p (mm), then the acceleration A is ...

  • Page 719

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 681 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSTable 20.4 (c) Example of setting parameters related to acceleration pattern Parameter No.SettingUnit Remarks Rapid traverse rate 1420 48000. mm/ min The ball screw pitch is assumed 16 mm, so that the rapid traverse rate is 48000...

  • Page 720

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 682 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS With the above parameter settings, the acceleration pattern will be shown as the following figure. From speeds from 0 mm/min to 2474 mm/min, the acceleration as calculated in accordance with the acceleration pattern is applied; f...

  • Page 721

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 683 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSMaximum torque : 100(Nm) Speed 0 to 2000(min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 79(Nm) Speed 3000(min-1) Minimum torque : 58(Nm) Speed 4000(min-1) (1) In case of plus move (up) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction...

  • Page 722

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 684 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS P0P1P201000200030004000500060007000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 20.4 (h) Acceleration pattern in case of + move and acceleration (2) In case of plus move (up) and deceleration Because t...

  • Page 723

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 685 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSP0P1P2020004000600080001000012000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 20.4 (j) Acceleration pattern in case of + move and deceleration (3) In case of minus move (down) and acceleration Because tor...

  • Page 724

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 686 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS P0P1P2010002000300040005000600070008000900010000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 20.4 (l) Acceleration pattern in case of - move and acceleration (4) In case of minus move (down) and decele...

  • Page 725

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 687 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSP0P1P20100020003000400050006000700080009000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 20.4 (n) Acceleration pattern in case of - move and deceleration Limitation - Linear type positioning Optimum torque...

  • Page 726

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 688 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Relationship with the customer board Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration cannot be used from the customer board. - Tool center point control Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled in the tool center point ...

  • Page 727

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 689 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20.5 HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING This function converts the shape to be machined into a data group that can be subject to high-speed pulse distribution, using the macro executor, calls the data group with a CNC command (G05 command)...

  • Page 728

    PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 690 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 If an attempt is made to issue the function in the modes below, an alarm is issued. • Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) • Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) • Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1) • Polar coord...

  • Page 729

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 691 - 21 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Chapter 21, "AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 21.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ....................................692 21.2 POLYGON TURNING (G50.2, G51.2).......................

  • Page 730

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 692 - 21.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL Overview When a movement is made along one axis by using two servo motors as in the case of a large gantry machine, a command for one axis can drive the two motors by synchronizing one motor with the other....

  • Page 731

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 693 - 21.1.1 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control Explanation - Master axis and slave axis for axis synchronous control An axis used as the reference for axis synchronous control is referred to as a master axis (M-axis), and an ax...

  • Page 732

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 694 - - Setting for using synchronous operation at all times When bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 for the slave axis is set to 1, synchronous operation is performed at all times, regardless of the setting of the signal SYNCx/SYNCJx. - Syn...

  • Page 733

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 695 - - Axis selection on the screen display On a screen such as the current position display screen, a slave axis is also displayed. The display of a slave axis can be disabled by setting bit 0 (NDP) of parameter No. 3115 to 1 and setting b...

  • Page 734

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 696 - 21.1.2 Synchronous Error Compensation Explanation When a synchronous error value exceeding the zero width set in parameter No. 8333 is detected, compensation pulses for synchronous error reduction are calculated and added onto the comma...

  • Page 735

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 697 - Ks: Synchronous error compensation gain 2 (parameter No. 8336) (0 < Ks < Kd) Er: Synchronous error value between the current master axis and slave axis K: Current synchronous error compensation gain for Er 1. When Er < B, compe...

  • Page 736

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 698 - 21.1.3 Synchronous Establishment Explanation Upon power-up or after emergency stop cancellation, the machine positions on the master axis and slave axis under axis synchronous control are not always the same. In such a case, the synchr...

  • Page 737

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 699 - - First synchronous establishment after power-up Two methods of performing the first synchronous establishment after power-up are available. One method is based on manual reference position return operation, and the other is based on ...

  • Page 738

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 700 - - Synchronous establishment based on absolute position detection When an absolute-position detector is used as the position detector, the machine positions on the master axis and slave axis are found at power-up time for automatic estab...

  • Page 739

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 701 - 21.1.4 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching Explanation Before axis synchronous control can be performed, the reference position on the master axis must be matched with the reference position on the slave axis. With this functi...

  • Page 740

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 702 - 21.1.5 Synchronous Error Check Explanation A synchronous error value is monitored at all times. If an error exceeding a certain limit is detected, an alarm is issued and the movement along the axis is stopped. When synchronous error co...

  • Page 741

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 703 - - Synchronous error check based on machine coordinates When synchronous error compensation is not performed, a synchronous error check based on machine coordinates is made. The machine coordinate on the master axis is compared with that...

  • Page 742

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 704 - 21.1.6 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronous Error Check Explanation To recover from an alarm issued as a result of synchronous error check, two methods are available. One method uses the correction mode, and the other uses normal o...

  • Page 743

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 705 - 5. When the synchronous error is reduced to within the allowable value for suppressing the alarm, reset the value of bit 2 (ADJ) of parameter No. 8304 to the original value to switch from the correction mode to the normal synchronization...

  • Page 744

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 706 - 21.1.7 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm Explanation If a movement made along the master axis differs from a movement made along the slave axis during axis synchronous control, the machine can be damaged. To prevent such...

  • Page 745

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 707 - 4. Read the absolute torque difference value presented when normal operation is being performed. In the threshold parameter No. 2031, set a value obtained by adding some margin to the read absolute value. The absolute torque difference...

  • Page 746

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 708 - NOTE 1 During axis synchronous control, a movement based on the reference position return check (G27), automatic reference position return (G28), 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30), or machine coordinate system selection (G53) c...

  • Page 747

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 709 - 21.2 POLYGON TURNING (G50.2, G51.2) Polygon turning means machining a workpiece to a polygonal figure by rotating the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio. WorkpieceWorkpieceTool Fig. 21.2 (a) Polygon turning By changing conditions ...

  • Page 748

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 710 - Explanation A CNC controlled axis (servo axis) is assigned to the tool rotary axis. This rotary axis of tool is called Y-axis in the following description. As the workpiece axis (spindle), either a serial spindle or analog spindle can...

  • Page 749

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 711 - NOTE 4 For the Y-axis engaged in polygon turning, jog feed and handle feed are disabled. 5 For the Y-axis not engaged in polygon turning, a move command can be specified as in the case of other controlled axes. 6 The Y-axis engaged in p...

  • Page 750

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 712 - Format G50.2 Polygon turning cancel G51.2 P_ Q_ ; P,Q: Rotation ratio of spindle and Y-axis Specify range: P: Integer from 1 to 999 Q: Integer from -999 to -1 or from 1 to 999 When Q is a positive value, Y-axis makes positive rotatio...

  • Page 751

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 713 - Y XA(0,0)PtoPo B Angular speed αA : Workpiece radius B : Rool radius Angular speed β Workpiece Toolα : Workpiece angular speedβ : Tool angular speed Po (A, 0)Pto (A-B, 0) Fig. 21.2 (b) Principle of polygon turning (0, 0)αtβtAPSt...

  • Page 752

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 714 - If three tools are set at every 120°, the machining figure will be a hexagon as shown below. WARNING For the maximum rotation speed of the tool, see the instruction manual supplied with the machine. Do not specify a spindle spee...

  • Page 753

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 715 - 21.3 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM COMMAND (G50.4, G51.4, G50.5, G51.5, G50.6, AND G51.6) Synchronous control, composite control, and superimposed control can be started or canceled using a program command i...

  • Page 754

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 716 - Explanation Synchronous control Synchronous control is performed with the G51.4/G50.4 commands, instead of simultaneously controlled axis selection signals. Parameter setting examples for a 3-path system • Parameter No.12600 Path 1 ...

  • Page 755

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 717 - Composite control Composite control is performed with the G51.5/G50.5 commands, instead of composite control axis selection signals. Parameter setting examples for a 3-path system • Parameter No.12600 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3X101 201 301...

  • Page 756

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 718 - Superimposed control Superimposed control is performed with the G51.6/G50.6 commands, instead of superimposed control axis selection signals. Parameter setting examples for a 3-path system • Parameter No.12600 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3X10...

  • Page 757

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 719 - 21.4 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER The roll-over function prevents coordinates for the rotary axis from overflowing. The roll-over function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1. 21.4.1 Rotary Axis Roll-over Explanatio...

  • Page 758

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 720 - 21.4.2 Rotary Axis Control This function controls a rotary axis as specified by an absolute command. With this function, the sign of the value specified in the command is interpreted as the direction of rotation, and the absolute value ...

  • Page 759

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 721 - 21.5 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL Overview When the angular axis installed makes an angle other than 90° with the perpendicular axis, the Arbitrary angular axis control function controls the distance traveled along each axis accordin...

  • Page 760

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 722 - +Y (Angular axis)+Y' (Hypothetical axis)θYp tanθ (perpendicular axiscomponent produced bytravel along the angular axis)Xp and YpXa and YaActual tool travel+X (Perpendicular axis) Fig. 21.5 (b) - Feedrate When the Y-axis is an angu...

  • Page 761

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 723 - • By using bit 2 (AZR) of parameter No. 8200, whether to make a movement along the perpendicular axis by a movement made along the angular axis when a manual reference position return operation is performed along the angular axis can b...

  • Page 762

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 724 - Example 2) Automatic reference position return examples (If the Y-axis is an angular axis, the X-axis is a perpendicular axis, and the inclination angle is -30°) <1> Command for automatic reference position return along the Y-a...

  • Page 763

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 725 - 30°+X(Perpendicular axis) +Y’(Hypothetical axis) +Y(Angular axis)P1P0(0,0)P2 200 115.470 - Reference position return operation of high-speed type When a reference position is already established and a reference position return op...

  • Page 764

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 726 - - Commands for linear interpolation and linear interpolation type positioning (G01, G00) The tool moves to a specified position in the Cartesian coordinate system when the following is specified: (G90)G00X_Y_; (when the Y-axis is an ang...

  • Page 765

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 727 - 30°P1P0(0,0)P2200115.470+Y (Angular axis)+Y' (Hypothetical axis) +X (Perpendicular axis) - Three-dimensional coordinate conversion In the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, angular coordinate system conversion is applied ...

  • Page 766

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 728 - • Stored stroke check before move The stored stroke check function before move does not work in a angular coordinate system. Unless this function is enabled, and the coordinate system is converted to the Cartesian coordinate system, n...

  • Page 767

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 729 - Input signal Signal name AddressClassificationRemarks Mirror image MIx G106 Angular Mirror image is applied to the angular coordinate system for each axis independently. Caution) Be sure to turn off the mirror image signal for the angula...

  • Page 768

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 730 - - Synchronous control For synchronous control on axes related to arbitrary angular axis control, the angular axis and Cartesian axis on the master axis side and the angular axis and Cartesian axis on the slave axis side must be placed u...

  • Page 769

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 731 - - Functions that cannot be used simultaneously • Axis synchronous control, twin table control, parallel axis control, polygon turning, rigid tapping, hypothetical axis control, EGB function, PMC axis control, superimposed control CA...

  • Page 770

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 732 - 21.6 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER Overview To replace the tool damaged during machining or to check the status of machining, the tool can be withdrawn from a workpiece. The tool can then be advanced again to restart machining efficiently. ...

  • Page 771

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 733 - : Position at which tool retract switch is turned on : Programmed position : Position at which tool is retracted by manual operation: Retract path : Manual operation (retract path) : Return path : Re-positioning XYZZX Format Specify a ...

  • Page 772

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 734 - Explanation - Retraction When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator's panel is turned on during automatic operation or in the automatic operation stop or hold state, the tool is retracted the length of the programmed retracti...

  • Page 773

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 735 - - Repositioning When the cycle start button is pressed while the tool is in the retraction position, the tool moves to the position where the TOOL WITHDRAW switch was turned on. This operation is called repositioning. Upon completion ...

  • Page 774

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 736 - 21.7 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX 21.7.1 Electronic Gear Box Overview This function enables fabrication of high-precision gears, screws, and other components by rotating the workpiece in synchronization with a rotating tool or by moving the too...

  • Page 775

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 737 - Format Parameter EFX(No.7731#0)=1 Parameter EFX (No.7731#0)=0 Parameter HBR (No.7731#5)=1 Parameter HBR (No.7731#5)=0 Start of synchronization G81 T_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 R_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 T_ ( L_ )( Q...

  • Page 776

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 738 - - Synchronization control (1) Start of synchronization If G81 is issued so that the machine enters synchronization mode, the synch switch of the EGB function is closed, and the synchronization of the tool and workpiece axes is started....

  • Page 777

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 739 - (4) Cancellation of synchronization When cancellation of synchronization is issued, the absolute coordinate on the workpiece axis is updated in accordance with the amount of travel during synchronization. Subsequently, absolute commands...

  • Page 778

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 740 - NOTE 1 If bit 0 (HBR) of parameter No. 7700 is set to 1, EGB synchronization will not be canceled due to a reset. Usually, set this parameter bit to 1. 2 In synchronous mode, it is not possible to specify G27, G28, G29, G30, G30.1, and G...

  • Page 779

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 741 - - Helical gear compensation For a helical gear, the workpiece axis is compensated for the movement along the Z-axis (axial feed axis) based on the torsion angle of the gear. Helical gear compensation is performed with the following form...

  • Page 780

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 742 - - Direction of helical gear compensation The direction depends on HDR, bit 2 of parameter No. 7700. When HDR is set to 1. +CC:+, Z:+, P:+ Compensation direction : + (a) -Z +Z +CC:+, Z:+, P:- Compensation direction : -(b) +CC:+, Z:-, P:...

  • Page 781

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 743 - - Synchronization coefficient A synchronization coefficient is internally represented using a fraction (Kn/Kd) to eliminate an error. The formula below is used for calculation. αβTLKK =t coefficienation Synchronizdn×= where L : Numb...

  • Page 782

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 744 - - Retract function (1) Retract function with an external signal When the retract switch on the machine operator’s panel is turned on, retraction is performed with the retract amount set in parameter No. 7741 and the feedrate set in p...

  • Page 783

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 745 - NOTE 1 During a retract operation, an interlock is effective to the retract axis. 2 During a retract operation, a machine lock is effective to the retract axis. 3 The retraction direction depends on the movement direction of the machine,...

  • Page 784

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 746 - 21.7.2 Electronic Gear Box Automatic Phase Synchronization Overview In the electronic gear box (EGB), when synchronization start or cancellation is specified, synchronization is not started or canceled immediately. Instead, accelerat...

  • Page 785

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 747 - Explanation - Acceleration/deceleration type Synchronization cancellation commandSynchronization start commandWorkpiece-axis speedSynchronization state AccelerationDecelerationSpindle speed 1. Specify G81R1 to start synchronization. W...

  • Page 786

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 748 - - Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type Automatic phase synchronization Synchronization cancellation commandSynchronization start commandWorkpiece-axis speedSynchronization state AccelerationDecelerationSpi...

  • Page 787

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 749 - NOTE 1 The one-rotation signal used for automatic phase synchronization is issued not by the spindle position coder but by the separate pulse coder attached to the spindle and used to collect EGB feedback information. This means that th...

  • Page 788

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 750 - Program example - Acceleration/deceleration type M03 ; Clockwise spindle rotation command G81 T_ L_ R1 ; Synchronization start command G00 X_ ; Positions the workpiece at the machining position. Machining in the synchronous state ...

  • Page 789

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 751 - 21.7.3 Skip Function for EGB Axis Overview This function enables the skip or high-speed skip signal (these signals are collectively called skip signals in the remainder of this manual) for the EBG slave axis in synchronization mode with...

  • Page 790

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 752 - Example G81 T200 L2 ; EGB mode ON X ; Z ; G31.8 G91 C0 P500 Q200 R1 ; EGB skip command After 200 skip signals have been input, the 200 skip positions on the C-axis that correspond to the respective skip signals are stored in cu...

  • Page 791

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 753 - 21.7.4 Electronic Gear Box 2 Pair Overview The Electronic Gear Box is a function for rotating a workpiece in sync with a rotating tool, or to move a tool in sync with a rotating workpiece. With this function, the high-precision machinin...

  • Page 792

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 754 - - Synchronization start When the ratio of the master-axis travel to the slave-axis travel is specified, synchronization starts. Specify the master-axis travel in either of the following ways. 1 Master-axis speed T t: Master-axis speed ...

  • Page 793

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 755 - <1> Emergency stop <2> Servo alarm <3> Alarm PW0000 (indicating that the power should be turned off) <4> An IO alarm is generated CAUTION 1 Feed hold, interlock, and machine lock are invalid to a slave axis in...

  • Page 794

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 756 - 21.7.4.2 Description of commands compatible with those for a hobbing machine (G80, G81) A command compatible with that for a hobbing machine can be used as a synchronization command. Usually, a hobbing machine performs machining by sync...

  • Page 795

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 757 - Explanation - Synchronization start Specify P and Q to use helical gear compensation. In this case, if only one of P and Q is specified, alarm PS1594 is generated. When G81 is issued so that the machine enters synchronization mode, the...

  • Page 796

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 758 - NOTE 3 It is not possible to use controled axis detach for a slave axis 4 During synchronization, manual handle interruption can be performed on the slave and other axes. 5 In synchronization mode, no inch/metric conversion commands (G20...

  • Page 797

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 759 - - Helical gear compensation For a helical gear, the workpiece axis is subjected to compensation for movement along the Z axis (axial feed axis) according to the twisted angle of the gear. Helical gear compensation is performed with the ...

  • Page 798

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 760 - - Direction of helical gear compensation The direction depends on bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700. When HDR is set to 1. +CC:+, Z:+, P:+ Compensation direction : + (a) -Z +Z +CC:+, Z:+, P:- Compensation direction : -(b) +CC:+, Z:-, P:...

  • Page 799

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 761 - 21.7.4.3 Controlled axis configuration example - For gear grinders Spindle : EGB master axis : Tool axis 1st axis : X axis 2nd axis : Y axis 3rd axis : C axis (EGB slave axis : Workpiece axis) 4th axis : C axis (EGB dummy axis : Cannot...

  • Page 800

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 762 - 21.7.4.4 Sample programs - When the master axis is the spindle, and the slave axis is the C-axis (1) G81.5 T10 C0 L1 ; Synchronization between the master axis and C-axis is started at the ratio of one rotation about the C-axis to t...

  • Page 801

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 763 - - When two groups of axes are synchronized simultaneously Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Fig. 21.7.4.3 (a), the sample program below synchronizes the spindle with the V-axis while the spindle is synchronized wit...

  • Page 802

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 764 - - Example of use of dressing Gear grinder in the following machine configuration Limit switch 1Limit switch 2V-axis motorU-axisV-axisRotary whetstone O9500 ; N01 G01 G91 U_ F100 ; Dressing axis approach N02 M03 S100 ; The M...

  • Page 803

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 765 - NOTE If the V-axis (linear axis) is synchronized with the spindle as in dressing, the V-axis travel range is determined by the rotation of the spindle. To perform dressing with the tool moving back and forth along the V-axis in a certa...

  • Page 804

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 766 - 21.7.4.5 Synchronization ratio specification range The programmed ratio (synchronization ratio) of a movement along the slave axis to a movement along the master axis is converted to a detection unit ratio inside the NC. If such convert...

  • Page 805

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 767 - Then, the C-axis detection unit is 0.0002 degree. The V-axis detection unit is 0.0002 mm. In this case, the synchronization ratio (Kn, Kd) is related with a command as indicated below. Here, let Pm and Ps be the amounts of movements repr...

  • Page 806

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 768 - KnKd = 3263×572000×1 = 326314400 Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm is output. In this sample program, when T1 is specified for the master axis, the synchronization ratio (fraction) of the CMR of the C-axis to ...

  • Page 807

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 769 - Ps : (Amount of V-axis movement) × CMR → 1000 × 5 KnKd = 1000×572000 = 572 Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm is output. (b) For a millimeter machine and inch input Command : G81.5 T1 V1.0 ; Operation ...

  • Page 808

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 770 - Then, the C-axis detection unit is 0.002 degree. The V-axis detection unit is 0.002 mm. In this case, the synchronization ratio (Kn, Kd) is related with a command as indicated below. Here, let Pm and Ps be the amounts of movements re...

  • Page 809

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 771 - 21.8 TANDEM CONTROL When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis.Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is used only to...

  • Page 810

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 772 - 22 5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION Chapter 22, "5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 22.1 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL ....................................773 22.2 TOOL POSTURE CONTROL ......................

  • Page 811

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 773 - 22.1 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL Overview On a 5-axis machine having two rotary axes that turn a tool or table, this function performs tool length compensation constantly, even in the middle of a block, and exerts control so that the t...

  • Page 812

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 774 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'Tool center point pathY'X'Z' Fig. 22.1 (b) Path of the tool center point

  • Page 813

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 775 - When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system, programming can be performed without worrying about the rotation of the table because the programming coordinate system does not move with respe...

  • Page 814

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 776 - <2> Table rotation type machine <3> Composite type machine<1> Tool rotation type machineXCBZYBCX ZYBYX ZC Fig. 22.1 (d) Three types of 5-axis machine Even if the rotary axis that controls the tool does not inte...

  • Page 815

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 777 - There are two types, as described below, one of which is used depending on how the direction of the tool axis is specified. (1) Type 1 The block end point of the rotary axes is specified (e.g. A, B, C). The CNC performs tool length...

  • Page 816

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 778 - - Positioning and linear interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP_ H_ Q_ ; Starts tool center point control (type 2).IP_ I_ J_ K_ ; : IP : In the case of an absolute programming, the coordinate value of the end ...

  • Page 817

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 779 - - Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP_ H_ ; Starts tool center point control (type 1). : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate system...

  • Page 818

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 780 - - Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP_ H_ Q_ ; Starts tool center point control (type 2). : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate sy...

  • Page 819

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 781 - CAUTION 1 Only arc radius R can be specified. (The distance from the start point to the center of the arc cannot be specified using I, J, and K.) 2 A round circle (the start point and end point are the same) cannot be specified. An...

  • Page 820

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 782 - - Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP_ H ; Starts tool center point control (type 1). : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate system ...

  • Page 821

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 783 - Movement to the position specified by the G43.4 block does not constitute tool center point control. Only tool length compensation is performed. Because the specified speed is usually the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, t...

  • Page 822

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 784 - - Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP_ H_ Q_; Starts tool center point control (type 2). : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate syste...

  • Page 823

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 785 - Movement to the position specified by the G43.5 block does not constitute tool center point control. Only tool length compensation is performed. Because the specified speed is the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, the speed ...

  • Page 824

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 786 - - Tool center point control cancellation command G49 IP_ α_ β_ ; Cancels tool center point control. IP : In the case of an absolute programming, the coordinate value of the end point of the tool control point movement In the ca...

  • Page 825

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 787 - - Inclination angle of the tool In the case of tool center point control of type 2, the inclination angle of the tool can be specified using address Q of G43.5. The inclination angle of the tool represents how inclined the tool dire...

  • Page 826

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 788 - Explanation - When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system The programming coordinate system is used for tool center point control. When the G43.4 or G43.5 command is specified with bit 5 ...

  • Page 827

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 789 - - When the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system When the G43.4 command is specified with bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.19696 set to 1, the workpiece coordinate system that is in use at that point of ...

  • Page 828

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 790 - - Notes on performing circular interpolation and helical interpolation when using the workpiece coordinate system as the programming coordinate system • The start point, end point, and center of an arc change as the table rotation ...

  • Page 829

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 791 - When the G17 (X-Y plane) command is executed After the G43.4 command, the X-Y plane is selected using the G17 command and circular interpolation is performed by rotating the C-axis (table rotation axis) (including those cases where t...

  • Page 830

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 792 - • In the case of a table rotation type machine Descriptions are based on the following machine configuration. A table rotation type machine can be considered equivalent to a composite type machine if any of its two table rotation...

  • Page 831

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 793 - The master axis (A-axis) moves before the G43.4 command and, after the G43.4 command, circular interpolation is performed using the G17 (X-Y plane) command by rotating the C-axis, or the C-axis is rotated during circular interpolatio...

  • Page 832

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 794 - When the G18 (Z-X plane) command is executed The G43.4 command is executed after moving the A- and C-axes, and circular interpolation is performed using the G18 (Z-X plane) command without moving any rotary axis. → This case corres...

  • Page 833

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 795 - NOTE When the tool center point control mode is entered, acceleration/deceleration before look ahead interpolation is enabled automatically. Be sure to specify the following parameters: (1) Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.1401=1 : Li...

  • Page 834

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 796 - - Tool behavior at startup and cancellation When tool center point control is started (G43.4/G43.5) or canceled (G49), the tool moves by a tool offset value. Compensation vector calculation is performed only at the end of a block. ...

  • Page 835

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 797 - - Canned cycle during tool center point control When bit 5 (TFA) of parameter No. 5105 is set to 1, if a canned cycle being subjected to tool center point control is performed when the position of the rotation axis that determines th...

  • Page 836

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 798 - :Position where tool retract switch is on :Retract position :Retract position by manual operation:Retract path (tool axis direction) :Manual operation (retract path) :Recover path :Repositioning YX Z Parameter No.11261 ...

  • Page 837

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 799 - - Angle of the rotary axis for type 2 (when the movement range is not specified) When the direction of the tool is specified by I, J, K, Q for type 2, more than two pairs of "computed angles" of the rotary axes usually exis...

  • Page 838

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 800 - The process of judging whether the moving angle is smaller or larger as the output judgement condition is called "movement judgement." When bit 5 (PRI) of parameter No.19608 is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotar...

  • Page 839

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 801 - When the PA angle is (*1): The output angle is: (A θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees; B φ2 degrees). Namely, θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees is adopted that is nearer to the computed angle of A, and φ2, which is the same group as θ2, is ...

  • Page 840

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 802 - The "output angle" is explained below using a tool rotation type machine as an example. This example illustrates a machine having a "BC type tool axis Z." XYZC-axis: 1st rotation axis (master)B-axis: 2nd rotatio...

  • Page 841

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 803 - <4> When the current rotary axis angles are (B 180 degrees; C 90 degrees) The "output angles" are (B 270 degrees; C 0 degree). Since the two candidates are equally near to the current position (90 degrees) of the C...

  • Page 842

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 804 - - Angle of the rotary axis for type 2 (when the movement range is specified) If the upper and lower limits of the movement range of the rotary axis is specified using parameters No.19741 to No.19744, the rotary axis will move only wi...

  • Page 843

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 805 - When bit 5 (PRI) of parameter No.19608 is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotary axis and second rotary axis are made in reverse order. CAUTION 1 If the lower limit of the movement range is larger than the upper limit, ala...

  • Page 844

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 806 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees 360 × N degrees • Computed angle A Current position AMovement range A θ1 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × (N - 1) θ1 + 360 × (N + 1) "Computed angle of rotary axis A and its current position...

  • Page 845

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 807 - Operation examples - In the case of a tool rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration in which a tool rotation axis that turns around the Y-axis is located beneath another tool rotation axis t...

  • Page 846

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 808 - X'Y'Z'CControl point path (of the machinecoordinate system)Tool center point path (of the programming coordinate system)BX'Y'Z'X'Y'Z' Fig. 22.1 (j) Example for a tool rotation type machine

  • Page 847

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 809 - - In the case of a table rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration (trunnion) in which a rotation table that turns around the Y-axis is located above another table rotation axis that turns ar...

  • Page 848

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 810 - For type 2 (when the coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system (only when bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.19696 is set to 0)): O200 (Sample Program2) ; N1 G00 G90 A0 B0 ; N2 G55 ; Prepares the progr...

  • Page 849

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 811 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'Y'X'Z'Tool center point path seen from the table-fixed coordinate systemXZ'YXZ'YXZ'YTool center point path taken whenthe programming coordinatesystem does not moveYXZ"YXZ"YXZ"Control point path (of the mac...

  • Page 850

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 812 - - In the case of a composite type machine Explanations are given below assuming a composite type machine configuration that has one table rotation axis (which turns around the X-axis) and one tool rotation axis (which turns around th...

  • Page 851

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 813 - For type 2 (when the coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system (only when bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.19696 is set to 0)): O300 (Sample Program3) ; N1 G00 G90 A0 B0 ; N2 G55 ; Prepares the progr...

  • Page 852

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 814 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'X'Y'Z'X'Z'Y'X'Z'Y'X'Z'Y'Control point path (of themachine coordinate system)Tool center point path seen from the table-fixed coordinate systemTool center point path taken whenthe programming coordinatesystem does not mov...

  • Page 853

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 815 - - When linear interpolation is performed during tool center point control Examples are given below in which each 100-mm-long side of an equilateral triangle is cut at B-axis angles of 0, 30 to 60, and 60 degrees, respectively. Examp...

  • Page 854

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 816 - When type 1 is selected and the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system (Note that the values of N60 to N90 are different from those specified in the preceding example.): O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G...

  • Page 855

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 817 - When type 2 is selected and the table-fixed coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system: O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N20 G90 X50.0 Y-70.0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Moves to ...

  • Page 856

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 818 - The following figure illustrates the position of the workpiece, as well as the position of the tool head (relative to the workpiece), as seen from the table-fixed programming coordinate system in the +Z direction. • Behavior as se...

  • Page 857

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 819 - • Detailed diagram of each blockY"X"(C 0)(B 30.0)(B 0)Behavior of the toolcenter pointBehavior of the control point(machine coordinate value)(B 30.0)C-axis rotates, with Cbeing 120 degrees.(B 45.0)(C 0)(C 120.0)(B 30.0)B-...

  • Page 858

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 820 - C-axis rotates, with Cbeing 240 degrees.(C 120.0)(B 60.0)(B 60.0)(C 240.0)(C 360.0)(B 0)(C-axis rotates, with C being360 degrees.)N80 blockN90 blockN100 block(C 240.0)(B 60.0)(B 60.0)Y"X"Y"X"X'Y'Y'X'X' X"Y'Y&q...

  • Page 859

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 821 - - When circular interpolation is performed during tool center point control In this example, one of the three sides of an equilateral triangle, each being 100 mm long side, is specified as a straight line and the other two are specif...

  • Page 860

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 822 - C-axisCenter of the C-axis rotationXYZZ-axisY-axisX-axisB-axisCenter of the B-axisrotationTool centerpointG54 workpiececoordinate system Machine configuration for the circular interpolation example The following figure illustrates th...

  • Page 861

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 823 - XY [Up to N031]YXBehavior of the toolcenter pointB -60Behavior of the control point (machinecoordinate system)B -90XY [N032]B -45C 90B -60[N034]B -30B -30YX[N033]B -45B -30C 150Head path relativeto the workpieceApparent head pathC 210...

  • Page 862

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 824 - Limitation - Manual intervention Manual intervention is impossible during tool center point control. If manual intervention is performed, alarm PS5421 is issued when automatic operation is started later. - Hypothetical axis of a ta...

  • Page 863

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 825 - - 3-dimensional cutter compensation 3-dimensional cutter compensation and tool center point control can be used at the same time. For restrictions in such a case, see "Restrictions" of 3-dimensional cutter compensation. -...

  • Page 864

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 826 - • Exact stop (G09) • Programmable data input (G10) • Tool retract and recover (G10.6) • Programmable data input mode cancel (G11) • Plane selection (G17/G18/G19) • Tool radius compensation cancel (G40) • 3-dimensional cu...

  • Page 865

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 827 - T • Mirror image for double turret off/balanced cutting mode cancel (G69) • Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode off (G69.1) • Feed per minute (G98 (G94)) - Specification of axes not re...

  • Page 866

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 828 - 22.2 TOOL POSTURE CONTROL Overview Under tool center point control, the tool tip moves along a specified path even when the tool direction relative to the workpiece changes. Usually, however, the two rotary axes are controlled indep...

  • Page 867

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 829 - Tool posture control is enabled when P1 is specified or disabled when P0 is specified in the G43.4 and G43.5 blocks. The behavior taken when the address P command is not present can be selected by bit 0 (TPC) of parameter No. 19604. ...

  • Page 868

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 830 - Program specification path Control point V Tool center point Block start point Block end point VsV VeθΘL l VsVePlane configured by tool length compensation vectors Vs and Ve Momentary tool length compensation vector V is controlle...

  • Page 869

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 831 - Singular point - "Tool-side rotary axis" and "workpiece-side rotary axis" When tool center point control type 2 is specified, programming needs to be performed considering a singular point and singular point postu...

  • Page 870

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 832 - rotary axis and the tool posture (tool orientation) are parallel with each other. Example) Suppose that a tool rotation type machine is used, the master axis is the C-axis (about the Z-axis), the slave axis is the B-axis (about the Y...

  • Page 871

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 833 - - When the tool posture is close to a singular point posture When tool posture control is exercised on a machine that has a singular point, and the tool posture becomes close to a singular point posture during execution of a block, t...

  • Page 872

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 834 - If this angle is equal to or less than the value of parameter No. 19738, a singular point close posture is assumed. Tool posture Singular point posture Fig. 22.2 (g) Singular point close posture If a singular point close posture is ...

  • Page 873

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 835 - Notes - When the reference tool axis or a rotary axis is inclined When tool center point control is used, the inclination of the reference tool axis can be set in parameter No. 19698 and No. 19699, and the inclination of a rotary axi...

  • Page 874

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 836 - - When the operation range of rotary axes is specified When tool center point control is used, the operation range of rotary axes can be set in parameter No. 19741 to No. 19744. If either of the rotary axes exceeds the set operation ...

  • Page 875

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 837 - O0020 … G43.4 H1 P1; … N10 X_ Y_ Z_ B90.0 C0.0; N20 X_ Y_ Z_ B-90.0 C-90.0;… G49; M30; O0021 … G43.4 H1 P1; … N10 X_ Y_ Z_ B90.0 C0.0; N20 X_ Y_ Z_ B90.0 C90.0;… G49; M30; XY B=90.0, C=0.0B=90.0, C=90.0 or B=-90.0, C=-90....

  • Page 876

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 838 - 22.3 TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND 22.3.1 Tilted Working Plane Command Overview Programming for creating holes, pockets, and other figures in a datum plane tilted with respect to the workpiece would be easy if commands can be specifi...

  • Page 877

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 839 - XYZThe tool axis direction is the+Z-axis direction.The tool axis direction is the+Y-axis direction.The tool axis direction is the +X-axis direction. Fig. 22.3 (b) Tool axis direction

  • Page 878

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 840 - This function regards the direction normal to the machining plane as the +Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate system. After the G53.1 command, the tool is controlled so that it remains perpendicular to the machining plane. Co...

  • Page 879

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 841 - This function is applicable to the following machine configurations. (See Fig. 22.3 (d).) <1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes <2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table r...

  • Page 880

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 842 - Format - Tilted working plane command (G68.2) M G68.2 X x0 Y y0 Z z0 Iα Jβ Kγ ; Tilted working plane command G69 ; Cancels the tilted working plane command. X, Y, Z : Feature coordinate system origin The axes specified here are...

  • Page 881

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 843 - Explanation - Coordinate conversion using an Euler's angle Coordinate conversion by rotation is assumed to be performed around the workpiece coordinate system origin. Let the coordinate system obtained by rotating the workpiece coord...

  • Page 882

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 844 - - Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control is exercised by using, as the reference, the machine axis specified in address P in a G96 block or the machine axis (not in the feature coordinate system but in the act...

  • Page 883

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 845 - Operation description 1: When G43 (tool length compensation) is specified for a machine with its axes crossing one another The G53.1 command, when specified after the G68.2 command, automatically controls the rotary axis in such a w...

  • Page 884

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 846 - Fig. 22.3 (f) shows the behavior of the machine when it runs sample program 1. N3 commandFeature coordinatesystemXc-Yc-ZcXcYcZc• Sample program 1 (with axes crossing one another)XcYcZcXcYcZcXcYcZcN4 commandN5 commandN6 commandWork...

  • Page 885

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 847 - Operation description 2: When G43 (tool length compensation) is specified for a machine with no axis crossing Here is the case where no axis of the machine crosses any other axis. It is assumed that sample program 1 is used. In this...

  • Page 886

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 848 - N3 command• Sample program 1 (no axis crossing)N4 commandN5 commandN6 commandWorkpiececoordinate systemX-Y-ZXYZControlpointXcYcZcZcFeature coordinatesystemXc-Yc-ZcXcYcXcYcZcXcYcZcAn intersection offset vectorbetween the tool axis a...

  • Page 887

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 849 - Operation description 3: When no G43 (tool length compensation) command is specified or if no G53.1 (tool axis direction control) command is specified Sample program 2 of O200 is equivalent to sample program 1 except that sample pro...

  • Page 888

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 850 - Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc N4 command XcYc Zc • Sample program 2 (with axes crossing one another) Yc N4 command Workpiece coordinate systemX-Y-Z XYZControl point XcZc N4 command Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc ...

  • Page 889

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 851 - N4 command Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc• Sample program 3 (with axes crossing one another) N5 command Workpiece coordinate systemX-Y-Z XYZControl point XcYc ZcN4 command ZFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc• ...

  • Page 890

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 852 - - Composite type machine Basic operation This function is also available for a composite type machine in which the tool head rotates on the tool rotation axis and the table rotates on the table rotation axis. The feature coordinate ...

  • Page 891

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 853 - - Feature coordinate system with the table rotated by G53.1 (tool axis direction control) The composite type machine shown in Fig. 22.3 (j) is explained as an example. If the table rotates by the tool axis direction control command (...

  • Page 892

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 854 - - Rotation direction of the table rotation axis The composite type machine shown in Fig. 22.3 (j) is explained as an example. Set parameter No.19684 to 1 if the rotation direction of the rotation table corresponding to the positive-d...

  • Page 893

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 855 - - Table rotation type machine Basic operation This function is also usable for a table rotation type machine with two table rotation axes. The feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc is set in the workpiece coordinate system based on the...

  • Page 894

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 856 - - Feature coordinate system with the table rotated by G53.1 (tool axis direction control) The table rotation type machine shown in Fig. 22.3 (m) is explained as an example. If the table rotates by the tool axis direction control comm...

  • Page 895

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 857 - - Angle of the rotary axis When tool axis direction control (G53.1) has been performed, more than two pairs of "computed angles" of the rotary axes usually exist. The "computed angle" is the candidate angle at whi...

  • Page 896

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 858 - The process of judging whether the moving angle is smaller or larger as the output judgement condition is called "movement judgement." The "movement judgement" process is explained below. When the "computed a...

  • Page 897

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 859 - When the PA angle is (*1): The output angle is: (A θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees; B φ2 degrees). Namely, θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees is adopted that is nearer to the computed angle of A, and φ2, which is the same group as θ2, is ...

  • Page 898

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 860 - The "output angle" is explained below using a tool rotation type machine as an example. This example illustrates a machine having a "BC type tool axis Z." • BC type tool axis ZXYZC-axis:First rotation axis(mast...

  • Page 899

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 861 - <4> When the current rotary axis angles are (B 180 degrees; C 90 degrees) The "output angles" are (B 270 degrees; C 0 degree). Since the two candidates are equally near to the current position (90 degrees) of the C...

  • Page 900

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 862 - 22.3.2 Tilted Working Plane Command by Tool Axis Direction Overview By specifying G68.3, a coordinate system (feature coordinate system) where the tool axis direction is the +Z-axis direction can be automatically specified. When a f...

  • Page 901

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 863 - Format Format G68.3 X x0 Y y0 Z z0 Rα ; Tilted working plane command G69 ; Cancel tilted working plane command (M series).G69.1; Cancel tilted working plane command (T series).Explanation of symbols X,Y,Z : Origin of a feature coo...

  • Page 902

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 864 - - Determination of a feature coordinate system When G68.3 is specified, the tool axis direction vector (T ) represents the +Z direction ( Zc ) of the feature coordinate system. The vector normal to a plane formed by the +Z direction ...

  • Page 903

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 865 - When 0 is set in parameter No. 12321, the vertical axis direction is the reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697). If a value other than 0 through 3 is set in parameter No. 12321, the PS5459 alarm is issued. CAUTION Too...

  • Page 904

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 866 - - Example of operation An example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type is given below. The machine configuration is "BC type reference tool axis Z-axis". B: 2nd rotation axis (slave)C: 1st rotation axis (maste...

  • Page 905

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 867 - XcYc ZcX YZX YZX YZMachine operation by sample program 1N3 commandN6 commandN5 commandN4 commandWorkpiece coorditate systemX-Y-Z Workpiece coordinate systemX-Y-Z Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc N3 block: Performs tool ...

  • Page 906

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 868 - - Multiple G68.3 After the tool axis direction is changed in G68.3 mode, by specifying G68.3, a new feature coordinate system where the tool axis direction is the +Z-axis direction can be specified. Example of operation An exampl...

  • Page 907

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 869 - N3 commandN4 commandN6 commandN5 commandXY Z Machine operation by sample program 2 XcYc ZcXc Yc Zc Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-ZcXY Z XcYc Zc XY Z XcYcZcXY Z N3 block: Sets a feature coordinate system according to the...

  • Page 908

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 870 - 22.3.3 Tilted Working Plane command with Guidance Overview With the conventional tilted working plane command, a tilted working plane can be specified based on Eulerian angle and tool axis direction. This function enables a tilted wo...

  • Page 909

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 871 - 22.3.3.1 Tilted working plane command based on roll-pitch-yaw Overview With the tilted working plane command, coordinate system conversion by rotation about the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system in this orde...

  • Page 910

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 872 - Format Format G68.2 P1 Qq X_ Y_ Z_ Iα Jβ Kγ; Tilted working plane command G69 ; Cancel tilted working plane command (M series). G69.1; Cancel tilted working plane command (T series). Explanation of symbols Q : Order in which axes ...

  • Page 911

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 873 - Conversion from the workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z to coordinate system 1 X’-Y’-Z’ xzyy’z’ααxzyy’z’x’’z’’y’’βββγxzyx’’z’’y’’γγxcyczcConversion from coordinate system1 X’-Y’-Z’ to...

  • Page 912

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 874 - G68.2 P1 Q123 X200.0 Y0 Z50.0 I30.0 J0 K90.0 ; G53.1 ; : Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. • Feature coordinate system origin : (200.0,...

  • Page 913

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 875 - 22.3.3.2 Tilted working plane command based on three points Overview With the tilted working plane command, a tilted working plane can be specified by specifying three points in a feature coordinate system. XYZP3 P2 P1XcZcYc Forma...

  • Page 914

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 876 - Coordinate system origin shift Xc YcZcWorkpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-ZcXYZαP1 P3 P2 CAUTION 1 Three G68.2P2 commands (Q1, Q2, and Q3) determine a tilted plane. If the G68.2P2 commands are inter...

  • Page 915

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 877 - Explanation - Determination of a feature coordinate system Three entered points are named P1, P2, and P3 in the order of entry. The P1-to-P2 direction is defined as the X-axis of a feature coordinate system. Among the directions tha...

  • Page 916

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 878 - G68.2 P2 Q1 X200.0 Y0 Z50.0 ; G68.2 P2 Q2 X200.0 Y100.0 Z50.0 ; G68.2 P2 Q3 X26.795 Y0 Z150.0 ; G53.1 ; . . . Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. ...

  • Page 917

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 879 - 22.3.3.3 Tilted working plane command based on two vectors Overview With the tilted working plane command, a tilted working plane can be specified by specifying an X-axis direction vector and a Z-axis direction vector in the feature ...

  • Page 918

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 880 - Explanation - Determination of a feature coordinate system The first vector is defined as the X-axis of the feature coordinate system, and the second vector is defined as the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system. The Y-axis of th...

  • Page 919

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 881 - G68.2 P3 Q1 X200.0 Y0 Z50.0 I0 J1.0 K0 ; G68.2 P3 Q2 I100.0 J0 K173.205 ; G53.1 ; . . . Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. Origin of a fea...

  • Page 920

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 882 - 22.3.3.4 Tilted working plane command based on projection angles Overview With the tilted working plane command, a tilted working plane can be specified based on projection angles. A plane determined by vector A and vector B produced...

  • Page 921

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 883 - Explanation - Determination of a feature coordinate system The X-axis direction vector of the workpiece coordinate system rotated by α about the Y-axis of the workpiece coordinate system is defined as vector A. The Y-axis direction...

  • Page 922

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 884 - G68.2 P4 X200.0 Y0 Z50.0 I30.0 J0 K90.0 ; G53.1 ; : By the third command angle γ, the X-axis and Y-axis of the feature coordinate system are determined. NOTE When vector A and vector B are considered to be parallel with each other...

  • Page 923

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 885 - 22.3.3.5 Absolute multiple command By additionally specifying G68.2 in the tilted working plane command mode, a feature coordinate system produced by additionally applying coordinate system conversion to the workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 924

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 886 - Example of operation An example of operation on a tool rotation type machine is explained below. The machine configuration is "BC type with the reference tool axis being the Z-axis". B: 2nd rotation axis (slave)C: 1st rot...

  • Page 925

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 887 - N6 commandX YZN4 commandMachine operation by sample program 1 N7 commandN5 commandX YZX YZXc YcZc X YZFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc XcYc Zc Xc Yc Zc G55Machine origin N4 blo...

  • Page 926

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 888 - 22.3.3.6 Incremental multiple command By specifying G68.4, coordinate system conversion can be applied to the currently set feature coordinate system. This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (MTW) of parameter No. 11221. Format Th...

  • Page 927

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 889 - Example of operation An example of operation on a tool rotation type machine is explained below. Rotary axis C rotates about the Z-axis (master axis). Rotary axis B rotates about the Y-axis (slave axis). B: 2nd rotation axis (slave)...

  • Page 928

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 890 - N6 commandX YZN4 commandMachine operation by sample program 2 N7 commandN5 commandXc1Yc1 Zc1 X YZX YZXc2 Yc2Zc2 X YZFeature coordinate system Xc1-Yc1-Zc1 Feature coordinate system Xc2-Yc2-Zc2 Xc1Yc1 Zc1 Xc2 Yc2 Zc2 Xc1 Yc1 ...

  • Page 929

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 891 - Limitation - Basic restrictions The restrictions for this function are similar to those for the three-dimensional coordinate system conversion function. - Increment system The same increment system must be used for the basic three ...

  • Page 930

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 892 - - Relationships with other modal commands G41, G42, and G40 (tool radius compensation), G43 and G49 (tool length compensation), G51.1 and G50.1 (programmable mirror image), and canned cycle commands must have nesting relationships wi...

  • Page 931

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 893 - M • Programmable mirror image (G50.1/G51.1) • Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode off (G69) • Feed per minute (G94) • Feed per revolution (G94) T • Coordinate system rotation cancel...

  • Page 932

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 894 - 22.4 INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL Overview The conventional tilted working plane command / tool center point control function / 3-dimensional cutter compensation / three-dimensional manual feed can be used only for those machines who...

  • Page 933

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 895 - An example of a tool rotation type machine is explained below. (See Fig. 22.4 (b).) The machine shown in Fig. 22.4 (b) has rotary axis B (master) that turns around the Y-axis and rotary axis C (slave) whose Y-axis is inclined at an a...

  • Page 934

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 896 - An example of a composite type machine is explained below. (See Fig. 22.4 (d).) The machine shown in Fig. 22.4 (d) has table rotation axis B whose Y-axis is inclined at an angle of -45 degrees on the Y-Z plane and tool rotation axis ...

  • Page 935

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 897 - 22.5 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION Overview For machines having multiple rotary axes for freely controlling the orientation of a tool axis, this function calculates a tool vector from the positions of these rotary axes. The func...

  • Page 936

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 898 - - Machine configuration This function is applicable to the following machine configurations: <1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes <2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table...

  • Page 937

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 899 - The coordinate system in which to execute a program for 3-dimensional cutter compensation is called a programming coordinate system. If, in a 5-axis machine having a table rotation axis, 3-dimensional cutter compensation (tool side of...

  • Page 938

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 900 - 22.5.1 Cutter Compensation in Tool Rotation Type Machine Overview In a 5-axis machine having two tool rotation axes as shown in Fig. 22.5.1 (a), this function can perform cutter compensation. Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has ...

  • Page 939

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 901 - 22.5.1.1 Tool side offset Overview This type of cutter compensation performs three-dimensional compensation in a plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to the tool vector. CompensationplaneYZXTool vectorCutter compensationamountTo...

  • Page 940

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 902 - For type 2, do not specify a rotation axis but specify the direction at the tool end point as viewed from the programming coordinate system (workpiece coordinate system), with I, J, and K. Specifying a rotation axis causes alarm PS54...

  • Page 941

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 903 - Explanation - Tool’s angle of gradient in type 2 For type 2 of 3-dimensional cutter compensation, the tool's angle of gradient can be specified with address Q in a G41.6/G42.6 command block. The tool's angle of gradient refers to ...

  • Page 942

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 904 - - Operation at startup and cancellation <1> Type A The tool is moved in the same way as for cutter compensation as shown below. ToolG41.2 G40 : Tool center path : Programmed path Operation in linear interpolation : Tool...

  • Page 943

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 905 - When the G40 block contains no movement command, type C cancellation is performed (see <3> Type C below). <3> Type C When G41.2, G42.2, or G40 is specified as shown below, a linear block specifying movement by the amou...

  • Page 944

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 906 - - Operation during compensation Operations such as change of the offset direction and offset value, retention of a vector, and interference checks are performed in the same way as for cutter compensation. However, G39 (corner roundi...

  • Page 945

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 907 - <2> When the tool moves at a corner, the feedrate of the previous block is used if the corner is positioned before a single-block stop point; if the corner is after a single-block stop point, the feedrate of the next block is us...

  • Page 946

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 908 - - Interference check when the compensation plane changes An interference check is made when the compensation plane (a plane perpendicular to the tool vector) has changed. Example: If the following program is executed, an alarm PS0041...

  • Page 947

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 909 - Y Z VaVb46° 45° Va: Tool vector when A=-46 Vb: Tool vector when A=45 A: End point of N3 B: End point of N4 C: End point of N6 A B C Fig. 22.5.1.1 (k) Tool vector e3 e2 A’ C’ B’ V1V2A’: Point A projected onto the com...

  • Page 948

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 910 - Ua: Vector AB Ub: Vector BC Va: Tool vector between A and B Vb: Tool vector between B and C Wa: Va × Ua Wb: Vb × Ub (Here, × represents an outer product operator.) Y Z VaVbA B C X WaWbUa Ub Fig. 22.5.1.1 (m) Conceptual diagram A...

  • Page 949

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 911 - (3) The path angle difference in the compensation plane is large. (Ra,Rb) < 0 <2> Suppressing the issue of the alarm with a Q command By inserting a Q command into a block that resulted in the alarm, the issue of the alar...

  • Page 950

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 912 - (3) Q3 command By inserting a Q3 command, the issue of the alarm can be suppressed. Example: N4 Y-200 Z-200 Q3 The two vectors (V1 and V2) are not deleted. e3 e2 A’ C’ B’ V1V2 Fig. 22.5.1.1 (q) Q3 command - Others When th...

  • Page 951

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 913 - - Angle of the rotary axis for type 2 (when the movement range is not specified) When the direction of the tool is specified by I, J, K, Q for type 2, more than two pairs of "computed angles" of the rotary axes usually exis...

  • Page 952

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 914 - The process of judging whether the moving angle is smaller or larger as the output judgement condition is called "movement judgement." When bit 5 (PRI) of parameter No.19608 is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotar...

  • Page 953

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 915 - When the PA angle is (*1): The output angle is: (A θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees; B φ2 degrees). Namely, θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees is adopted that is nearer to the computed angle of A, and φ2, which is the same group as θ2, is a...

  • Page 954

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 916 - <1> When the current rotary axis angles are (B -70 degrees; C 30 degrees) The "output angles" are (B -90 degrees; C 0 degree). 0 degree is adopted because it is nearer to the current position (30 degrees) of the C-a...

  • Page 955

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 917 - • BC type tool axis ZXYZC Fig. 22.5.1.1 (v) BC type tool axis Z When the current rotary axis angles are (B 45 degrees; C 90 degrees), the "output angles" are (B 0 degree; C 90 degrees).

  • Page 956

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 918 - - Angle of the rotary axis for type 2 (when the movement range is specified) If the upper and lower limits of the movement range of the rotary axis is specified using parameters No.19741 to No.19744, the rotary axis will move only wi...

  • Page 957

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 919 - When bit 5 (PRI) of parameter No.19608 is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotary axis and second rotary axis are made in reverse order. CAUTION 1 If the lower limit of the movement range is larger than the upper limit, alar...

  • Page 958

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 920 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees360 × N degrees• Computed angle BCurrent position BMovement range Bφ2 + 360 × Nφ1 + 360 × Nφ1 + 360 × (N - 1)φ2 + 360 × (N + 1) Fig. 22.5.1.1 (y) Computed angle of rotary axis B and its current posit...

  • Page 959

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 921 - 22.5.1.2 Leading edge offset Overview Leading edge offset is a type of cutter compensation used when a workpiece is machined with the edge of a tool. The tool is automatically shifted by the amount of cutter compensation on the line...

  • Page 960

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 922 - Explanation - Operation at startup and cancellation The operation performed at leading edge offset startup and cancellation does not vary. When G41.3 is specified, the tool is moved by the amount of compensation (Vc) in the plane fo...

  • Page 961

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 923 - - Operation during compensation The tool center moves so that a compensation vector (VC) perpendicular to the tool vector (VT) is created in the plane formed by the tool vector (VT) at the end point of each block and the movement vec...

  • Page 962

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 924 - - Block immediately before the offset cancel command (G40) In the block immediately before the offset cancel command (G40), a compensation vector is created from the movement vector of that block and the tool vector at the end point ...

  • Page 963

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 925 - - Compensation performed when θ is approximately 0°, 90°, or 180° When the included angle θ between VMn+1 and VTn is regarded as 0°, 180°, or 90°, the compensation vector is created in a different way. So, when creating a pr...

  • Page 964

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 926 - <2> Compensation vector when θ is regarded as 0° or 180° At startup (when G41.3 is specified), alarm PS5408 is issued. This means that the tool vector of a block and the movement vector of the next block must not point in ...

  • Page 965

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 927 - 22.5.1.3 Tool tip position (cutting point) command Overview For machines having a rotary axis for rotating a tool, this function performs 3-dimensional cutter compensation at the tool tip position if a programmed point is specified w...

  • Page 966

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 928 - Explanation - Operation explanation This function calculates a vector at the tool tip position for the 3-dimensional cutter compensation function as described below. (1) Convert the programmed coordinates from a programmed point (pi...

  • Page 967

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 929 - - Operation example For a machine configuration in which the tool axis direction is along the Z-axis and the rotary axes are the B and C axes (Fig. 22.5.1.3 (b)) LC: Parameter (No. 19632) specifying the distance from the programmed p...

  • Page 968

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 930 - NOTE 1 This function is disabled for leading edge offset. 2 With a command for a rotary axis only, this function does not calculate a cutter compensation vector. 3 This function cannot be used in the three-dimensional coordinate sys...

  • Page 969

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 931 - 22.5.2 Cutter Compensation in Table Rotation Type Machine Overview Cutter compensation can be performed for a 5-axis machine having a rotary table as shown in Fig. 22.5.2 (a). Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has table rotation a...

  • Page 970

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 932 - Format - Startup (start of cutter compensation) (type 1) When bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No. 19607 is 0 G41.2 (or G42.2) IP_ D_ ; G41.2: Cutter compensation left (group 07) G42.2: Cutter compensation right (group 07) IP_: Value specif...

  • Page 971

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 933 - - Startup (start of cutter compensation) (type 2) G41.6(or G42.6) IP_ D_ Q_ ; IP_ I_ J_ K_ ; : G41.6: Cutter compensation left (group 07) G42.6: Cutter compensation right (group 07) IP_: Value specified for axis moving as viewed ...

  • Page 972

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 934 - - Canceling the cutter compensation G40 IP_ ; G40: Cutter compensation cancellation (group 07) IP_: Value specified for axis movement - Selecting an offset plane When bit 1 (PTD) of parameter No. 19746 is 1, compensation is perfor...

  • Page 973

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 935 - Explanation - Tool's angle of gradient in type 2 For type 2 of 3-dimensional cutter compensation, the tool's angle of gradient can be specified with address Q in a G41.6/G42.6 command block. The tool's angle of gradient refers to th...

  • Page 974

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 936 - - Startup When cutter compensation for the rotary table is specified (G41.2 or G42.2, G41.4 or G42.4, a dimension word other than 0 in the offset plane, or a D code other than D0) in the offset cancel mode, the CNC enters the offset ...

  • Page 975

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 937 - - If selecting the table coordinate system as a programming coordinate system If bit 4 (TBP) of parameter No. 19746 is 1 and bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No. 19696 is 0, specifying 3-dimensional cutter compensation causes the table coord...

  • Page 976

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 938 - NOTE 2 When table rotation axis movement is specified in the start block of 3-dimensional cutter compensation, after the movement is completed, the workpiece coordinate system is fixed to the table and assumed to be a table coordinate...

  • Page 977

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 939 - 22.5.3 Cutter Compensation in Composite Type Machine Overview This function can perform 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a 5-axis machine having a rotary table and a tool axis as shown in Fig. 22.5.3 (a). Shown below is a 5-axis ...

  • Page 978

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 940 - Format - Startup (start of cutter compensation) (type 1) When bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No. 19607 is 0 G41.2 (or G42.2) IP_ D_ ; G41.2: Cutter compensation left (group 07) G42.2: Cutter compensation right (group 07) IP_: Value specif...

  • Page 979

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 941 - For type 2, do not specify a rotation axis but specify the direction at the tool end point as viewed from the programming coordinate system (table coordinate system), with I, J, and K. Specifying a rotation axis causes alarm PS5460 t...

  • Page 980

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 942 - Explanation - Tool's angle of gradient in type 2 For type 2 of 3-dimensional cutter compensation, the tool's angle of gradient can be specified with address Q in a G41.6/G42.6 command block. The tool's angle of gradient refers to th...

  • Page 981

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 943 - - Startup When 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a composite type machine (G41.2 or G42.2, G41.5 or G42.5, or a D code other than D0) is specified in the offset cancel mode, the CNC enters the offset mode. Startup is specified wit...

  • Page 982

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 944 - - If selecting the table coordinate system as a programming coordinate system If bit 4 (TBP) of parameter No.19746 is 1 and bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.19696 is 0, specifying 3-dimensional cutter compensation causes the table coordin...

  • Page 983

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 945 - NOTE 2 When table rotation axis movement is specified in the start block of 3-dimensional cutter compensation, after the movement is completed, the workpiece coordinate system is fixed to the table and assumed to be a table coordinate...

  • Page 984

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 946 - 22.5.4 Interference Check and Interference Avoidance Overview By setting bit 1 (NI5) of parameter No. 19608 to 1, this function performs an interference check on the plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to the tool axis direction...

  • Page 985

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 947 - - For a composite type machine An interference check is performed, as well as interference avoidance, with the tool path as projected from the workpiece coordinate system (X-Y-Z) onto the table coordinate system (X'-Y'-Z') and then o...

  • Page 986

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 948 - Fig. 22.4.4(d) shows a tool path in the workpiece coordinate system as projected onto the compensation plane. This is an example when the parameter No.19626 is set to 4. At the start of the execution of the N10 block, the system loo...

  • Page 987

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 949 - - If interference avoidance is not possible If there are three consecutive interfering blocks, no interference vector can be generated. Example 1 in which interference avoidance is not possible V40-1V40-2V10-1V10-2 V20V30N10N20N3...

  • Page 988

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 950 - 22.5.5 Restrictions 22.5.5.1 Restrictions common to machine configurations - Corner rounding (G39) In the mode for 3-dimensional cutter compensation, G39 cannot be specified. Specifying G39 causes an alarm. - Reset Whenever a re...

  • Page 989

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 951 - - Unavailable commands In the mode for 3-dimensional cutter compensation, the functions listed below cannot be specified. Specifying any of these functions results in an alarm. • Hypothetical axis interpolation.......................

  • Page 990

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 952 - - Unavailable functions If the following function is specified in the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode, a warning message is issued: • MDI interruption If one of the following functions is specified in the 3-dimensional cutt...

  • Page 991

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 953 - 22.5.5.2 Restriction on tool rotation type - Unavailable commands (leading edge offset) In the G41.3 mode, the following commands cannot be specified: - G functions of group 01 other than G00 and G01 - Use with tool center point c...

  • Page 992

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 954 - 22.5.5.3 Restriction on machine configurations having table rotation axes (table rotation type and composite type) - Unavailable commands For machines having table rotation axes, the following commands cannot be specified during 3-d...

  • Page 993

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 955 - If the setting of the programming coordinate system differs between 3-dimensional cutter compensation and tool center point control, specifying both functions together results in alarm PS5460. (See the following table:) TBP=0 TBP=1 ...

  • Page 994

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 956 - Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation If the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode is entered, look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is automatically enabled. Set the look-ahead accelerati...

  • Page 995

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 957 - Modal G codes that allow specification of 3-dimensional cutter compensation When the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, 3-dimensional cutter compensation can be specified in the modal G code states...

  • Page 996

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 958 - 22.5.6 Examples O100 is a sample program. This is an example in which each side of a square is cut at an angle of 30 degrees on the B-axis in a composite type machine. Programs 1 to 3 all perform the same machining. Program 1: Type ...

  • Page 997

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 959 - Program 3: When the type 2 is used: (The table coordinate system is selected as a programming coordinate system) O100(Sample Program3); N10 G55 ; Preparations for the programming coordinate systemN20 G90 X0 Y0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Mov...

  • Page 998

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 960 - Fig. 22.5.6 (b) shows the attitudes of the workpiece (object to be machined) and the tool head (relative to the workpiece (object to be machined)) as viewed in the positive Z direction of the programming coordinate system fixed to th...

  • Page 999

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 961 - Exploded view of each block Operation at control point (machine coordinate values) Block N70 (C 45.0) (C 135.0)(C 135.0) X'Y'Block N60 Y"X"Y"X"(C 225.0)X'Y'X'Y' : T...

  • Page 1000

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 962 - Block N90 X'Y'Block N80 Y"X"Y"X"X'Y'(C 225.0) (C 315.0)(C 315.0) (C 405.0) Fig. 22.5.6 (d) Exploded View of Each Block (2)

  • Page 1001

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 963 - 23 MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION Chapter 23, "MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 23.1 OVERVIEW...........................................................................964 23.2 WAITING FUNCT...

  • Page 1002

    23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 964 - 23.1 OVERVIEW The multi-path control function is designed to enable 10 independent simultaneous machining with up to 10 paths (10-path control). This function is applicable to lathes and automatic lathes which perform cutting simu...

  • Page 1003

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 965 - Example) For a system with four paths Program folder for path1Program folder for path2Program folder for path3Path 1programanalysisPath 2programanalysisPath 3programanalysisPath 1positioncontrolPath 2positioncontrolPath 3positionco...

  • Page 1004

    23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 966 - 23.2 WAITING FUNCTION FOR PATHS Overview Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. When an M code for waiting is specified in a block for one path during automatic operation, the ot...

  • Page 1005

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 967 - - Waiting specified with binary values When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0, the value specified at address P is assumed to be obtained using binary values. The following table lists the path numbers and correspondin...

  • Page 1006

    23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 968 - All of the three paths can be made to wait for one another by specifying P7 together with an M code for waiting. To make all of paths 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 wait for one another, the P value is obtained as follows: Binary value of path ...

  • Page 1007

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 969 - - Waiting for path 10 To make path 10 and another path wait for each other, specify a value of 0 for the combination. If a number begins with 0, 0 cannot be recognized. Specify 0 in the second or subsequent digit from the left. In...

  • Page 1008

    23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 970 - <3> M103 P7; (making paths 1, 2, and 3 wait for one another) In this example, paths 1 and 2 wait for processing on path 3 to terminate. Because the waiting ignore signal for path 2 is set to 1, however, path 2 does not wait...

  • Page 1009

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 971 - CAUTION 1 An M code for waiting must always be specified in a single block. 2 Unlike other M codes, the M code for waiting is not output to the PMC. 3 If the operation of a single path is required, the M code for waiting need not ...

  • Page 1010

    23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 972 - 23.3 COMMON MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH Overview In a multi-path system, this function enables data within the specified range to be accessed as data common to all paths. The data includes tool compensation memory and custom macro co...

  • Page 1011

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 973 - - Custom macro common variables All or part of custom macro common variables #100 to #149 (, #199, or #499) and #500 to #599 (or #999) can be used as common data by setting parameters No. 6036 (#100 to #149 (, #199, or #499)) and ...

  • Page 1012

    23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 974 - 23.4 SPINDLE CONTROL BETWEEN EACH PATH Overview This function allows a workpiece attached to one spindle to be machined simultaneously with two tool posts and each of two workpieces attached to each of two spindles to be machined s...

  • Page 1013

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 975 - 23.5 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE/SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL Overview In multi-path control, the synchronous control function, composite control function, and superimposed control function enable synchronous control, composite control, and supe...

  • Page 1014

    23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-63944EN/03 - 976 - • Synchronizes movement along an axis of one path with that along another axis of the same path. Example) Synchronizing movement along the Z1 (master) and B1 (slave) axes (in the case of turning) B1 (Synchronized withmovement al...

  • Page 1015

    B-63944EN/03 PROGRAMMING 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - 977 - - Superimposed control • Provides a move command of an axis for a different axis in another path. Example) Providing the Z2 (slave) axis with a move command specified for the Z1 (master) axis (in the case of turning) Machining ac...

  • Page 1016

  • Page 1017

    III. OPERATION

  • Page 1018

  • Page 1019

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 981 - 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION..........................................................982 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERATION ..........................................

  • Page 1020

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 982 - 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION Explanation - Manual reference position return The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machine position. This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set. Ordina...

  • Page 1021

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 983 - - The tool movement by manual operation Using machine operator's panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along each axis. ToolWorkpieceMachine operator's panelManual pulsegenerator Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by manua...

  • Page 1022

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 984 - 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERATION Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the created program. It includes memory, MDI and DNC operations. (See Section III-4). Program Tool 01000 ; M S T ; G92 X ; G00 ; G01 ...

  • Page 1023

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 985 - - MDI operation After the program is entered, as an command group, from the MDI keyboard, the machine can be run according to the program. This operation is called MDI operation. CNC MDI keyboardMachineManual programinput Fig. 1.2 (c) MDI operation -...

  • Page 1024

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 986 - 1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Explanation - Program selection Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece. If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program num...

  • Page 1025

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 987 - - Handle interruption While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating the manual handle. (See Section III-4.4) ZX Programmed depth of cut Tool position after handle interruption Tool position durin...

  • Page 1026

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 988 - 1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the posi...

  • Page 1027

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 989 - - Single block When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one operation then stops. By pressing the cycle start again, the tool executes the next operation then stops. The program is checked in this manner. (See Section III-5.5) ToolC...

  • Page 1028

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 990 - 1.5 EDITING A PROGRAM After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the MDI panel (See Section III-10). This operation can be executed using the program edit function.

  • Page 1029

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 991 - 1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal memory by key operation on the MDI screen (See III-12). Data settingData displayScreen KeysMDICNC memory Fig. 1.6 (a) Displaying and setting data Explanat...

  • Page 1030

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 992 - Machinedshape2nd tool path1st tool pathOffset value of the 1st toolOffset value of the 2nd tool Fig. 1.6 (c) Offset value - Displaying and setting operator's setting data Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator in operation. Th...

  • Page 1031

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 993 - - Displaying and setting parameters The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in characteristics of various machines. For example, CNC can specify the following: - Rapid traverse rate of each axis - Whether increment system is based on m...

  • Page 1032

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 994 - 1.7 DISPLAY 1.7.1 Program Display The contents of the currently active program are displayed. (See Section III-12.2.1) Fig. 1.7.1 (a) A list of the programs held in the currently selected folder is displayed. Fig. 1.7.1 (b) Running sequence num...

  • Page 1033

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 995 - 1.7.2 Current Position Display The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. Moreover, the distance from the current position to a target point can be displayed as a remaining travel distance. (See Section III-12.1.1, 12.1.2,...

  • Page 1034

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 996 - 1.7.3 Alarm Display When a trouble occurs during operation, error code and alarm message are displayed on the screen. (See Section III-7.1.) See APPENDIX G for the list of error codes and their meanings. Fig. 1.7.3 (a) 1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run...

  • Page 1035

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 997 - 1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE MONOCHROME LCD The brightness of the monochrome LCD can be adjusted. - Procedure To adjust the brightness of the monochrome LCD, follow the procedure below on the SETTING (HANDY) screen. 1 Press function key . 2...

  • Page 1036

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 998 - 2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES As operational devices, setting and display devices attached to the CNC, and machine operator's panels are available. For machine operator's panels, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. Chapter 2, &...

  • Page 1037

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 999 - 2.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.8 of Part III. 7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel .................................................. III-2.1.1 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel ......

  • Page 1038

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1000 - 2.1.1 7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel 2.1.2 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel

  • Page 1039

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1001 - 2.1.3 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel 2.1.4 12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel

  • Page 1040

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1002 - 2.1.5 15" LCD CNC Display Panel

  • Page 1041

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1003 - 2.1.6 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) Unit with machining center system Reset keyHelp keyAddress/numeric keysEdit keysCancel (CAN) keyInput keyShift keyPage change keys(Page key)Cursor keysFunction keysAUX keyUppercase/lowercaseswitch keyCTRL ke...

  • Page 1042

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1004 - 2.1.7 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key) Address keys Reset key Help key Uppercase/lowercase switch key Shift key AUX key CTRL key ALT key TAB key Page change keys (Page key) Cursor keys Function keys Input key Cancel (CAN) key Edit keys Numeric...

  • Page 1043

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1005 - 2.1.8 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key) Unit with machining center system Reset key Help key Shift key Page change keys (Page key) Cursor keys Function keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key Input key Address/numeric keys Unit with lathe system Reset key...

  • Page 1044

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1006 - 2.2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES Table 2.2 (a) Explanation of the MDI keyboard Number Name Explanation 1 RESET key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc. 2 HELP key Press this key to use the help function when uncertain about th...

  • Page 1045

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1007 - Table 2.2 (a) Explanation of the MDI keyboard Number Name Explanation 11 Page change keys (Page keys) Two kinds of page change keys are described below. 12 Uppercase/lowercase switch key Press this key to switch between uppercase and low...

  • Page 1046

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1008 - - Key operation with multi-path control In the multi-path control, be sure to select the tool post for which data is specified, using the path selection switch on the machine operator's panel. Then, perform keyboard operation, such as displa...

  • Page 1047

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1009 - 2.3 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to ...

  • Page 1048

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1010 - 2.3.1 General Screen Operations - Procedure 1 By pressing a function key on the MDI panel, the chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function are displayed. Example 1) 2 When one of the chapter selection soft keys is pressed,...

  • Page 1049

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1011 - - Button design change depending on soft key state The soft keys assume one of the following states, depending on the selection target: • Chapter selection soft keys • Operation selection soft keys • Auxiliary menu of operation selecti...

  • Page 1050

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1012 - 2.3.2 Function Keys Function keys are provided to select the type of screen to be displayed. The following function keys are provided on the MDI panel: Press this key to display the position screen. Press this key to display the program ...

  • Page 1051

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1013 - 2.3.3 Soft Keys By pressing a soft key after a function key, the corresponding screen of the function can be displayed. The chapter selection soft keys of each function are described below. The horizontal four keys on the right-hand side ar...

  • Page 1052

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1014 - Position display screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT)Page 1 +(1)(2)(3)(4) (5) MONI 3-D MANUAL (OPRT)Page 2 +(6)(7)(8)(9) (10) ...

  • Page 1053

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1015 - Program screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. PROGRAMFOLDERNEXT CHECK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1)(2)(3)(4) (5) TIME JOG RSTR (OPRT) Page 2 +(6)(7)(8)(9) (10) Ta...

  • Page 1054

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1016 - Offset/setting screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. OFFSETSETTINGWORK (OPRT)Page 1 +(1)(2)(3)(4) (5) MACRO OPR TOOL MANAGER (OPRT)Page 2 +(6)(7)(8)(9) (...

  • Page 1055

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1017 - Table 2.3.3 (c) Offset No. Chapter menuDescription (1) OFFSET Selects the screen for setting tool offset values. (2) SETTING Selects the screen for setting the setting parameters. (3) WORK Selects the screen for setting a workpiece coordina...

  • Page 1056

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1018 - System screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. PARAM DGNOSSERVO GUIDEMSYSTEM (OPRT) Page 1 +(1)(2)(3)(4) (5) MEMORYPITCH SERVO PARAMSP.SET (OPRT) Page 2 +(6...

  • Page 1057

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1019 - M CODE 3D ERR COMP (OPRT) Page 8 +(36)(37)(38)(39) (40) (OPRT) Page 9 +(41)(42)(43)(44) (45) DUAL CHECKR.TIMEMACRO (OPRT) Page 10 +(46)(47)(48)(49) (50) Table 2.3.3 (d) System No. Chapter menuDescription (1) PARAM Selects ...

  • Page 1058

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1020 - No. Chapter menuDescription (24) W.DGNS Selects the screen for displaying data such as servo positional deviation values, torque values, machine signals, and so forth as graphs. (27) FSSB Selects the screen for making settings related to the ...

  • Page 1059

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1021 - Message screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. ALARMMSG HISTRYMSGHIS (OPRT) Page 1 +(1)(2)(3)(4) (5) EMBED LOG PCMCIALOG BOARDLOG (OPRT) Page 2 +(6) (7) ...

  • Page 1060

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1022 - Graphic screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. When the graphic display function is enabled: PARAM GRAPH (OPRT) Page 1 +(1)(2)(3)(4) (5) Table 2.3.3 (f...

  • Page 1061

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1023 - 2.3.4 Key Input and Input Buffer When an address and a numeric key are pressed, the character corresponding to that key is input once into the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the screen. I...

  • Page 1062

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1024 - - Switching between uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters When entering alphabetic characters, the user can switch between uppercase and lowercase. By pressing the uppercase/lowercase switch key , the display of the key input buffer ...

  • Page 1063

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1025 - 2.4 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES External I/O devices such as a memory card are available. By using an external I/O device such as a memory card, the following data can be input or output: 1. Programs 2. Offset data 3. Parameters 4. Custom macro co...

  • Page 1064

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1026 - I/O CHANNELor foreground inputSet channels to be usedfor data input/output.I/O CHANNEL (0 to 5)=0 : Channel 1=1 : Channel 1=2 : Channel 2=3 : Channel 3:::Input/output to and from the memorycard interface, etc. is also possible.When IO4 is...

  • Page 1065

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 1027 - 2.5 POWER ON/OFF 2.5.1 Turning on the Power Procedure of turning on the power Procedure 1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.) 2 Turn on the power acc...

  • Page 1066

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1028 - 2.5.2 Power Disconnection Procedure of power disconnection Procedure 1 Check that the LED indicating the cycle start is off on the operator's panel. 2 Check that all movable parts of the CNC machine tool is stopping. 3 If an external input/...

  • Page 1067

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1029 - 3 MANUAL OPERATION MANUAL OPERATION are twelve kinds as follows : 3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN...................1030 3.2 JOG FEED (JOG)...................................................................1032 3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED..........

  • Page 1068

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1030 - 3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN The tool is returned to the reference position as follows : The tool is moved in the direction specified in bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No.1006 for each axis with the reference position return switch on the ma...

  • Page 1069

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1031 - Explanation - Automatically setting the coordinate system Bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No.1201 is used for automatically setting the coordinate system. When ZPR is set, the coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference positio...

  • Page 1070

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1032 - 3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) In the jog mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator's panel continuously moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction. The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter ...

  • Page 1071

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1033 - Explanation - Manual per revolution feed The manual per revolution feed is enabled for jog feed by setting bit 4 (JRV) of parameter No.1402. During the manual per revolution feed, the tool is jogged at the feedrate that is obtained by multiplyi...

  • Page 1072

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1034 - 3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator's panel moves the tool one step along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance the tool is...

  • Page 1073

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1035 - Explanation - Travel distance specified with a diameter T The distance the tool travels along the X-axis can be specified with a diameter.

  • Page 1074

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1036 - 3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the machine operator's panel. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection switches. ...

  • Page 1075

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1037 - Explanation - Availability of manual pulse generator in Jog mode (JHD) Bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No.7100 enables or disables the manual handle feed in the JOG mode. When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No.7100 is set 1,both manual handle feed and incr...

  • Page 1076

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1038 - n ≥ m: Amount A+B, shown in figure, which’s value is multiple of m and small than n. As a result, clamping is performed as an integral multiple of the selected magnification. nmABPulses over (k⋅m) will be ignoredA: Amount of pulses the...

  • Page 1077

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1039 - NOTE Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations per second or lower. If the manual pulse generator is rotated at a rate higher than five rotations per second, the tool may not stop immediately after the handle is no longer ro...

  • Page 1078

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1040 - 3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the machine operator's panel. When the switch is turned on,...

  • Page 1079

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1041 - Explanation The following describes the relation between manual operation and coordinates when the manual absolute switch is turned on or off, using a program example. G01G90 X100.0Y100.0F010 ;<1>X200.0Y150.0 ;<2>X300.0Y200.0;<3&g...

  • Page 1080

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1042 - - When reset after a manual operation following a feed hold Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block <2> is being executed, manual operation (Y-axis +75.0) is performed, the control unit is reset with the RESET button,...

  • Page 1081

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1043 - - Manual operation during cutter or tool nose radius compensation • When the switch is OFF After manual operation is performed with the switch OFF during cutter or tool nose radius compensation, automatic operation is restarted then the tool...

  • Page 1082

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1044 - • Manual operation during cornering This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2', VB1', and VB2' are vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calcu...

  • Page 1083

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1045 -

  • Page 1084

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1046 - 3.6 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations are possible along with the conventional feed operation with simultaneous single-axis control (for X, Y, Z, or other axis). • ...

  • Page 1085

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1047 - Explanations Procedure 1 For manual handle feed, select the manual handle feed mode. For jog feed, select the jog feed mode. 2 For manual handle feed, use the handle feed axis selection switch to select the feed axis (simultaneous 1-axis feed i...

  • Page 1086

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1048 - - Manual handle feed In manual handle feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, or Nth-axis), along a rotated straight line (linear feed), or along a circle (circular feed). (1) Feed along a specified axis (si...

  • Page 1087

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1049 - (3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2-axis control) A single manual handle operation can move the tool from the current position along a concentric circle that has the same center as a specified circle on a simultaneous 2-axis control basis. This ...

  • Page 1088

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1050 - - Jog feed In jog feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, etc.), along a rotated straight line (linear feed), or along a circle (circular feed). (1) Feed along a specified axis (simultaneous 1-axis control) ...

  • Page 1089

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1051 - Limitations - Mirror image The mirror image function is not available during the manual operation. (The manual operation can be executed when the mirror image switch is off and the mirror image setting is off.) NOTE If the tool is operated w...

  • Page 1090

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1052 - 3.7 RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode and move the tapping axis with a manual handle. For rigid tapping, refer to Section 4.4 in Part II of the User's Manual (T series) or...

  • Page 1091

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1053 - Explanation - Manual rigid tapping Manual rigid tapping is enabled by parameter HRG (No. 5203#0) to 1. - Cancellation of rigid mode To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping. When the reset key is pressed, rigid mode...

  • Page 1092

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1054 - - Acceleration/deceleration type When manual rigid tapping is executed, the acceleration/deceleration type and acceleration/deceleration time constant set in the rigid tapping parameters are valid. The same settings are valid also for extractio...

  • Page 1093

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1055 - 3.8 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND The manual numerical command function allows data programmed through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is ready for jog feed, a manual numerical command can be executed. The following eight f...

  • Page 1094

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1056 - Fig. 3.8 (a) Manual numerical command screen The remaining portion of the axis information currently not shown on the screen can be displayed by pressing the or key. NOTE 1 The actual feedrate (F) and the actual spindle speed (S) are displ...

  • Page 1095

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1057 - 4 Enter the required commands by using address keys and numeric keys on the MDI panel, then press soft key [INPUT] or the key to set the entered data. Fig. 3.8 (b) Example of inputting numerical value The following data can be set: 1. G00: ....

  • Page 1096

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1058 - 6 Upon the completion of execution, the "MSTR" status indication is cleared from the screen, and automatic operation signal STL is turned off. The set data is cleared entirely. G codes are set to G00 or G01 according to the setting of ...

  • Page 1097

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1059 - NOTE Since the feedrate is always set to the dry run feedrate, regardless of the setting of the dry run switch, the feedrate cannot be specified using F. The feedrate is clamped such that the maximum cutting feedrate, set in parameter No. 1430,...

  • Page 1098

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1060 - - M codes (Auxiliary functions) After address M, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of digits specified by parameter No. 3030. When M98 or M99 is specified, it is executed but not output to the PMC. NOTE Neither subprogram cal...

  • Page 1099

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1061 - (2) Commands can be typed successively. (3) Key entry is disabled during execution. If soft key [INPUT] or the key on the MDI panel is pressed during execution, an "EXECUTION/MODE SWITCHING IN PROGRESS" warning is output. (4) If inpu...

  • Page 1100

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1062 - - Modal information Modal G codes and addresses used in automatic operation or MDI operation are not affected by the execution of commands specified using the manual numerical command function. - Jog feed When the tool is moved along an axis ...

  • Page 1101

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1063 - - Indexing of the index table and chopping Commands cannot be specified for an axis along which operation is being performed during indexing or chopping. If such an axis is specified for execution, a "THIS COMMAND CAN NOT EXECUTE" war...

  • Page 1102

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1064 - 3.9 THREE-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED This function enables the use of the following functions. • Three-dimensional manual feed - Tool axis direction handle feed/tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction incremental feed - Tool axis right...

  • Page 1103

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1065 - 3.9.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis Direction JOG Feed / Tool Axis Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the tool axis direction handle feed, tool axis direction JOG feed, and tool axis direction incremental feed, the tool or tab...

  • Page 1104

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1066 - Amount of movement When the manual pulse generator is rotated, the tool is moved in the tool axis direction by the amount of rotation. Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamped so that the speed of each moving axis dose not exceed the manua...

  • Page 1105

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1067 - 3.9.2 Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction JOG Feed / Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool axis direction JOG feed, or tool a...

  • Page 1106

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1068 - (Example) When the tool rotation axes are B-axis and C-axis and the tool axis direction is the Z-axis direction C BZY XTool axis right-angle direction 2 Tool axis direction BCTool axis right-angle direction 1 YX Z BC - Latitude and longitude ...

  • Page 1107

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1069 - If 0 is set in parameter No. 12321, the normal axis direction is set to the reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697). If a value other than 0 to 3 is specified in parameter No. 12321, alarm PS5459 is issued. - To...

  • Page 1108

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1070 - Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamped so that the speed of each moving axis dose not exceed the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424). Handle pulses generated while the clamp feedrate is exceeded are ignored. - Tool axis right-an...

  • Page 1109

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1071 - 3.9.3 Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed / Tool Tip Center Rotation JOG Feed / Tool Tip Center Rotation Incremental Feed Overview In the tool tip center rotation handle feed, tool tip center rotation JOG feed, and tool tip center rotation inc...

  • Page 1110

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1072 - - Tool tip center rotation handle feed The tool tip center rotation handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> The tool tip center rotation feed mode signal (RNDH) is s...

  • Page 1111

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1073 - Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamped so that the synthetic speed of the linear axes (in the tangential direction) does not exceed the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424) (of any moving linear axis). The feedrate is also clamped ...

  • Page 1112

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1074 - 3.9.4 Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed / Table Vertical Direction JOG Feed / Table Vertical Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the table vertical direction handle feed, table vertical direction JOG feed, and table vertical direction inc...

  • Page 1113

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1075 - Amount of movement When the manual pulse generator is rotated, the tool is moved in the table vertical direction by the amount of rotation. Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamped so that the speed of each moving axis dose not exceed the m...

  • Page 1114

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1076 - 3.9.5 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed / Table Horizontal Direction JOG Feed / Table Horizontal Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the table horizontal direction handle feed, table horizontal direction JOG feed, and table horizontal d...

  • Page 1115

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1077 - (Example) When the table rotation axis is the B-axis, and the table vertical direction is the Z-axis direction B Z YXTable horizontal direction 2Table horizontal direction 1 X YZBBTable vertical direction - Latitude and longitude direction...

  • Page 1116

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1078 - If 0 is set in parameter No. 12321, the normal axis direction is set to the tool axis direction. If a value other than 0 to 3 is specified in parameter No. 12321, alarm PS5459 is issued. Table-based vertical direction: T Table-based horizontal ...

  • Page 1117

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1079 - - Table horizontal direction JOG feed/table horizontal direction incremental feed The table horizontal direction JOG feed or table horizontal direction incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: <1> JO...

  • Page 1118

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1080 - 3.10 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE Overview The interval of each reference marks of distance coded linear scale are variable. Accordingly, if the interval is determined, the absolute position can be determined. The CNC measures the inte...

  • Page 1119

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1081 - The timing chart for this procedures is given below. JOG ZRN +J1 Reference mark ZRF1 Feedrate FL rate FL rate FL rate Fig. 3.10.1 (a) Timing chart for reference position establishment - Procedure for establishing a reference position ...

  • Page 1120

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1082 - 3.10.2 Reference Position Return (1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved by turning the feed axis direction signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the reference position establishment procedure ...

  • Page 1121

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1083 - • In case of distance coded rotary encoder, only the measurement by three points or four points is possible. (bit 2 (DC2) of parameter No.1802 is disregarded as 0.) 3.10.4 Axis Synchronization Control Requirements when this function is used ...

  • Page 1122

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1084 - Scale end Reference mark (1)(2)(3)(a) (b) (c) Master axis Slave axis Start point End Point (Example of 3 points measurement system) In the above example, the following sequence is executed. a. When the reference mark (1) of the master axis is...

  • Page 1123

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1085 - 3.10.6 Angular Axis Control There are the following limitations when the angular axis control is used. (a) It is necessary to use the linear scale with the distance coded reference mark for both the perpendicular axis and the angular axis. (b)...

  • Page 1124

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1086 - NOTE When the detection unit is changed, parameters relating to the detection unit (such as the effective area and positional deviation limit) must also be changed accordingly. (4) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until two, three or ...

  • Page 1125

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1087 - 3.11 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL) Overview By using High-resolution serial output circuit for the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial), the CNC measures the interval of referenced mark by axis m...

  • Page 1126

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1088 - - Connection It is available under linear motor system and full closed system. CNC Servo Amp Separate Detector Interface Unit Table High Resolution Serial Output Circuit C Full Closed System Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (s...

  • Page 1127

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1089 - - Procedure for reference position establishment through manual operation (1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1". (2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,…) fo...

  • Page 1128

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1090 - - Establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position By following operation, establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position is performed. Moving through manual operation in REF mode Moving through a...

  • Page 1129

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1091 - - Angular axis control In case of using the angular axis control, please confirm the following items. • It is necessary to use the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) for both the perpendicular axis and the angular axi...

  • Page 1130

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1092 - CAUTION 1 When the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is used, please set bit 3 (SDCx) of parameter No.1818 to 1. 2 On the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial), the axis does not stop until three refe...

  • Page 1131

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1093 - 3.12 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE Overview In this function, the program can be executed both forward and backward with a manual handle (manual pulse generator) under automatic operation. Therefore, errors of a program, interference, and so on can be ...

  • Page 1132

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1094 - - Backward movement The "backward movement " is that the program executed forward once is executed backward by turning a manual handle in the negative direction. The program can be executed backward only for the block executed forward...

  • Page 1133

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1095 - Control with the manual handle The value of the parameter No.6410 and the scale factors decide the moving speed of the machine by one pulse generated by a manual handle. When a manual handle is turned, the actual movement speed of the machine...

  • Page 1134

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1096 - Forward movement and backward movement with a manual handle The program is executed forward when a manual handle is turned to the positive direction. And, the program is executed backward when a manual handle is turned to the negative direct...

  • Page 1135

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1097 - - G-code If G-code that changes modal information is commanded in backward movement, the modal information of previous block is executed. Example) N1G99; N2G01X_F_; N3X_Z_; N4G98; ..................... backward movement starts from this blo...

  • Page 1136

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1098 - - M-code If there is M-code in the same group is commanded in previous blocks, modal information of the M-code, commanded at the last in previous blocks, is output. If no M-code is commanded in previous blocks, the M-code set to the first param...

  • Page 1137

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1099 - Forward movementBackward movement N8M300; M300 M300 N9G4X1.; N10M200; M200 M204 (*1) N11G4X1.; N12M0; M0 M0 (*3) N13G4X1.; N14M102; M102 M104 (*2) N15G4X1.; Backward movement starts from this block M2; *1 No M-code in the same group is ...

  • Page 1138

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1100 - The timing of T-code output of N7 and N8 in O1000 shown in the example above is as follows. N6 N7 N8T33 output Forward movement : with T22 N6 N7N8 T22 output Backward movement (When parameter STO is set to “0”) : N6 N7N8 T33 output Bac...

  • Page 1139

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1101 - - Backward movement prohibition The backward movement prohibition is a state that the program cannot be executed from a certain block backward. In this state, the negative rotation of a manual handle is ignored, and the only positive rotation i...

  • Page 1140

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1102 - Fig. 3.12 (a) "M.H.RTR." status display Besides, when reverse movement prohibition signal MRVSP<Fn091.2> is set to "1", the "NO RVRS." is displayed. This status is displayed by blinking/reversing in the colo...

  • Page 1141

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1103 - This status is displayed by blinking/reversing in the color of color number 3 (INPUT KEY, O/N NO. and STATUS are the same color) . The screen display is shown as Fig.3.12(c). When the program is executed in the direction as the same as before b...

  • Page 1142

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1104 - - Movement command and M,S,T-code When M,S,T-codes and movement commands are in the same block, the timing outputting codes changes between in forward movement and backward movement. Therefore, M, S, T-codes should be commanded in backward move...

  • Page 1143

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1105 - - Threading in forward movement Threading (G32,G76,G84,G88,G92) is always executed at 100% override speed. That is to say, a pulse generated by a manual handle is ignored in executing a threading block. In thread cutting cycle, the pulse is inv...

  • Page 1144

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1106 - - ON/OFF of Manual Handle Retrace mode When check mode signal MMOD<Gn067.2> is set to "0" and handle available signal in checking mode MCHK<Gn067.3> is set to "0", the check mode might not be turned off at once. ...

  • Page 1145

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1107 - When bit 7 (MG4) of parameter No.6400 is set to "1" and the software option of multistage skip is enabled and the setting of parameter from No.6202 to No.6206 is enabled, the backward movement prohibition is enabled in G04 block for mu...

  • Page 1146

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1108 - 3.13 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT BLOCK REVERSE MOVEMENT FOR MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE Overview This function enables reverse movement during manual handle retrace even if a move command and an auxiliary function (M/S/T/B code) are specified in the sa...

  • Page 1147

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1109 - M command Mxxx Move command Code signals M00 to M31 Strobe signal MF Operation on PMC side Reverse movement enable output signal ADCO Finish signal FIN Distribution end signal DEN <3><4><5> Notes NOTE 1 When a...

  • Page 1148

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1110 - 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation. This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation: 4.1 MEMORY OPERATION......................................................

  • Page 1149

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1111 - 4.1 MEMORY OPERATION Programs are registered in memory in advance. When one of these programs is selected and the cycle start switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes on. Wh...

  • Page 1150

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1112 - Press the key on the MDI panel. Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered. When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops. Explanation - Memory operation After memory operation is start...

  • Page 1151

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1113 - - Feed hold When Feed Hold button on the operator's panel is pressed during memory operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time. - Reset Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state by using key ...

  • Page 1152

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1114 - 4.2 MDI OPERATION In the MDI mode, a program consisting of up to 511 characters can be created in the same format as normal programs and executed from the MDI panel. MDI operation is used for simple test operations. The following procedure i...

  • Page 1153

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1115 - 4 To entirely erase a program created in MDI mode, use one of the following methods: a. Enter address key, then press the key. b. Alternatively, press the key. In this case, set parameter MCL (No. 3203#7) to 1 in advance. 5 To execute a p...

  • Page 1154

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1116 - NOTE In the two cases above, program erasure can be prevented by setting bit 6 (MKP) of parameter No. 3204 to 1. • In MEM mode, if memory operation is performed. • In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed. • When the and keys are p...

  • Page 1155

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1117 - - Absolute/incremental command When bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1, the absolute/incremental programming of MDI operation does not depend on G90/G91. In this case, the incremental programming is set when bit 5 (ABS) of parame...

  • Page 1156

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1118 - 4.3 DNC OPERATION By activating automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program is being read in via reader/puncher interface. To use the DNC operation function, it...

  • Page 1157

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1119 - 3 Press the cycle start switch to execute the selected file. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. 4 During DNC operation, executed programs are listed on the program check screen and pro...

  • Page 1158

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1120 - NOTE 1 Before selecting a DNC operation file, be sure to release all schedule data. DNC operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time. 2 A DNC operation file cannot be released during DNC operation. 3 To switch betwee...

  • Page 1159

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1121 - 4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION To perform schedule operation, select files (programs) registered in a memory card and specify the sequence of execution and the repetition count of each program. Schedule operation Procedure 1 Press the REMOTE switch...

  • Page 1160

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1122 - • Editing a schedule To edit schedule data, press the soft key [SCHEDUL LIST] to display the schedule list screen, on which schedule data can be edited. [FILE UP] Moves the file at the cursor position up one line and moves the replace...

  • Page 1161

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1123 - NOTE 1 Before setting schedule operation, release DNC operation files in the MDI mode. DNC operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time. 2 Before starting schedule operation, confirm that schedule data is set correct...

  • Page 1162

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1124 - 4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) During memory operation, you can call and execute a subprogram registered in an external device (such as a Memory Card, Handy File, or Data Server) connected to the CNC. Format M198 Pxxxxxxxx Lyyyyyyyy ; ...

  • Page 1163

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1125 - Example) M198 P0123 L3; This command specifies that the subprogram having external subprogram number O0123 is to be called three times repeatedly. The subprogram is called from the main program and executed as follows: Main program Su...

  • Page 1164

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1126 - NOTE 4 An external device subprogram call cannot be performed from a subprogram called using another external device subprogram call. (An alarm (PS1080) is issued.) Main program (internal memory) M198 Sub program (External device) M198...

  • Page 1165

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1127 - 4.6 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION By rotating the manual pulse generator in the automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC operation, or memory operation) or in the memory editing mode, handle feed can be superimposed on movement by autom...

  • Page 1166

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1128 - Explanation - Interruption operation 1 When the handle interruption axis selection signal for a handle interruption axis is set to 1 in the automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC operation, or memory operation) or in the memory edi...

  • Page 1167

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1129 - - Manual handle interruption and coordinate system 1 The amount of manual handle interruption shifts the workpiece coordinate systems and the local coordinate system. So, the machine moves, but the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate sy...

  • Page 1168

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1130 - 3 In automatic reference position return (G28), the end point (reference position) is not affected by manual handle interruption. However, the midpoint is in the workpiece coordinate system, so that the position shifted by the amount of inte...

  • Page 1169

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1131 - • When a manual reference position return operation is performed (when G28 is specified before a reference position is established) • When a reference position is set without dogs • When the workpiece coordinate system is preset NOTE ...

  • Page 1170

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1132 - - Relation with other functions The following table indicates the relation between other functions and the movement by handle interruption. Table 4.6(a) Relation between other functions and the movement by handle interruption Signals Relati...

  • Page 1171

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1133 - (a) INPUT UNIT: Handle interruption move amount in input unit system Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least input increment. (b) OUTPUT UNIT : Handle interruption move amount in output unit s...

  • Page 1172

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1134 - 4.7 MIRROR IMAGE During automatic operation, the mirror image function can be used for movement along an axis. To use this function, set the mirror image switch to ON on the machine operator's panel, or set the mirror image setting to ON fro...

  • Page 1173

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1135 - 2-3 Press the [SETING] soft key for chapter selection to display the setting screen. Fig. 4.7 (b) Setting screen 2-4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1. 3 Enter an automatic operation mode (...

  • Page 1174

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1136 - 4.8 PROGRAM RESTART This function specifies Sequence No. of a block to be restarted when a tool is broken down or when it is desired to restart machining operation after a day off, and restarts the machining operation from that block. It ca...

  • Page 1175

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1137 - Procedure for program restart by specifying a sequence number Procedure 1 [P TYPE] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [Q TYPE] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop i...

  • Page 1176

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1138 - 5 The sequence number is searched for, and the program restart screen appears on the LCD display. Fig. 4.8 (a) Program restart screen DESTINATION shows the position at which machining is to restart. DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from...

  • Page 1177

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1139 - 8 Check that the distance indicated under DISTANCE TO GO is correct. Also check whether there is the possibility that the tool might hit a workpiece or other objects when it moves to the machining restart position. If such a possibility exi...

  • Page 1178

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1140 - 5 The block number is searched for, and the program restart screen appears on the LCD display. Fig. 4.8 (b) Program restart screen DESTINATION shows the position at which machining is to restart. DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from th...

  • Page 1179

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1141 - 8 Check that the distance indicated under DISTANCE TO GO is correct. Also check whether there is the possibility that the tool might hit a workpiece or other objects when it moves to the machining restart position. If such a possibility exi...

  • Page 1180

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1142 - Outputting all M codes and most recently specified S, T, and B codes When bit 6 (MOA) of parameter No. 7300 is set to 1, pressing the cycle start switch after searching for the block to be restarted automatically outputs all M codes and most...

  • Page 1181

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1143 - 2 Before the tool reaches the machining restart position, pressing soft key [OVERSTORE] selects the over store mode. In the over store mode, data can be entered in the M, S, T, and B fields displayed in the (OVERSTORE) section. To select the...

  • Page 1182

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1144 - CAUTION 1 The M, S, T, and B codes specified in the over store mode are not displayed on the program restart screen. 2 In the over store mode, changing the operation mode to other than the MEM or RMT mode does not cancel the over store mode....

  • Page 1183

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1145 - - Block number when a program is halted or stopped The program screen usually displays the number of the block currently being executed. When the execution of a block is completed, the CNC is reset, or the program is executed in single-bloc...

  • Page 1184

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1146 - - Manual intervention During movement to the restart point, manual intervention is allowed for an axis for which a return operation has not yet been performed. However, manual operations do not cause any movement along axes for which a retu...

  • Page 1185

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1147 - - Commands that prevent program restart Program restart cannot be performed for blocks placed in the following modes: • Cs contouring control • Polygon turning (G50.2) • Threading (G32,G33), Circular threading (G35,G36), Threading cycl...

  • Page 1186

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1148 - WARNING As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position under the following conditions. Special care must be taken in the following cases since none of them cause an alarm: - Manual operation is performed when the manual absol...

  • Page 1187

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1149 - 4.9 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can be returned to restart machining efficiently. Procedure for to...

  • Page 1188

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1150 - N30APoint EMachine operator's panel TOOL BEINGWITHDRAWN RETRACTION POSITION TOOL WITHDRAW TOOL RETURN During retraction, the screen displays PTRR and STRT. • PTRR blinks in the field for indicating states such as the program editing st...

  • Page 1189

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1151 - Procedure 4 - Return After withdrawing the tool and any additional operation such as replacing the tool, move the tool back to the previous retraction position. To return the tool to the retraction position, return the mode to automatic oper...

  • Page 1190

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1152 - Procedure 5 - Repositioning While the tool is at the retraction position (point E in the figure below) and the RETRACTION POSITION LED is on, press the cycle start switch. The tool is then repositioned at the point where retraction was start...

  • Page 1191

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1153 - 4.9.1 Retract Explanation - When no retraction distance is specified If no retraction distance or direction required for retraction are specified, retraction is not performed when the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the operator's panel is turned o...

  • Page 1192

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1154 - 4.9.2 Withdrawal Explanation - Axis selection To move the tool along an axis, select the corresponding axis selection signal. Never specify axis selection signals for two or more axes at a time. - Path memorization When the tool is moved...

  • Page 1193

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1155 - 4.9.4 Repositioning Explanation - Feed hold The feed hold function is disabled during repositioning. - Operation after completion of repositioning The operation after completion of repositioning depends on the automatic operation state pr...

  • Page 1194

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1156 - 4.9.5 Tool Retract and Recover for Threading Explanation - Differences between ordinary tool retract and recover and tool retract and recover for threading 1 During retraction, chamfering is performed between the specified retraction axis a...

  • Page 1195

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1157 - (1) When remaining travel distance for threading ≥ retraction distance d c 45° a b ARetraction positionRetraction distance When the position where 45-degree chamfering by the retraction distance ends does not exceed the threading end pos...

  • Page 1196

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1158 - 4 After retraction is completed, the next block that does not specify threading is executed and the tool stops. d c a b Retraction positionPoint E In this example, “X50.0” is specified in the first block that does not specify threading i...

  • Page 1197

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1159 - 4.9.6 Operation Procedure for a Canned Cycle for Drilling Explanation - Retract When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is turned on during a canned cycle for drilling (abbreviated as a canned cycle below), retraction is performed depending on the cy...

  • Page 1198

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1160 - - Repositioning When the tool is at the retraction position and the cycle start switch is pressed, repositioning is performed for the canned cycle. 1 Repositioning performed when the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is turned on during operation 1 After...

  • Page 1199

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1161 - 4.10 RETRACE M Overview The tool can retrace the path along which the tool has moved so far (reverse execution). Furthermore, the tool can move along the retraced path in the forward direction (forward reexecution). After forward reexecuti...

  • Page 1200

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1162 - Fig. 4.10 (b) When method 2) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts reverse execution from the position at which a single block stop takes place. Single block stop "REVERSE" switch = ON Cycle start Cycle start ...

  • Page 1201

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1163 - Cycle start (start of forward execution)Start of forward "REVERSE" switch = OFF reexecution Forward Reverse Forward reexecutionStart of reverse execution Fig. 4.10 (e) If functions for gas cutting machine are enabled, ho...

  • Page 1202

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1164 - - Reverse execution → end of reverse execution → forward reexecution When a block to be executed is no longer present during reverse execution (when reverse execution has been performed up to the block where forward execution started, or...

  • Page 1203

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1165 - Explanation - Reverse execution and forward execution Usually in automatic operation, a program is executed in the programmed order. This is called forward execution. This function allows a program executed by forward execution to be execu...

  • Page 1204

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1166 - - Reset A reset operation (the reset button on the MDI panel, the external reset signal, or the reset & rewind signal) clears the blocks stored for reverse execution. - Feedrate A feedrate to be applied during reverse execution can be ...

  • Page 1205

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1167 - - Start of reverse execution or forward reexecution after single block stop After a single block stop takes place, reverse execution or forward reexecution can be started immediately when the reverse execution signal status is changed and r...

  • Page 1206

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1168 - • Figure copying (G72.1,G72.2) • Chopping (G81.1) • Index table indexing • Cs contouring control • Spindle positioning - Manual intervention To execute a program in the reverse direction after a feed hold stop or single block stop...

  • Page 1207

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1169 - - Dwell command (G04) During reverse execution or forward reexecution, the dwell command (G04) is executed in the same way as in normal operation. - Programmable data input (G10) Tool compensation values, parameters, pitch error data, w...

  • Page 1208

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1170 - - Changing offsets Even when cutter compensation data or tool length offsets are changed during reverse execution or forward reexecution, the change in compensation or offset data does not become valid until forward reexecution ends and norm...

  • Page 1209

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1171 - - Tool retract and recover function For retract operation and repositioning operation by the tool retract and recover function, reverse execution cannot be performed. Retract operation and repositioning operation are ignored during reverse ...

  • Page 1210

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1172 - 4.11 ACTIVE BLOCK CANCEL FUNCTION The automatic operation can be stopped by inputting block cancellation signal BCAN<Gn297.0> while automatic operation. After an automatic operation becomes stop, automatic operation signal OP <Fn000...

  • Page 1211

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1173 - CAUTION 1 Because the tool becomes a start from the canceled position when an automatic operation restarts, the route of an actual movement is different from original program route. Therefore, there is a possibility that the tool route and t...

  • Page 1212

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1174 - Tool radius / tool nose radius compensation The offset mode is temporarily canceled at that time when canceling in the tool radius / tool nose radius compensation mode. And, the start-up operation is done at the restart. For example, when can...

  • Page 1213

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1175 - Canned cycle for drilling When a block is canceled during a canned cycle for drilling, that canned cycle is canceled. Program execution is restarted from the next block. Example1 N10 G91 G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ K3 ; N20 G90 G00 X_ Y_ Z_ ; Posit...

  • Page 1214

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1176 - Notes CAUTION 1 Please confirm neither the tool route nor work piece interference when the operation is restarted. 2 When an automatic operation is restarted, the route of an actual movement is different from an original route because it is ...

  • Page 1215

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1177 - 5 TEST OPERATION The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as specified by the created program. 5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK 1178 5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE............................

  • Page 1216

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1178 - 5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK To display the change in the position without moving the tool, use machine lock. There are two types of machine lock: all-axis machine lock, which stops the movement along all axes, and specified-axis ...

  • Page 1217

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1179 - - Auxiliary function lock Press the auxiliary function lock switch on the operator's panel. M, S, T, and B codes are disabled and not executed. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for auxiliary function lock. Lim...

  • Page 1218

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1180 - 5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial. This feature is used to check a program. For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program, setting th...

  • Page 1219

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1181 - 5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter No. 1421. Rapid traverse rate10m/minOverride50%5m/min Fig. 5.3 (a) Rapid traverse override Rapid ...

  • Page 1220

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1182 - 5.4 DWELL/AUXILIARY FUNCTION TIME OVERRIDE An override can be applied to dwell and the auxiliary function (M/S/T/B) in increments of 1% in the range from 0 to 100%. For the auxiliary function, however, if the override is less than 100%, the next ...

  • Page 1221

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1183 - NOTE The time count is incremented every 4 msec or 8 msec and the fraction is rounded up. The counting cycle of time may depend on the system. The 1% rapid traverse override signal reads the value upon completion of the auxiliary function. Acc...

  • Page 1222

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1184 - 5.5 DRY RUN The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless of the feedrate specified in the program. This function is used for checking the movement of the tool under the state that the workpiece is removed from the table. ...

  • Page 1223

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1185 - 5.6 SINGLE BLOCK Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the single block mode, the tool stops after a single block in the program is executed. Check the program in the single block...

  • Page 1224

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1186 - Explanation - Reference position return and single block If G28, G29, and G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at the intermediate point. - Single block during a canned cycle In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are...

  • Page 1225

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1187 - 5.7 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION When the cycle start button is pressed with the high speed program check mode set to be enabled, the program syntax and stroke limit are checked without axis movement. A program check is performed at the maxi...

  • Page 1226

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1188 - WARNING 1 If the machine coordinate system is not established, a stroke limit check is not performed correctly. When a reference position return is completed after power-on, perform a high speed program check. 2 When the width of the prohibited ...

  • Page 1227

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1189 - WARNING When the coordinate system is set before the high speed program check mode is turned on by the work coordinate system setting G92 (machining center system and G code system B or C of the lathe system), G50 (G code system A of the lathe s...

  • Page 1228

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1190 - 6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stored stroke check are available. This chapter describes emergency stop, o...

  • Page 1229

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1191 - 6.1 EMERGENCY STOP If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator's panel, the machine movement stops in a moment. EMERGENCY STOPRed Fig. 6.1 (a) Emergency stop This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with th...

  • Page 1230

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1192 - 6.2 OVERTRAVEL When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed. Deceleration and stop Stroke endLimit swi...

  • Page 1231

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1193 - 6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2, and stored stroke check 3. Stored stroke check 1Storedstrokecheck 2Stored stroke check 3 : Forbidden area for th...

  • Page 1232

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1194 - Explanation - Stored stroke check 1 Parameters (Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327) set boundary. Outside the area of the set limits is a forbidden area. The machine tool builder usually sets this area as the maximum stroke. When the tool enter...

  • Page 1233

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1195 - When setting the area by parameters, points A and B in the figure below must be set. X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2A(X1, Y1, Z1)B(X2, Y2, Z2) Fig. 6.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters The values X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, ...

  • Page 1234

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1196 - • For machining center system ab The position of the tool after reference position return Area boundaryAB • For lathe system The position of thetool after referenceposition returnForbitten area boundarybaBA Fig. 6.3 (d) Setting the forbid...

  • Page 1235

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1197 - - Releasing the alarms If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the system. Wh...

  • Page 1236

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1198 - 6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given block is started, whether the tool enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the positio...

  • Page 1237

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1199 - Example 2)End point End pointStart pointImmediately upon movement commencing from the start point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check before moving to be performed before movement. The tool is stopped at point a according to st...

  • Page 1238

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1200 - - A block consisting of multiple operations If a block consisting of multiple operations (such as a canned cycle and exponential interpolation) is executed, an alarm is issued at the start point of any operation whose end point falls within a i...

  • Page 1239

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1201 - 6.5 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS An improper tool offset setting or an improper operation of the machine can result in the workpiece being cut inadequately or the tool being damaged. Also, if data is lost due to an operation mistake, i...

  • Page 1240

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1202 - 6.5.1 Functions that are Used When Data is Set The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when data is set. • Input data range check • Confirmation of incremental input • Prohibition of the absolute input by the s...

  • Page 1241

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1203 - 6.5.1.1 Input data range check This function allows an effective data range to be set and checks whether the input data is within the set range. Input data range check Explanation - Outline of the input data range check This function allows a...

  • Page 1242

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1204 - - Messages displayed during the input data range check When the cursor moves into an input field of an input screen, one of the following messages and warning messages is displayed. No message is displayed when the input data range check is di...

  • Page 1243

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1205 - 6.5.1.2 Confirmation of incremental input This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using the [+INPUT] soft key. Confirmation of incremental input Explanation - Outline of the confirmation...

  • Page 1244

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1206 - 6.5.1.3 Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key This function prohibits the absolute input using the [INPUT] soft key. Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key Explanation - Outline of the prohibition of the absolute input ...

  • Page 1245

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1207 - 6.5.1.4 Confirmation of the deletion of the program This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE PROGRAM ?" when you attempt to delete the program. Confirmation of the deletion of the program Explanation - Outline of the ...

  • Page 1246

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1208 - 6.5.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?" when you attempt to delete all data. Confirmation of the deletion of all data Explanation - Outline of the confirmat...

  • Page 1247

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1209 - 6.5.1.6 Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process This function displays the [CAN] and [EXEC] soft keys for confirmation when you attempt to update the data of an input screen during the data setting process. Confirmation o...

  • Page 1248

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1210 - 6.5.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed Overview The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when the program is executed. • Display of updated modal information • Start check signal • Axis statu...

  • Page 1249

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1211 - 6.5.2.2 Start check signal This function displays the remaining amount of travel and modal information of the block to be executed and puts the program to a temporary halt before the program is executed. Start check signal Explanation - Outli...

  • Page 1250

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1212 - 6.5.2.3 Axis status display This function displays the axis status to the left of the axis name in the coordinate display screen. Axis status display Explanation - Outline of the axis status display This function displays the axis status to t...

  • Page 1251

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1213 - 6.5.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the cursor placed on a block in the middle of the program. Confirmation of the start from a...

  • Page 1252

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1214 - 6.5.2.5 Data range check This function lets you set an effective data range and check whether the data to be used for execution is within the set range. Data range check Explanation - Outline of the data range check This function lets you set...

  • Page 1253

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1215 - 6.5.2.6 Maximum incremental value check This function checks the maximum incremental value specified for each axis by the NC command. Maximum incremental value check Explanation - Outline of the maximum incremental value check When the maximu...

  • Page 1254

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1216 - 6.5.3 Setting Screen This section describes how to display the operation confirmation function setting screen and how to set the individual data items on this screen. The operation confirmation function setting screen allows you to set the foll...

  • Page 1255

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1217 - 6.5.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen This screen displays the enable/disable setting status of the following operation confirmation functions and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the ...

  • Page 1256

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1218 - 5 In the operation confirmation function setting screen, the check box of each enabled function is checked (✓). Move the cursor to the check box of the item you want to set, by pressing the , , , and keys. 6 Click the operation soft key [ON:...

  • Page 1257

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1219 - 6.5.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen This screen displays the setting status of tool offset effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the tool offset range setting screen.) Up to 2...

  • Page 1258

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1220 - If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is not performed normally and the input data is rejected. • There is a tool offset number overlap. • The upper and lower limit values...

  • Page 1259

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1221 - M - What to set with tool offset memory A With tool offset memory A, an effective data range is specified using the following four items. Displayed item What to set FROM RANGETO Specify a tool offset number range. LOW-LIMIT- UP-LIMIT Specify a ...

  • Page 1260

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1222 - T - What to set without geometry/wear offset Without geometry/wear offset, an effective data range is specified using the following eight items. Displayed item What to set FROM RANGE TO Specify a tool offset number range. LOW-LIMITX UP-LIMIT Sp...

  • Page 1261

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1223 - - Example of setting an input data range For example, suppose that the following values are set with offset memory A. FROM : TO LOW-LIMIT : UP-LIMIT 1 : 20 0.000 : 100.000 In this case, the tool offset input screen accepts only of...

  • Page 1262

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1224 - 6.5.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen This screen displays the setting status of workpiece origin offset and external workpiece origin offset effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is ...

  • Page 1263

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1225 - 5 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, , , , and keys, or the [SWITCH] soft key. 6 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then click the [INPUT] soft key. If the set effective data range is invalid for an...

  • Page 1264

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1226 - 6.5.3.4 Y-axis tool offset range setting screen T In the case of a lathe system, this screen displays the setting status of Y-axis tool offset effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as...

  • Page 1265

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1227 - 5 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, , , , and keys, or the [SWITCH] soft key. 6 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then click the [INPUT] soft key. If the set effective data range is invalid for an...

  • Page 1266

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1228 - 6.5.3.5 Workpiece shift range setting screen T In the case of a lathe system, this screen displays the setting status of shift effective data ranges of workpiece shift coordinate systems and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the sc...

  • Page 1267

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1229 - If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is not performed normally and the input data is rejected. • The upper and lower limit values are reversed. Also, the input data range c...

  • Page 1268

    OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1230 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS 7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classified by error codes and number. Up to 60 previous alarms ca...

  • Page 1269

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION - 1231 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7.1 ALARM DISPLAY Explanation - Alarm screen When an alarm is issued, the display changes to the alarm screen. Two alarm screens "DETAIL" and "ALL PATH" are provided. You can choose one of the screens by...

  • Page 1270

    OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1232 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS - Displaying an alarm screen ALM is sometimes indicated in the bottom part of the screen display without displaying an alarm screen. Fig. 7.1 (c) Parameter screen In this case, display the alarm screen by following the s...

  • Page 1271

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION - 1233 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY Up to 60 alarms (in 10 screen pages) issued by the CNC including the latest alarm are stored and displayed on the screen. The display procedure is explained below. Alarm history display Procedure 1 P...

  • Page 1272

    OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1234 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS 7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing. Diagnostic display can be used to check the syste...

  • Page 1273

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION - 1235 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN 7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen When alarms are cleared or function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears. To enable this function, set b...

  • Page 1274

    OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1236 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Switching between screens by the function key When function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears. Press function key to switch to the alarm screen for checking for alarms...

  • Page 1275

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION - 1237 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7.4.2 Relationship with Other Functions Relationship between the screen switching function and a return from the alarm screen during switching between paths (1) When bit 5 (PSC) of parameter No. 3208 is set to 0, if paths are ...

  • Page 1276

    OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1238 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS (Example) <1> When the message key is pressed on the offset screen of path 1, the alarm screen (path 1) appears. <2> When switching to path 2 is performed on the alarm screen of path 1, the alarm scr...

  • Page 1277

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1239 - 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Information stored in external I/O devices can be read into the CNC, and information can be written into external I/O devices. External I/O devices include memory cards that can be mounted to the memory card interface locat...

  • Page 1278

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1240 - Data type Default file name Learning control data (learning control for parts cutting) PRT_LN.TXT Learning control data (learning control) LEARN.TXT High precision pitch error compensation UPEC.TXT The above types of data can be input and outp...

  • Page 1279

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1241 - 8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD Screen display When an attempt is made to output NC data to a memory card, and if the specified file name or the default file name is the same as an existing file name on the memory card, a confirmation m...

  • Page 1280

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1242 - 6 Press the soft key [PUNCH]. The soft key display switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (b) to the one in Fig. 8.1 (c). 7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. Because no file name is specified, the file is output with a file name of CNC-PARA.TXT, but if a f...

  • Page 1281

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1243 - Fig. 8.1 (f) Soft key display after [PUNCH] is pressed Fig. 8.1 (g) Soft key display after [EXEC] is pressed CAUTION Even if soft key [REWRITE] is pressed, warning message "OVER WRITE FAILED" is issued and output is canceled ...

  • Page 1282

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1244 - 8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN This section explains how to input and output data of the following types to and from each operation screen: program, parameter, offset, pitch error compensation, three-dimensional error compensation, macro var...

  • Page 1283

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1245 - 8.2.9.8 Outputting name data of customize data ............1290 8.2.9.9 Inputting customize data displayed as tool management data ................................................1291 8.2.9.10 Outputting customize data displayed as tool managem...

  • Page 1284

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1246 - 8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program 8.2.1.1 Inputting a program The following explains how to input a program from an external device to the memory of the CNC by using the program editing screen or program folder screen. Inputting a pro...

  • Page 1285

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1247 - Inputting a program (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM] or [FOLDER] to display programs or a program directory. 4 Press the E...

  • Page 1286

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1248 - 8.2.1.2 Outputting a program A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to an external device. Outputting a program (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 2 Press the fu...

  • Page 1287

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1249 - Outputting a program (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM] or [FOLDER] to display programs or a program directory. 4 Press the ...

  • Page 1288

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1250 - 8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters 8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When a parameter is loaded which has th...

  • Page 1289

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1251 - Inputting parameters (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. Press the vertical soft...

  • Page 1290

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1252 - 8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters All parameters are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting parameters (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready f...

  • Page 1291

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1253 - Explanation - Suppressing output of parameters set to 0 When bit 1 (PRM) of parameter No. 0010 is set to 1, and soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the following parameters are not output: Other than axis type Axis type Bit type Parameter for which ...

  • Page 1292

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1254 - 8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data 8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data Offset data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as for offset value output. When an offset value is loaded which...

  • Page 1293

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1255 - Inputting offset data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET] appears. Press the vertical soft...

  • Page 1294

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1256 - 8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data All offset data is output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting offset data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready...

  • Page 1295

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1257 - Explanation - Output format Output format is as follows: M • Tool compensation memory A % G10 G90 P01 R_ Q_ G10 G90 P02 R_ Q_ ... G10 G90 P_ R_ % Q_ : Virtual tool nose number (TIP). Not output when the virtual tool nose direction is not u...

  • Page 1296

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1258 - • Tool compensation memory C % G10 G90 L10 P01 R_ Q_ G10 G90 L11 P01 R_ G10 G90 L12 P01 R_ G10 G90 L13 P01 R_ G10 G90 L10 P02 R_ Q_ ... G10 G90 L12 P_ R_ G10 G90 L13 P_ R_ % L10 : Geometry compensation amount corresponding to the H code L11 ...

  • Page 1297

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1259 - T The tool compensation amount and tool nose radius compensation amount are output in the following format. % G10 P01 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P02 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ ... G10 P__ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P10001 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ G10 P10002 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ ... G10 P100__ ...

  • Page 1298

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1260 - The second geometry tool offset data is output in the following format. % G10 P20001 X_ Z_ Y_ G10 P20002 X_ Z_ Y_ G10 P200__ X_ Z_ Y_ % P_ : Tool compensation number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs) Tool offset number: Specificat...

  • Page 1299

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1261 - 8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data 8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data Pitch error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the out...

  • Page 1300

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1262 - Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. Pres...

  • Page 1301

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1263 - 8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data All pitch error compensation data are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display...

  • Page 1302

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1264 - 8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data Pitch error compensation data is input and output in the following input and output formats. - Keywords The following alphabets are used as keywords. The numeric value following ea...

  • Page 1303

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1265 - 8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Three-dimensional Error Compensation Data 8.2.5.1 Inputting three-dimensional error compensation data Three-dimensional error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The...

  • Page 1304

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1266 - 16 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 17 Turn the power of the CNC on again. Inputting three-dimensional error compensation data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is rea...

  • Page 1305

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1267 - 8.2.5.2 Outputting three-dimensional error compensation data All three-dimensional error compensation data are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting three-dimensional error compensation...

  • Page 1306

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1268 - 8.2.5.3 Input/output format of three-dimensional error compensation data Three-dimensional error compensation data is input and output in the following input and output formats. - Keywords The following alphabets are used as keywords. The nu...

  • Page 1307

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1269 - - Beginning and end of a record A three-dimensional error compensation data record begins with % and ends with %. Example % ; .....................................Beginning of record N100001 A1 P1 A2 P2 A3 P3 ; N100002 A1 P0 A2 P0 A3 P-3 ...

  • Page 1308

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1270 - 8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables 8.2.6.1 Inputting custom macro common variables The value of a custom macro common variable is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The same format used to ou...

  • Page 1309

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1271 - Explanation - Common variables The common variables (#500 to #549) can be input and output. (When the option for addition of common variable is specified, values from #500 to #999 can be input and output.) #100 to #149 can be input when bit 3...

  • Page 1310

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1272 - 8.2.6.2 Outputting custom macro common variables Custom macro common variables stored in the memory of the CNC can be output in a defined output format to an external device. Outputting custom macro common variables (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch dis...

  • Page 1311

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1273 - Explanation - Output format The output format is as follows: The values of custom macro variables are output in a bit-image hexadecimal representation of double-precision floating-point type data. % G10L85P200(0000000000000000) G10L85P200(000...

  • Page 1312

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1274 - 8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data 8.2.7.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data Coordinate system variable data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as...

  • Page 1313

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1275 - Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] appears. Pre...

  • Page 1314

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1276 - 8.2.7.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data All coordinate system variable data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch displa...

  • Page 1315

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1277 - 8.2.8 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data Only output operation is permitted on operation history data. The output data is in text format. So, to reference the output data you must use an application that can handle text files on ...

  • Page 1316

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1278 - Outputting operation history data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears. Pre...

  • Page 1317

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1279 - 8.2.9 Inputting and Outputting Tool Management Data NOTE 1 For multi-path systems, place all paths in the EDIT mode before performing input and output operations. 2 The format used is the same as the registration format of the G10 format. 8.2...

  • Page 1318

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1280 - Inputting tool management data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. Press t...

  • Page 1319

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1281 - 8.2.9.2 Outputting tool management data All tool management data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting tool management data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the o...

  • Page 1320

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1282 - 8.2.9.3 Inputting magazine data Magazine data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When magazine data with a data number corresponding to existing magazine data regis...

  • Page 1321

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1283 - Inputting magazine data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. Press the vert...

  • Page 1322

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1284 - 8.2.9.4 Outputting magazine data All magazine data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting magazine data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready...

  • Page 1323

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1285 - 8.2.9.5 Inputting tool life status name data Tool life status name data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When tool life status name data with a data number corres...

  • Page 1324

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1286 - Inputting tool life status name data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. P...

  • Page 1325

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1287 - 8.2.9.6 Outputting tool life status name data All tool life status name data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting tool life status name data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure...

  • Page 1326

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1288 - 8.2.9.7 Inputting name data of customize data Name data of customize data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When name data of customize data with a data number cor...

  • Page 1327

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1289 - Inputting name data of customize data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. ...

  • Page 1328

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1290 - 8.2.9.8 Outputting name data of customize data All name data of customize data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting name data of customize data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Proced...

  • Page 1329

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1291 - 8.2.9.9 Inputting customize data displayed as tool management data Customize data displayed as tool management data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When customi...

  • Page 1330

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1292 - Inputting customize data displayed as tool management data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TO...

  • Page 1331

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1293 - 8.2.9.10 Outputting customize data displayed as tool management data Customize data displayed as tool management data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external device in the output format. Outputting customize data displayed as tool...

  • Page 1332

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1294 - 8.2.9.11 Inputting spindle waiting position name data Spindle waiting position name data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When spindle waiting position name data...

  • Page 1333

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1295 - Inputting spindle waiting position name data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] ap...

  • Page 1334

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1296 - 8.2.9.12 Outputting spindle waiting position name data Spindle waiting position name data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external device in the output format. Outputting spindle waiting position name data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch di...

  • Page 1335

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1297 - 8.2.9.13 Inputting decimal point position data of customize data Decimal point position data of customize data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When decimal poin...

  • Page 1336

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1298 - Inputting decimal point position data of customize data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL ...

  • Page 1337

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1299 - 8.2.9.14 Outputting decimal point position data of customize data Decimal point position data of customize data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external device in the output format. Outputting decimal point position data of customi...

  • Page 1338

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1300 - 8.2.9.15 Inputting tool geometry data Tool geometry data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When tool geometry data with a data number corresponding to existing to...

  • Page 1339

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1301 - Inputting tool geometry data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. Press the...

  • Page 1340

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1302 - 8.2.9.16 Outputting tool geometry data Tool geometry data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external device in the output format. Outputting tool geometry data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output dev...

  • Page 1341

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1303 - 8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN Just by using the ALL IO screen, you can input and output programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error compensation data, macro variables, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history data, and to...

  • Page 1342

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1304 - 8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting a program (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on...

  • Page 1343

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1305 - Inputting a program (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PROGRAM] appears. Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine o...

  • Page 1344

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1306 - Outputting a program (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 ...

  • Page 1345

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1307 - Outputting a program (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PROGRAM] appears. Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine ...

  • Page 1346

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1308 - 8.3.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting parameters (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key until soft k...

  • Page 1347

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1309 - Inputting parameters (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 3 Press the MDI switch on the mac...

  • Page 1348

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1310 - Outputting parameters (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]....

  • Page 1349

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1311 - 8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting offset data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT ...

  • Page 1350

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1312 - Outputting offset data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4...

  • Page 1351

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1313 - 8.3.4 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data Pitch error compensation data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the functio...

  • Page 1352

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1314 - Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 3 Press the MD...

  • Page 1353

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1315 - Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [PITCH] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft...

  • Page 1354

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1316 - 8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables Custom macro common variables can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting custom macro common variables (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft ke...

  • Page 1355

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1317 - Outputting custom macro common variables (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the sof...

  • Page 1356

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1318 - 8.3.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data Workpiece coordinates system data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Pr...

  • Page 1357

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1319 - Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [WORK] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the s...

  • Page 1358

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1320 - 8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data Operation history data can be output on the ALL IO screen (with function key for 15-inch display unit). Only output operation is permitted for operation history data. The output data is of...

  • Page 1359

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1321 - 8.3.8 Inputting and Outputting Tool Management Data Tool management data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. NOTE 1 For multi-path systems, place all paths in the EDIT mode before performing input and output operations. 2 The for...

  • Page 1360

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1322 - Outputting tool management data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [TOOL] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [P...

  • Page 1361

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1323 - Inputting magazine data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [N REA...

  • Page 1362

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1324 - Outputting magazine data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [PUNC...

  • Page 1363

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1325 - Inputting tool life status name data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [STATUS] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft...

  • Page 1364

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1326 - Outputting tool life status name data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [STATUS] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the sof...

  • Page 1365

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1327 - Inputting name data of customize data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [CUSTOM] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the sof...

  • Page 1366

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1328 - Outputting name data of customize data (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [CUSTOM] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the so...

  • Page 1367

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1329 - 8.3.9 File Format and Error Messages Explanation - File format All files that are read from and written to an external device are of text format. The format is described below. A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file...

  • Page 1368

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1330 - 8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS 8.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below. Host file list display (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) A list of the files held on the host computer ...

  • Page 1369

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1331 - NOTE 1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. The two conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list screen: (1) Check that the valid device is the embed...

  • Page 1370

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1332 - Host file list display (for 15-inch display unit) A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed. Procedure 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the vertical soft key [FOLDER]. The program list screen appears. 3 Press the continuous...

  • Page 1371

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1333 - 5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys . 6 Press the horizontal soft key [REFRESH] to update the screen display. 7 Press the horizontal soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display the host fi...

  • Page 1372

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1334 - Operation list (common to 7.2/8.4/10.4/15-inch display units) DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF The screen display can be switched between the display of file names only and the display of details. REFRESH Display data can be updated. READ A file can b...

  • Page 1373

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1335 - NC program input (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into the part program storage memory of the CNC. Procedure 1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 2 Press the ...

  • Page 1374

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1336 - NC program input (for 15-inch display unit) A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into the part program storage memory of the CNC. Procedure 1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch...

  • Page 1375

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1337 - NC program output (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) A file (NC program) stored in the part program storage memory of the CNC can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 2 Press the ...

  • Page 1376

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1338 - NC program output (for 15-inch display unit) A file (NC program) stored in the part program storage memory of the CNC can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 2 Press the EDIT switc...

  • Page 1377

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1339 - 8.5 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION Overview This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to a memory card. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a personal computer....

  • Page 1378

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1340 - Limitation - Screens whose hard copies cannot be made Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made. - Foreground I/O devices During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while ...

  • Page 1379

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1341 - 9 CREATING PROGRAMS This chapter explains how to create programs by MDI of the CNC. This chapter also explains automatic insertion of sequence numbers and how to create programs in TEACH IN mode. Creation/registration Program creation Edit...

  • Page 1380

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1342 - 9.1 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using the program editing functions described in III-10. Procedure for Creating Programs Using the MDI Panel 1 Enter the EDIT mode. 2 Press the key. 3 Press ...

  • Page 1381

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1343 - 9.2 AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when a program is created using the MDI keys in the EDIT mode. Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter No. 3216. Procedure fo...

  • Page 1382

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1344 - 9 Press key. The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbers are automatically inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10 and the parameter for the increment is set to 2, N12 inserted and displayed below the line where a new ...

  • Page 1383

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1345 - 9.3 CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN MODE (PLAYBACK) In the TEACH IN JOG or TEACH IN HANDLE mode, you can create a program while inserting the coordinate of the current position along each axis in the absolute coordinate system when the tool is m...

  • Page 1384

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1346 - Inputting the coordinates of the current position You can use the following procedure to insert the coordinate of the current position along each axis in the absolute coordinate system: 1 Select the TEACH IN JOG mode or TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 2...

  • Page 1385

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1347 - 7 Enter the P1 machine position for data of the second block as follows: G00G90 XY This operation input G00G90X3025Z23723; in program. 8 Position the tool at P2 with the manual pulse generator. 9 Enter the P2 machine position for data of th...

  • Page 1386

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1348 - 10 EDITING PROGRAMS This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion, modification, and deletion of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic insertion of sequenc...

  • Page 1387

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1349 - 10.1 EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE Before a program can be edited, the edit disable attribute must be removed. The edit disable attribute can be set for each program and folder. Programs with the edit disable attribute and programs in folders with th...

  • Page 1388

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1350 - 10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD This section outlines the procedure for inserting, altering, and deleting a word in a program registered in memory. Procedure for inserting, altering and deleting a word 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Pres...

  • Page 1389

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1351 - 10.2.1 Word Search A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text (scanning), by word search, or by address search. Procedure for scanning a program 1 Press the cursor key . The cursor moves forward word by word; th...

  • Page 1390

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1352 - Procedure for searching a word Example of searching for S12 1 Press soft key [SEARCH]. 2 Key in address S . 3 Key in 12 . • S12 cannot be searched for if only S1 is keyed in. • S09 cannot be searched for by keying in only S9. To search ...

  • Page 1391

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1353 - 10.2.2 Heading a Program The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is called heading the program pointer. This section describes the four methods for heading the program pointer. Procedure for heading a program Method 1 ...

  • Page 1392

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1354 - 10.2.3 Inserting a Word Procedure for inserting a word 1 Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the key. Example of Inserting T15 1 Search for or scan...

  • Page 1393

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1355 - 10.2.4 Altering a Word Procedure for altering a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be altered. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the key. Example of changing T15 to M15 1 Search for or scan T15. 2 Key in M 15 ....

  • Page 1394

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1356 - 10.2.5 Deleting a Word Procedure for deleting a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted. 2 Press the key. Example of deleting X100.0 1 Search for or scan X100.0. 2 Press the key. X100.0 is searched for/scanned. X100.0 is deleted.

  • Page 1395

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1357 - 10.3 DELETING BLOCKS A block or blocks can be deleted in a program. 10.3.1 Deleting a Block The portion from the current word position to the next EOB is deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB. Procedure for...

  • Page 1396

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1358 - 10.3.2 Deleting Multiple Blocks The several blocks in the forward direction from the current word position up to the EOB of the farthest of those blocks are deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB. Procedure fo...

  • Page 1397

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1359 - 10.4 PROGRAM SEARCH When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. There are four methods as follows. Procedure for program search Method 1 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode. 2 Press function key to display the program scre...

  • Page 1398

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1360 - Method 4 When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, search for an O number program by specifying digits only. 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode. 2 Press function key to display the program screen. 3 Enter the digits of a program number. Addre...

  • Page 1399

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1361 - 10.5 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in the middle of a program so that execution can be started or restarted at the block of the sequence number. Example) Sequence num...

  • Page 1400

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1362 - Explanation - Operation during Search Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC. This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values. So, in the...

  • Page 1401

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1363 - 10.6 DELETING PROGRAMS Programs registered in memory can be deleted, either one program by one program or all at once. 10.6.1 Deleting One Program A single program in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted. ...

  • Page 1402

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1364 - 10.7 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified, inserted, or deleted based on editing units. Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form. Comments can be entered in a program. Refer to the ...

  • Page 1403

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1365 - 10.8 CURSOR MOVEMENT LIMITATIONS ON PROGRAM EDITING If a program is to be edited while it is stopped or halted, limitations are imposed so that already executed blocks and buffered blocks cannot be edited. Modifiable blocks are those at and be...

  • Page 1404

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1366 - • Upward candidate search: Made through the edit-enabled area. If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled block, this operation is ignored. • Character string + ↑ (search): Typing the character string to search for and pressing the...

  • Page 1405

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1367 - 10.9 PASSWORD FUNCTION The password function locks bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202, which protects programs with program Nos. O9000 to O9999 and programs and folders having the edit/display disable attribute, according to the settings in two...

  • Page 1406

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1368 - Explanation - Setting parameter PASSWD The locked state is set when a value is set in the parameter PASSWD. However, note that parameter PASSWD can be set only when the locked state is not set (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD). If an attemp...

  • Page 1407

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1369 - CAUTION 4 In the unlocked state, programs with the edit/display disable attribute are treated in the same manner as ordinary programs. 5 The programs in a folder having the edit/display disable attribute are also treated as described in Cautio...

  • Page 1408

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1370 - 10.10 EDITING PROGRAM CHARACTERS This section describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing operations include character insertion, modification, deletion, and replacement. While program word editing is performed by recognizing...

  • Page 1409

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1371 - - Line splitting When the cursor is on a line during line editing, pressing edit key causes the line to be split into two, one before the cursor and the other after the cursor. Pressing edit key immediately after the line is split causes the...

  • Page 1410

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1372 - - Undo function The function for undoing operations performed in program editing undoes operations sequentially, starting with the one performed last. It can undo only those operations that update character strings. A single undo operation und...

  • Page 1411

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1373 - - Restrictions on editing O numbers and file names cannot be edited. EOR (%) cannot be deleted. - Line editing and automatic saving When a line is edited, the line is displayed in the update color, blue (which can be changed with color setti...

  • Page 1412

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1374 - 10.10.1 Available Keys The available keys are as follows: - Cursor keys Cursor keys , , , and move the cursor. - Editing key Deletes the character at the cursor position. - Editing key Deletes the character immediately before the curs...

  • Page 1413

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1375 - 10.10.3 Line Number Display This function is used to display a program with line numbers. Pressing soft key [LINE NUMBER] displays a program with line numbers. Pressing soft key [LINE NUMBER] again causes the line numbers to disappear. 10.10...

  • Page 1414

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1376 - 10.10.5 Replacement A character string in a program is replaced with a specified character string. Replacement Procedure 1 Press soft key [REPLCE]. 2 Search and replacement character string input areas are displayed. Enter a search character ...

  • Page 1415

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1377 - 10.10.6 Reversing Edit Operations (Undo Function) Edit operations performed on a program can be undone sequentially starting with the one performed last. Reversing edit operations (undo function) Procedure 1 Pressing soft key [UNDO] once und...

  • Page 1416

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1378 - 10.10.9 Paste The character string stored in the clipboard can be inserted at the current cursor position. After pasted, the character string remains stored in the clipboard, so that the character string can be pasted as many times as necessa...

  • Page 1417

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1379 - 10.10.12 Line Search The cursor can be moved to a specified line. The cursor can be moved to a line with a specified line number, to the first line of the program, and to the last line of the program. Line search Procedure Movement to a line ...

  • Page 1418

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1380 - 10.11 PROGRAM COPY FUNCTION A program is copied or moved between folders. Procedure for copying a program compact Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER]. The following program folder screen appears: 3 P...

  • Page 1419

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1381 - Explanation Operations are accepted only when the data protection key is set to ON. If the program storage capacity on the copy destination side is insufficient, the copy operation is not accepted. The currently selected program is highlight...

  • Page 1420

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1382 - 10.11.1 Copying and Moving Files between Devices Overview Files can be copied and moved between different devices. There are two procedures available on the program folder screen. <1> File copying and moving (device change) Select a s...

  • Page 1421

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1383 - File copying and moving with split display Procedure1 - Procedure for selecting a file first and then a destination folder 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press function key to display the program folder screen. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the...

  • Page 1422

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1384 - Explanation - Multiple selectable files Only multiple files that are in the same folder can be selected at the same time with soft key [SELECT]. Files in other devices and folders cannot be selected at the same time. Up to ten files can be se...

  • Page 1423

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1385 - - Deselecting a file When a file is selected with soft key [SELECT], the selected file can be deselected by positioning the cursor on the file and pressing soft key [SELECT] again. All selected files are deselected when any of the following o...

  • Page 1424

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1386 - 10.12 KEYS AND PROGRAM ENCRYPTION Overview Program contents can be protected by setting parameters for encryption and for the program security range. Explanation 1 Security with a password and a security range When the password and security r...

  • Page 1425

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1387 - NOTE 1 For security, the values set for PASSWORD and KEY are not displayed. For the same reason, PASSWORD, MINIMUM, and MAXIMUM can be specified only when no password is set or the program memory is unlocked. Set a password, taking great care t...

  • Page 1426

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1388 - Outputting specified multiple programs Locked/unlockedResults Locked When all of the specified programs fall outside the protected range, they are output as usual. When all of the specified programs are within the security range, warning mes...

  • Page 1427

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1389 - Password set in the system and password of the programResults Password not set in the systemThe program is input. The PSW in the file is set for parameter No. 3220. This applies if the program is in the security range. If the program is outside...

  • Page 1428

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1390 - - Searching for programs In the locked state, a program search is performed within the protected range as described below. 1 When no program number is specified, programs within the protected range are skipped. 2 When an attempt is made to s...

  • Page 1429

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1391 - 10.13 SIMULTANEOUS EDITING OF MULTIPATH PROGRAMS Simultaneous editing of multipath programs enables simultaneous editing of programs for multiple paths on a single screen. This function is enabled when bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No. 3106 is 1. ...

  • Page 1430

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1392 - Figure 10.13 (b) Simultaneous editing of multipath programs screen (15-inch LCD) Figure 10.13 (c) Simultaneous editing of multipath programs screen (7.2-inch LCD) - Modes When the paths to be displayed simultaneously are in either EDIT o...

  • Page 1431

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1393 - Soft keys are switched according to the mode for the currently selected path. Figure 10.13 (d) Screen on which both MEM and EDIT modes are selected - Switching the path subject to editing The path selected with the path selection signal is ...

  • Page 1432

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1394 - - Simultaneous editing on 7.2/8.4-inch LCDs When simultaneous editing is performed on 7.2/8.4-inch LCDs, the characters get smaller. The number of characters per path in the editing area is as follows: • Display of 38 columns and 10 rows for...

  • Page 1433

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1395 - 11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Program management functions are classified into the following two types: • Functions for folders • Functions for programs Functions for folders include creation, deletion, change of names and attributes, and so on...

  • Page 1434

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1396 - 11.1 SELECTING A DEVICE When the fast data server function (option) is provided, a program storage device can be selected. This section explains the selection procedure. Procedure for selecting a device 1 Press the function key . 2 Press ...

  • Page 1435

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1397 - 11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device Overview By selecting a memory card including a program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN") as a device, memory operation can be performed with the program in the program storage f...

  • Page 1436

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1398 - Procedure for removing a device When a program storage memory card is replaced or a memory card is used for normal usage such as data input/output, clear the recognition of the program storage memory card with removal operation. 1 Press the...

  • Page 1437

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1399 - - Selection as a main program As a main program to be automatically executed in the memory mode, a memory card program can be selected. - Sub program (call using M98/G72.1/G72.2) - Macro program (call using G65/G66/G66.1/M96) The followin...

  • Page 1438

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1400 - - External program number search / External workpiece number search A program on a program storage memory card can be searched for with the external program number search function or external workpiece number search function. Limitation For...

  • Page 1439

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1401 - CAUTION 3 When removing the memory card, be sure to perform a "removal" operation. If the memory card is removed without performing a "removal" operation and an attempt is made to access the memory card, the alarm (SR19...

  • Page 1440

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1402 - 11.2 CREATING A FOLDER This section explains the procedure for creating a folder. Procedure for creating a folder 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Move to the folder in which you want to create a folder. Use the cursor keys...

  • Page 1441

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1403 - 11.3 RENAMING A FOLDER This section explains the procedure for renaming a folder. Procedure for renaming a folder 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Select the folder that you want to rename. T...

  • Page 1442

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1404 - 11.4 CHANGING FOLDER ATTRIBUTES This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a folder (edit disable or edit/display disable). Procedure for changing folder attributes 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Pr...

  • Page 1443

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1405 - 11.5 DELETING A FOLDER This section explains the procedure for deleting a folder. Procedure for deleting a folder 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Select the folder that you want to delete. T...

  • Page 1444

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1406 - 11.6 SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER This section explains the procedure for selecting a foreground or background default folder. Procedure for selecting a default folder 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLD...

  • Page 1445

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1407 - 11.7 RENAMING A FILE This section explains the procedure for renaming a file. Procedure for renaming a file 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Move to the folder containing the file that you wan...

  • Page 1446

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1408 - 11.8 DELETING A FILE This section explains the procedure for deleting a file. Procedure for deleting a file 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Move to the folder containing the file that you wan...

  • Page 1447

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1409 - 11.9 CHANGING FILE ATTRIBUTES This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a file (edit disable, edit/display disable, encoding, or protection of data at eight levels). Procedure for selecting the attribute of a file 1...

  • Page 1448

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1410 - 11.10 SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM This section explains the procedure for selecting a main program. Procedure for selecting a main program 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Move to the folder cont...

  • Page 1449

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1411 - 11.11 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT This section explains the procedure for making a program compact. Procedure for making a program compact 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Move to the folder cont...

  • Page 1450

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1412 - 11.12 PROGRAM COPY FUNCTION A program is copied or moved from folder to folder. Procedure for copying a program compact 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER]. The following program folder screen appears: 3 Pr...

  • Page 1451

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1413 - 9 Press soft key [COPY] in the folder to which the selected program is copied to copy the program. If just one program is selected, pressing soft key [COPY] after typing a program name performs a copy operation with the entered name. 10 To m...

  • Page 1452

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1414 - 12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI panel for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation. This chapter describes how to...

  • Page 1453

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1415 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Position display inthe workpiece coordinate system ⇒ See III-12.1.1Position display ...

  • Page 1454

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1416 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 (1) ALL ⇒Overall position display ⇒ See III-12.1.10 Actual feedrate display ⇒ See III-12.1.12 Display of run time and parts count ⇒ Se...

  • Page 1455

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1417 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) PROGRAM FOLDERNEXT CHECK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Editing programs⇒ See III-10 Current block display screen ⇒ See III-12.2....

  • Page 1456

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1418 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 (1) PROGRM⇒Editing Programs ⇒ See III-10 (2) FOLDER Program folder screen ⇒ See III-12.2.13 (3) CHECK ⇒Program check scr...

  • Page 1457

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1419 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) OFFSETSETTIN G WORK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Setting and displaying the tool offset value ⇒ See III-2.1.1*1Displaying and en...

  • Page 1458

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1420 - CHUCK TAIL LANG. PROTECTGUARD (OPRT) Page 5 +(21) (22) (23) (24) (25) Chuck and tail stock barriers ⇒ See III-2.1.9*1Displaying and switching the display language⇒ See III-12.3.10Protection of data at eight levels⇒ See I...

  • Page 1459

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1421 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 Page 2 (1) OFFSET ⇒ Setting and displaying the tool offset value ⇒ See III-2.1.1 *1 (8) 2ND GEOM ⇒ Setting tool compensation/second ge...

  • Page 1460

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1422 - Page 3 (15) PRECI LEVEL ⇒ Precision level selection ⇒ See III-12.3.27 (16) TOOL LIFE ⇒ Setting and displaying tool management data ⇒ See III-12.3.24 (17) F-ACT (18) F-OFFS...

  • Page 1461

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1423 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit) PARAMETER DIAGNO SIS SERVO GUIDE SYSTEM (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Displaying and setting parameters⇒ See III-12.4.1Checking by...

  • Page 1462

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1424 - COLORPERIODMAINTEMAINTE INFO WAVE DIAG (OPRT) Page 5 +(21) (22) (23) (24) (25) Color setting screen ⇒ See III-12.4.9 FSSB PARAM TUNING (OPRT) Page 6 +(26) (27) (28) (29) (30) FSSB data display and setting scre...

  • Page 1463

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1425 - (OPRT) Page 9 +(41) (42) (43) (44) (45) DUAL CHECKR.TIMEMACRO (OPRT) Page 10 +(46) (47) (48) (49) (50) Dual Check Safety diagnosis data ⇒ Dual Check Safety OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64004EN) Real time custom...

  • Page 1464

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1426 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15-inch display unit) Page 1 Page 2 (1) PARAME TER ⇒ Displaying and setting parameters⇒ See III-12.4.13 (8) PMC MAINTE (2) DIAGNO SIS ⇒ Checking by ...

  • Page 1465

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1427 - Page 3 Page 4 (15) FSSB ⇒ FSSB data display and setting screen ⇒ See Maintenance Manual (22) M CODE GROUP ⇒ M code grouping function ⇒ See II-11.3 (16) MCHN TUNING ⇒ Machining parameter tuning ⇒ See III-12....

  • Page 1466

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1428 - NOTE For information about a dedicated screen for each path control type in the lathe system/machining center system, refer to the manuals: *1: User's manual (T series) (B-63944EN-1) *2: Us...

  • Page 1467

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1429 - 12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.1, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: ------ Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit ------ 12.1.1 Position Display in the W...

  • Page 1468

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1430 - Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit Press function key to display the current position of the tool. The following three screens are used to display the current position of the tool: • Current position display screen for t...

  • Page 1469

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1431 - 12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system. The current position changes as the tool moves. The least input increment is used as the unit f...

  • Page 1470

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1432 - Explanation - Display including compensation values M Bits 6 (DAL) and 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values include tool length compensation and cutter compensation. T Bit 1 (DAP) paramet...

  • Page 1471

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1433 - 12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system based on the coordinates (see Explanation) set by the operator. The current position changes as the ...

  • Page 1472

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1434 - Fig. 12.1.2 (b) Current position (relative) screen (T series) (10.4-inch) See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates. Explanation - Setting the relative coordinates The current position of the tool in the relat...

  • Page 1473

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1435 - - Presetting by setting a coordinate system M Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system d...

  • Page 1474

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1436 - 12.1.3 Overall Position Display Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system, relative coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance. ...

  • Page 1475

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1437 - Explanation - Coordinate display The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time: • Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate) • Current positi...

  • Page 1476

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1438 - 12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset If a workpiece coordinate system has been shifted with manual intervention or any other operation, an MDI operation can be performed to preset the system to a workpiece coordinate system tha...

  • Page 1477

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1439 - 12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on a current position display screen or program check screen. On the 12 soft keys display unit, the actual feedrate is always displayed...

  • Page 1478

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1440 - Fig. 12.1.5 (b) Current position (absolute) screen (T series) (10.4-inch) The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least input increment) under the display of the current p...

  • Page 1479

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1441 - 12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the current position display screens. Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position ...

  • Page 1480

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1442 - The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME) are displayed under the current position. Explanation - PART COUNT Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is incremented each t...

  • Page 1481

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1443 - 12.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference Position To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the floating reference position must be set beforehand. Procedure for setting the floating reference position Proced...

  • Page 1482

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1444 - 12.1.8 Operating Monitor Display The load meter for a servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial spindle can be displayed. To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to...

  • Page 1483

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1445 - Fig. 12.1.8 (b) Operating monitor (T series) (10.4-inch) Explanation - Display of the servo axes Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed. One screen displays load meters...

  • Page 1484

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1446 - - Speedometer Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1. The spindle speed to be displayed ...

  • Page 1485

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1447 - 12.1.9 Display of Three-dimensional Manual Feed (Tool Tip Coordinates, Number of Pulses, Machine Axis Move Amount) The absolute coordinates of the tool tip, the number of pulses, and a machine axis move amount based on three-dimensi...

  • Page 1486

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1448 - Explanation - Tool tip position The addresses of the three basic machine configuration axes for performing three-dimensional manual feed and the current position of the tool tip are displayed. - Tool axis reference (number of puls...

  • Page 1487

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1449 - - Table reference (number of pulses) VR The amount of travel in the table reference vertical direction in table reference vertical direction handle feed, table reference vertical direction jog feed, or table reference vertical dire...

  • Page 1488

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1450 - Operation The display of the number of pulses can be cleared by soft key operations. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 2 Select the soft key corresponding to a function subject to clearing of the amount of travel. Pressing the right...

  • Page 1489

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1451 - 12.1.10 Overall Position Display (15-inch Display Unit) Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system, relative coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and ...

  • Page 1490

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1452 - Explanation - Coordinate display The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time: • Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate) • Current positi...

  • Page 1491

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1453 - T The following parameters can be used to determine whether the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radius compensation. • Workpiece coordinate system: Bit 1 (DAP) of parameter No. 3129 and bit 7 (DAC) of parameter N...

  • Page 1492

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1454 - 12.1.11 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (15-inch Display Unit) If a workpiece coordinate system has been shifted with manual intervention or any other operation, an MDI operation can be performed to preset the system to a workpie...

  • Page 1493

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1455 - 12.1.12 Actual Feedrate Display (15-inch Display Unit) The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on a current position display screen or program check screen. Display procedure for the actual feedrate on the...

  • Page 1494

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1456 - The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least input increment) under the display of the current position. Explanation - Actual feedrate value The actual rate is calculate...

  • Page 1495

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1457 - 12.1.13 Display of Run Time and Parts Count (15-inch Display Unit) The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the current position display screens. Procedure for displaying run time and parts count ...

  • Page 1496

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1458 - The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME) are displayed under the current position. Explanation - PART COUNT Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is incremented each t...

  • Page 1497

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1459 - 12.1.14 Setting the Floating Reference Position (15-inch Display Unit) To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the floating reference position must be set beforehand. Procedure for setting the floating r...

  • Page 1498

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1460 - 12.1.15 Operating Monitor Display (15-inch Display Unit) The load meter for each servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial spindle can be displayed. To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parame...

  • Page 1499

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1461 - Explanation - Display of the servo axes Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed. One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the vertical s...

  • Page 1500

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1462 - - Speedometer Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1. The spindle speed to be displayed ...

  • Page 1501

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1463 - 12.1.16 Display of Three-dimensional Manual Feed (Tool Tip Coordinates, Number of Pulses, Machine Axis Move Amount) (15-inch Display Unit) The absolute coordinates of the tool tip, the number of pulses, and a machine axis move amoun...

  • Page 1502

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1464 - R1 The amount of travel in the first axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool axis right-angle direction jog feed, or tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed is displayed. The unit is the least i...

  • Page 1503

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1465 - H2 The amount of travel in the second axis direction in table reference horizontal direction handle feed, table reference horizontal direction jog feed, or table reference horizontal direction incremental feed is displayed. The uni...

  • Page 1504

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1466 - 12.2 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.2, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: ――――― Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.2.1 Program Contents Displa...

  • Page 1505

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1467 - 12.2.1 Program Contents Display Displays the program currently being executed in MEMORY mode. Displaying the program being executed Procedure 1 Press function key to display the program screen. 2 Press chapter selection soft key [...

  • Page 1506

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1468 - 12.2.1.1 Displaying the executed block Overview When the program being executed is displayed, one executed block can be displayed. This function can be enabled by setting bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308. The program screen shows...

  • Page 1507

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1469 - Fig. 12.2.1.1 (c) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MEM mode) Explanation - Program look-ahead When an automatic operation cycle starts, a program is executed as described below. <1> The command of one block...

  • Page 1508

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1470 - 12.2.2 Editing a Program A program can be edited in the EDIT mode. Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which performs word-by-word editing. The other is character editing, which performs character-by-charac...

  • Page 1509

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1471 - - Character editing Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as with a general text editor. Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input buffer. ...

  • Page 1510

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1472 - 12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently being executed mode is displayed. For MDI operation, see Section III-4.2, “MDI Operation”...

  • Page 1511

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1473 - 12.2.4 Program Folder Screen A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed. For the program folder screen, see Chapter III-11, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”. Displaying the program folder screen Procedure 1 Press func...

  • Page 1512

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1474 - 12.2.4.1 Split display on the program folder screen Overview On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information views, upper and lower, as shown in the figure below. This function i...

  • Page 1513

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1475 - Example of copying a file from the CNC MEM to the Data Server Procedure <1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server. <2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy. <3> ...

  • Page 1514

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1476 - Procedure for switching to split display Procedure 1 Press function key to display the program folder screen. 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 3 Press continuous menu key twice. Soft key [MULTI LIST] appears. Fig. 12.2.4.1 (b) Program...

  • Page 1515

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1477 - 4 Press soft key [MULTI LIST]. The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same folder information. Immediately after the splitting, the upper folder view becomes active for operati...

  • Page 1516

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1478 - Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split display On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described below. In the active folder view fo...

  • Page 1517

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1479 - Explanation - File operations on the split display The following operations are allowed on the split display. <1> You can select and display devices or folders individually in each folder view. <2> You can copy or move...

  • Page 1518

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1480 - Limitation - Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split display The same device of any of the following types can be selected in both views at the same time on the split display. • CNC MEM • MEM CARD...

  • Page 1519

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1481 - 12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed next. Procedure for displaying the next block display screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft ...

  • Page 1520

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1482 - 12.2.6 Program Check Screen Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data. Procedure for displaying the program check screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection s...

  • Page 1521

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1483 - 12.2.7 Background Editing Editing one program during execution of another program is referred to as background editing. You can perform the same edit operations in the background as those in normal editing (foreground editing). On...

  • Page 1522

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1484 - Display When background editing starts, the ordinary program editing screen switches to the background editing screen. When two or more programs are edited in the background, the screen is split to display these programs. For a 10.4-...

  • Page 1523

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1485 - - Character editing Fig. 12.2.7 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and left programs). Similarly to word editing, at the top of the window for each program, the status line is di...

  • Page 1524

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1486 - Starting background editing from the editing screen Procedure Method 1 1 Press function key . 2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG EDIT]. 4 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH] to select a program to be...

  • Page 1525

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1487 - Starting background editing from the program folder screen By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. The cursor is used to select a program. You do not need to enter a program name. Pr...

  • Page 1526

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1488 - Background editing end operation Background editing can be ended using the procedure described below. The procedure for ending background editing of one program and that for ending all background editing of multiple programs are show...

  • Page 1527

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1489 - 12.2.8 Stamping the Machining Time The execution times of the most recently executed ten programs can be displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds. The calculated machining time can be inserted as a comment of the program to check th...

  • Page 1528

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1490 - 5 The following figure shows the screen when the machining times of the ten main programs O0020, O0040, …, and O0200 are displayed and the screen when the machining time of O0220 is newly calculated after that. Fig. 12.2.8 (b) ...

  • Page 1529

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1491 - Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen Procedure You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown below: 1 To insert the calculated machining time of a pro...

  • Page 1530

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1492 - Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.8 (c) Program screen (10.4-inch)

  • Page 1531

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1493 - 4 If a comment is written in the block containing the program number of a program of which machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the comment. Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.8 (d) Program ...

  • Page 1532

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1494 - Display on the program folder screen The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing comment of the program on the program folder screen. Fig. 12.2.8 (e) Program folder screen (...

  • Page 1533

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1495 - Explanation - Machining time The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the next reset. If a reset is not performed during operation, the machining time is counted from the st...

  • Page 1534

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1496 - - States of the stamped machining time In the following states, the stamped machining time is displayed on the program folder screen as shown below. 1 When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters The 17th and subseque...

  • Page 1535

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1497 - 2 When two or more machining times are stamped The first machining time is displayed. Fig. 12.2.8 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (10.4-inch)

  • Page 1536

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1498 - 3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) The machining time display field is left blank. ...

  • Page 1537

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1499 - 12.2.9 Screen for Assistance in Entering Tilted Working Plane Command The screens for assistance in entering tilted working plane commands (hereinafter referred to as guidance screens) include a command type selection screen and a t...

  • Page 1538

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1500 - 2 Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a position where you want to insert a block. Note that a block created on the guidance screens is inserted after the block at the cursor position. (If the block at the cursor po...

  • Page 1539

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1501 - 5 Select a command type with any of the cursor keys, and then press soft key [SELECT]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. 6 Enter command data for the setting items. 7 Press soft key [INSERT]. 8 Press s...

  • Page 1540

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1502 - Modification to an existing block The following describes the procedure for replacing a block in a program being edited on a program editing screen, with a tilted working plane command block created on a guidance screen. 1 On a prog...

  • Page 1541

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1503 - 5 Enter command data for setting items to be modified. 6 Press soft key [ALTER]. 7 Press soft key [YES]. This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the block at the cursor position is replaced.

  • Page 1542

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1504 - Guidance screen cancellation Pressing soft key [CANCEL] on a guidance screen takes you back to the program editing screen. At this time, the data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded. NOTE 1 In addition to the above...

  • Page 1543

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1505 - Notes • Conditions under which soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is displayed Soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is displayed on a program editing screen under the following conditions: 1 Foreground editing screen - The CNC mode is EDIT, TJOG, or THN...

  • Page 1544

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1506 - 12.2.9.1 Command type selection screen The command type selection screen is used to select the type of a tilted working plane command you want to insert into a program to be edited. One of the following command types can be selected...

  • Page 1545

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1507 - 12.2.9.2 Tilted working plane data setting screen The tilted working plane data setting screen is used to set specified tilted working plane data required for a tilted working plane command of the type that has been selected on the...

  • Page 1546

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1508 - NOTE 1 For existing block modification, if the guidance screen is displayed when the cursor is placed in the middle of multiple blocks for a command, the parameters for the block(s) before the cursor are not reflected in the setting ...

  • Page 1547

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1509 - • Item to be selected from a list 1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set. 2 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to select. Example) Order of rotation for Roll-Pitch Yaw angl...

  • Page 1548

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1510 - Replacement of a block If the guidance screen is displayed when the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen includes a tilted working plane command, soft key [ALTER] is displayed on the tilted working plane data se...

  • Page 1549

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1511 - Limitation The following lists the warnings that may be issued at the time of block insertion or replacement. If a warning is displayed, return to the program editing screen with soft key [CANCEL] and press soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] ag...

  • Page 1550

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1512 - 12.2.9.3 Details of the tilted working plane data setting screen The following six tilted working plane commands are supported. For details of the commands, see II-22.3, "TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMANDS". • G68.2 / G68.4 (...

  • Page 1551

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1513 - • Euler’s angle I : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). This rotation determines coordinat...

  • Page 1552

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1514 - • Order of Rotation Select an order in which the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are rotated in a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). The selectable r...

  • Page 1553

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1515 - G68.2 / G68.4(3 points specification) Fig. 12.2.9.3 (c) Tilted working plane data setting screen- 3 points specification(10.4-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordi...

  • Page 1554

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1516 - • Shift of the Origin Specify, in a feature coordinate system, an amount of shift from the feature coordinate system origin specified for the 1st point (point P1). • Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate Specify an a...

  • Page 1555

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1517 - • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted working plane command mode is set. Incremental: It is assumed that values of specified data ar...

  • Page 1556

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1518 - • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted working plane command mode is set. Incremental: It is assumed that values of specified data are...

  • Page 1557

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1519 - Fig. 12.2.9.3 (g) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(10.4-inch) (When "Yes" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate") • Origin command of Feature Coordinate Select wheth...

  • Page 1558

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1520 - Screens of a 15-inch display unit This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key . The screens include a program editing screen, program folder list display screen, and screens for displaying the command state...

  • Page 1559

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1521 - 12.2.10 Program Contents Display (15-inch Display Unit) Displays the program currently being executed in MEMORY mode. Displaying the program being executed Procedure 1 Press function key to display the program screen. 2 Press ver...

  • Page 1560

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1522 - 12.2.11 Editing a Program (15-inch Display Unit) A program can be edited in the EDIT mode. Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which performs word-by-word editing. The other is character editing, which perf...

  • Page 1561

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1523 - - Character editing Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as with a general text editor. Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input buffer. ...

  • Page 1562

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1524 - 12.2.12 Program Screen for MDI Operation (15-inch Display Unit) During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently being executed mode is displayed. For MDI operation, see Section III-...

  • Page 1563

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1525 - 12.2.13 Program Folder Screen (15-inch Display Unit) A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed. For the program folder screen, see Chapter III-11, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”. Displaying the program folder scree...

  • Page 1564

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1526 - 12.2.13.1 Split display on the program folder screen Overview On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information views, upper and lower, as shown in the figure below. Fig. 12.2....

  • Page 1565

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1527 - Example of copying a file from the CNC MEM to the Data Server Procedure <1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server. <2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy. <3>...

  • Page 1566

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1528 - Procedure for switching to split display Procedure 1 Press function key to display the program folder screen. 2 Press horizontal soft key [(OPRT)]. 3 Press continuous menu key twice. Horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST] appears. Fig...

  • Page 1567

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1529 - 4 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST]. The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same folder information. Immediately after the splitting, the upper folder view becomes active ...

  • Page 1568

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1530 - Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split display On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described below. In the active folder view fo...

  • Page 1569

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1531 - - Device information display The device information as shown in the normal program folder screen (portion in a dotted box in the figure below) is not shown on the split display (Fig. 12.2.13.1 (c)). Fig. 12.2.13.1 (d) Program folde...

  • Page 1570

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1532 - 12.2.14 Next Block Display Screen (15-inch Display Unit) Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed next. Procedure for displaying the next block display screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press...

  • Page 1571

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1533 - 12.2.15 Program Check Screen (15-inch Display Unit) Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data. Procedure for displaying the program check screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 P...

  • Page 1572

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1534 - 12.2.16 Background Editing (15-inch Display Unit) Editing one program during execution of another program is referred to as background editing. You can perform the same edit operations in the background as those in normal editing (...

  • Page 1573

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1535 - Display When background editing starts, the ordinary program editing screen switches to the background editing screen. When two or more programs are edited in the background, the screen is split to display these programs. For a 10.4-...

  • Page 1574

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1536 - - Character editing Fig. 12.2.16 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and left programs). Similarly to word editing, at the top of the window for each program, the status line is d...

  • Page 1575

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1537 - Starting background editing from the editing screen Procedure Method (only for word editing) 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 3 Key in the name of a program to be edited in the background. 4 Press horizont...

  • Page 1576

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1538 - Starting background editing from the program folder screen By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. The cursor is used to select a program. You do not need to enter a program name. Pr...

  • Page 1577

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1539 - Background editing end operation Background editing can be ended using the procedure described below. The procedure for ending background editing of one program and that for ending all background editing of multiple programs are show...

  • Page 1578

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1540 - 12.2.17 Stamping the Machining Time (15-inch Display Unit) The execution times of the most recently executed ten programs can be displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds. The calculated machining time can be inserted as a comment of...

  • Page 1579

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1541 - Fig. 12.2.17 (b) Stamping the machining time (15-inch)

  • Page 1580

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1542 - Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen Procedure You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown below: 1 To insert the calculated machining time of a pr...

  • Page 1581

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1543 - Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.17 (c) Program screen (15-inch)

  • Page 1582

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1544 - 4 If a comment is written in the block containing the program number of a program of which machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the comment. Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.17 (d) Program...

  • Page 1583

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1545 - Display on the program folder screen The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing comment of the program on the program folder screen. Fig. 12.2.17 (e) Program folder screen ...

  • Page 1584

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1546 - Limitation - Alarm The execution of a program may be held by an alarm during the machining time count operation. In this case, the machining time is counted until the alarm is released by a reset. - M02 It may be specified that M0...

  • Page 1585

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1547 - - States of the stamped machining time In the following states, the stamped machining time is displayed on the program folder screen as shown below. 1 When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters The 17th and subseque...

  • Page 1586

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1548 - 2 When two or more machining times are stamped The first machining time is displayed. Fig. 12.2.17 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (15-inch)

  • Page 1587

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1549 - 3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) The machining time display field is left blank. ...

  • Page 1588

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1550 - 12.2.18 Screen for Assistance in Entering Tilted Working Plane Command (15-inch Display Unit) The screens for assistance in entering tilted working plane commands (hereinafter referred to as guidance screens) include a command type ...

  • Page 1589

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1551 - The program editing screen is displayed. 2 Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a position where you want to insert a block. Note that a block created on the guidance screens is inserted after the block at the cursor...

  • Page 1590

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1552 - 4 Select a command type with any of the cursor keys, and then press horizontal soft key [SELECT]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. 5 Enter command data for the setting items. 6 Press horizontal soft key [...

  • Page 1591

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1553 - Modification to an existing block The following describes the procedure for replacing a block in a program being edited on a program editing screen, with a tilted working plane command block created on a guidance screen. 1 On a prog...

  • Page 1592

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1554 - 3 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. 4 Enter command data for setting items to be modified. 5 Press horizontal sof...

  • Page 1593

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1555 - Guidance screen cancellation Pressing horizontal soft key [CANCEL] on a guidance screen takes you back to the program editing screen. At this time, the data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded. NOTE 1 In addition t...

  • Page 1594

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1556 - 2 Background editing screen - A program to be edited is not in reference mode. - The editing and display are not prohibited for a program to be edited. 3 MDI editing screen - The CNC mode is MDI. • Screen displayed when horizontal...

  • Page 1595

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1557 - 12.2.18.1 Command type selection screen The command type selection screen is used to select the type of a tilted working plane command you want to insert into a program to be edited. One of the following command types can be selecte...

  • Page 1596

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1558 - 12.2.18.2 Tilted working plane data setting screen The tilted working plane data setting screen is used to set specified tilted working plane data required for a tilted working plane command of the type that has been selected on the...

  • Page 1597

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1559 - NOTE 1 For existing block modification, if the guidance screen is displayed when the cursor is placed in the middle of multiple blocks for a command, the parameters for the block(s) before the cursor are not reflected in the setting ...

  • Page 1598

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1560 - ↓• Item to be selected from a list 1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set. 2 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to select. Example) Order of rotation for Roll-Pitch Yaw ...

  • Page 1599

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1561 - Replacement of a block If the guidance screen is displayed when the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen includes a tilted working plane command, horizontal soft key [ALTER] is displayed on the tilted working pl...

  • Page 1600

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1562 - Limitation The following lists the warnings that may be issued at the time of block insertion or replacement. If a warning is displayed, return to the program editing screen with horizontal soft key [CANCEL] and press horizontal soft...

  • Page 1601

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1563 - 12.2.18.3 Details of the tilted working plane data setting screen The following six tilted working plane commands are supported. For details of the commands, see II-22.3, "TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMANDS". • G68.2 / G68.4 ...

  • Page 1602

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1564 - • Euler’s angle I : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). This rotation determines coordina...

  • Page 1603

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1565 - • Order of Rotation Select an order in which the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are rotated in a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). The selectable r...

  • Page 1604

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1566 - G68.2 / G68.4(3 points specification) Fig. 12.2.18.3 (c) Tilted working plane data setting screen- 3 points specification(15-inch) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinat...

  • Page 1605

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1567 - • Shift of the Origin Specify, in a feature coordinate system, an amount of shift from the feature coordinate system origin specified for the 1st point (point P1). • Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate Specify an a...

  • Page 1606

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1568 - • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted working plane command mode is set. Incremental: It is assumed that values of specified data ar...

  • Page 1607

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1569 - • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted working plane command mode is set. Incremental: It is assumed that values of specified data are...

  • Page 1608

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1570 - Fig. 12.2.18.3 (g) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(15-inch) (When "Yes" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate") • Origin command of Feature Coordinate Select whethe...

  • Page 1609

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1571 - 12.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.3, “SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ”, consists of the following subsections: ――――― Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.3.1 Displaying and Entering Settin...

  • Page 1610

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1572 - 12.3.29 Displaying and Setting Workpiece Setting Error Compensation Data (15-inch Display Unit).......................1716 12.3.30 Displaying and Setting Pattern Data Inputs (15-inch Display Unit) .....................................

  • Page 1611

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1573 - 12.3.1 Displaying and Entering Setting Data Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insert...

  • Page 1612

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1574 - Fig. 12.3.1 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys . 5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT]. Explanation - PARAMETER WRITE Setting whether paramet...

  • Page 1613

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1575 - - I/O CHANNEL Using channel of reader/puncher interface. 0 : Channel 0 1 : Channel 1 2 : Channel 2 - SEQUENCE NO. Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the EDIT mode....

  • Page 1614

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1576 - 12.3.2 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation enters single block mode after the block is executed. Procedure for sequence number compa...

  • Page 1615

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1577 - Explanation - Sequence number after the program is executed After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the program, the sequence number settting for sequence number compensation and stop becomes “-1”. ...

  • Page 1616

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1578 - 12.3.3 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined parts can be displayed. This data can be set by parameters or on ...

  • Page 1617

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1579 - Explanation - PARTS TOTAL This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712. - PARTS REQUIRED It ...

  • Page 1618

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1580 - - Usage When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are incremented by one. Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 is executed every time the processing ...

  • Page 1619

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1581 - 12.3.4 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and external workpiece origin o...

  • Page 1620

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1582 - 6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key [INPUT]. The entered value is specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and pressing soft key [+INPUT], the...

  • Page 1621

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1583 - 5 To display the WORK COORDINATES screen, press the chapter selection soft key [WORK]. Fig. 12.3.5 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch) 6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set. 7 Press the address ke...

  • Page 1622

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1584 - 12.3.6 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to #531 or #500 to #999) on the screen. The values for variables can be set on this screen. Relative coo...

  • Page 1623

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1585 - Explanation If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an indication below is provided. When the significant number of digits is 12 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 0): Variable value range ...

  • Page 1624

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1586 - 12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros. RTM variables are divided into temporary real time macro variables (temporary RTM variable...

  • Page 1625

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1587 - 5 Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the number of a real time custom macro variable and press soft key [NO. SRH]. • Move the cursor t...

  • Page 1626

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1588 - 12.3.8 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel Operations on the MDI panel can substitute for the functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel. This means that a mode selection, jog feed override selection,...

  • Page 1627

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1589 - Fig. 12.3.8 (b) With the manual handle feed function (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.3.8 (c) (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary posit...

  • Page 1628

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1590 - 6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the key together with an arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse. Fig. 12.3.8 (c) MDI arrow keys Explanation - Valid operations The valid operations on the ...

  • Page 1629

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1591 - 12.3.9 Setting and Displaying Tool Management Data The tool management function totally manages tool information including tool offsets and tool life information. This function provides a magazine screen and tool management screen. ...

  • Page 1630

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1592 - 6 To end the edit operation, press soft key [EXIT]. This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen. Explanation - Another method Magazine data can be input/output also by using external I/O devices. See ...

  • Page 1631

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1593 - 12.3.9.2 Displaying and setting tool management screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. Alternatively, press function key several times until the tool management screen appears. 3...

  • Page 1632

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1594 - 7 To end the edit operation, press soft key [EXIT]. This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen. Fig. 12.3.9.2 (b) Tool management data screen (check function) (10.4-inch) 8 When soft key [CHECK] is ...

  • Page 1633

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1595 - Explanation - Another method Tool management data, customize data, and names set for tool states can be input/output also by using external I/O devices. See III-8, “DATA I/O”. - Displayed information • Life information Fig. ...

  • Page 1634

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1596 - NOTE 1 The tool types and data access information vary depending on the specifications defined by the machine tool builder. 2 The same type of tools must have the same life count type. L-COUNT : The number of use times/use period of...

  • Page 1635

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1597 - • Tool offset information Fig. 12.3.9.2 (d) Tool management data tool offset screen (10.4-inch) H : Tool length compensation number (for machining center systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. D : Cutter compensation ...

  • Page 1636

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1598 - Customize 0 : Bit-type customize information. For each bit, 1 or 0 can be input. Customize 1 to 4 : Customize information. Any value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set. Customize 5 to 20 : Customize information. These items...

  • Page 1637

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1599 - 12.3.9.3 Each tool data screen Each tool data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. Alternatively, press function key several times until the tool management screen appears. 3 P...

  • Page 1638

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1600 - When a data item is set as a screen element of the tool management data screen twice or more using the tool management data display customize function (one of the tool management extension functions), only the data item with the smal...

  • Page 1639

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1601 - Operation in the management data edit mode To edit data, press soft key [EDIT] to enter the management data edit mode. Fig. 12.3.9.3 (b) Each tool data screen (10.4-inch) In the management data edit mode, “EDITING” is displaye...

  • Page 1640

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1602 - 12.3.9.4 Displaying the total life of tools of the same type Total life data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. Alternatively, press key several times until the tool manageme...

  • Page 1641

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1603 - Fig. 12.3.9.4 (b) Time display (10.4-inch) Displayed information S-NO. : Sequential number of each tool type TYPE NO. : Tool type number T-REM-LIFE : Total of remaining life values of tools with the same tool type number T-L-COUNT :...

  • Page 1642

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1604 - Key operations - MDI key operations Displays the previous page. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page. Displays the next page. The cursor moves to the first data item on that page. Moves the cursor up on the screen....

  • Page 1643

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1605 - Detailed life data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. Alternatively, press several times until the tool management screen appears. 3 Press soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total lif...

  • Page 1644

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1606 - Key operations - MDI key operations Displays the previous page. Displays the next page. Moves the cursor up on the screen. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page. Moves the cursor down on the screen. The cursor move...

  • Page 1645

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1607 - 12.3.9.5 Tool geometry data screen Tool geometry data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. Alternatively, press several times until the tool management screen appears. 3 Press ...

  • Page 1646

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1608 - Key operations - Operations in the standard mode MDI key operations Numeral keys Inputs a numeric value. Moves the cursor up on the screen. Moves the cursor down on the screen. Moves the cursor left on the screen. Moves the c...

  • Page 1647

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1609 - Example Set the edit mode. When the tool geometry with tool geometry number 1 occupies 1 pot in the left direction, 0.5 pots in the right direction, and 1.5 pots in the down direction, set data as shown in the figure below: Fig. 12....

  • Page 1648

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1610 - If a tool to be registered for a magazine is determined to interfere with another tool, the warning message “TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR:xxxx,xxxx” is displayed. xxxx indicates the tool number of each of the two tools. If a t...

  • Page 1649

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1611 - - Tool management screen You can use bit 2 of tool information to switch between a oversize tool and normal tool. For a oversize tool, set a tool geometry number fit for the tool. Fig. 12.3.9.5 (d) Bit for switching between a norma...

  • Page 1650

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1612 - 12.3.10 Displaying and Switching the Display Language The language used for display can be switched to another language. A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of the display language on t...

  • Page 1651

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1613 - Explanation - Language switching The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0. - Selectable languages The display languages selectable on this screen are as follows: 1. English 2. Japanese 3...

  • Page 1652

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1614 - 12.3.11 Protection of Data at Eight Levels You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels and one of eight protection levels for each type of CNC and PMC data. When an attempt is made to change CNC and PMC data or output it to an ex...

  • Page 1653

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1615 - Explanation - Operation level setting To select operation level 0 to 3, use the corresponding memory protection key signal. To select operation level 4 to 7, use the corresponding password. Table 12.3.11.1 (a) Operation level settin...

  • Page 1654

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1616 - 12.3.11.2 Password modification The current operation level is displayed. The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified. Displaying and setting the password modification screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 ...

  • Page 1655

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1617 - Explanation Up to eight characters (only uppercase alphabetic characters and numeric characters) can be input. NOTE 1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters are available: • Uppercase alp...

  • Page 1656

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1618 - 12.3.11.3 Protection level setting The current operation level is displayed. The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed. The change protection level and output protection level of each da...

  • Page 1657

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1619 - Explanation When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation level, the protection level of the data item cannot be changed. The protection level of a data item cannot be changed to a protection level hig...

  • Page 1658

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1620 - NOTE 1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided. 2 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the protection level cannot be changed. 3 The protection level of data cannot be cha...

  • Page 1659

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1621 - 12.3.11.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program The display/operations indicated below can be performed from the directory screen. The change protection level and output protection level of eac...

  • Page 1660

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1622 - Explanation The change protection level (0 to 7) and output protection level (0 to 7) are displayed as “CHANGE PROTECTION LEVEL VALUE/OUTPUT PROTECTION LEVEL”. NOTE 1 When the protection level of data is higher than the current ...

  • Page 1661

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1623 - 12.3.12 Precision Level Selection An intermediate precision level between the parameters for emphasis on velocity (precision level 1) and the parameters for emphasis on precision (precision level 10) set on the machining parameter t...

  • Page 1662

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1624 - 4 To change the precision level, key in a desired precision level (1 to 10), then press the key on the MDI panel. 5 When the precision level is changed, a RMS value is obtained from the velocity-emphasized parameter set and precisio...

  • Page 1663

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1625 - 12.3.13 Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data Displaying tool life management data on a screen enables the current status of tool life management to be grasped. Also on the screen, tool life management data can be edited...

  • Page 1664

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1626 - M If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1), the following parameters can be used to display arbitrary groups and remaining set values. • If bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1 An...

  • Page 1665

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1627 - 12.3.13.1 Tool life management (list screen) This screen can display the life management status of all tools in tool groups and whether the life of the tool groups has expired. It also enables you to set tool life counters and clea...

  • Page 1666

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1628 - NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, NEXT GROUP, USING GROUP, and SELECTED GROUP are each represented with an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. - Contents of (B) (B) displays the set life value, the ...

  • Page 1667

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1629 - If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, an arbitrary group number is displayed in the parentheses beside the tool group number. If no arbitrary group number is specified, “********” is displayed instead. Fig. 12.3.13.1 (b) Disp...

  • Page 1668

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1630 - Setting data on the list screen Tool life management data can be specified in the reset state (both the OP and RST signals are “0”). However, setting bit 1 (TCI) of parameter No. 6804 to 1 enables tool life management data to be...

  • Page 1669

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1631 - - Selecting tool groups Tool groups can be selected using the following methods. Method 1 1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad. 2 Press soft key [NO.SRH]. NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group is selecte...

  • Page 1670

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1632 - 12.3.13.2 Tool life management (group editing screen) On this screen, it is possible to edit tool life management data (such as tool life value, tool life counter, and tool data) for the tool group of interest. Displaying the group...

  • Page 1671

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1633 - SELECTED GROUP: Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way or life counting has been performed most recently. COUNT OVERRIDE: “1.0TIMES” is displayed if the tool life counter override signal is disabled (b...

  • Page 1672

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1634 - NOTE 1 The tool life counter indicates the count value for the tool indicated with @. 2 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 = 0, a tool number remains prefixed with @ even if the life of the tool has expired until another tool is s...

  • Page 1673

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1635 - T If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) Turret type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0) • OPTION GROUP: No display. • REST COUNT: Remaining set value used until a new tool...

  • Page 1674

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1636 - M T If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a tool life value, and a tool life counter value can be set for the tool group. First of all, add a tool number (T code). NOTE 1 As for USING GROUP or NEXT...

  • Page 1675

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1637 - Procedure - Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group number, and remaining set value Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group number,...

  • Page 1676

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1638 - - Adding tool numbers Tool numbers can be added to a tool group as follows: 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) just before a tool number to be added. 3 Enter the tool number from t...

  • Page 1677

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1639 - - Selecting tool skip Tool data can be placed in a skip state as follows: 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) for a tool you want to skip. 3 Press soft key [STATE]. 4 Press soft ke...

  • Page 1678

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1640 - 12.3.14 Displaying and Setting Workpiece Setting Error Compensation Data An amount of error used in workpiece setting error compensation can be set on the workpiece setting error screen. The workpiece setting error screen is display...

  • Page 1679

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1641 - Table rotation axis position setting items are displayed under the following conditions. • It must have been correctly specified which axis is a table rotation axis. If parameter No. 19680 = 12 (table rotation type), axis numbers ...

  • Page 1680

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1642 - 12.3.15 Displaying and Setting Pattern Data Inputs Described below are a method for displaying machining menus (pattern menus) created by machine tool builders and a method for setting them. The descriptions are based on an example...

  • Page 1681

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1643 - On this screen, a pattern to be used can be selected. The following two methods can be used to select patterns. • Using the cursor Move the cursor to a pattern name you want to select, using cursor key or , and then press soft ke...

  • Page 1682

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1644 - - Explanations about the custom macro screen (pattern data screen) BOLT HOLE An arbitrary character string consisting of 12 or less characters can be displayed as a pattern data title. TOOL. An arbitrary character string consi...

  • Page 1683

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1645 - Screens of a 15-inch display unit 12.3.16 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15-inch Display Unit) Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/di...

  • Page 1684

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1646 - Fig. 12.3.16 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys . 5 Enter a new value and press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. Explanation - PARAMETER WR...

  • Page 1685

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1647 - - I/O CHANNEL Using channel of reader/puncher interface. 0 : Channel 0 1 : Channel 1 2 : Channel 2 - SEQUENCE NO. Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the EDIT mode....

  • Page 1686

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1648 - 12.3.17 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (15-inch Display Unit) If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation enters single block mode after the block is executed. Procedure f...

  • Page 1687

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1649 - Explanation - Sequence number after the program is executed After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the program, the sequence number set for sequence number compensation and stop is decremented by one. ...

  • Page 1688

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1650 - 12.3.18 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15-inch Display Unit) Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined parts can be displayed. This data can be ...

  • Page 1689

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1651 - Explanation - PARTS TOTAL This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712. - PARTS REQUIRED It ...

  • Page 1690

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1652 - - Usage When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are incremented by one. Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 is executed every time the processing ...

  • Page 1691

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1653 - 12.3.19 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (15-inch Display Unit) Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and ext...

  • Page 1692

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1654 - 6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. The entered value is specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and pressing horizontal ...

  • Page 1693

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1655 - 12.3.20 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured (15-inch Display Unit) This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 1694

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1656 - 5 To display the WORK COORDINATES screen, press vertical soft key [WORK]. Fig. 12.3.20 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (15-inch) 6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set. 7 Press the address key for the axi...

  • Page 1695

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1657 - 12.3.21 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables (15-inch Display Unit) Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to #531 or #500 to #999) on the screen. The values for variables can be set on th...

  • Page 1696

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1658 - Explanation If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an indication below is provided. When the significant number of digits is 12 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 0): Variable value range ...

  • Page 1697

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1659 - 12.3.22 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data (15-inch Display Unit) Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros. RTM variables are divided into temporary real time macro variables...

  • Page 1698

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1660 - 4 To display or set real time custom macro variables of which values are stored at power-off, press vertical soft key [PERM. DATA]. 5 Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set using either of ...

  • Page 1699

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1661 - 4 Move the cursor to the number of a DI/DO variable you want to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the number and press horizontal soft key [NO. SRH]. • Move the cursor to a desired number by pressing page keys a...

  • Page 1700

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1662 - 12.3.23 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel (15-inch Display Unit) Operations on the MDI panel can substitute for the functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel. This means that a mode selection, jog ...

  • Page 1701

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1663 - Fig. 12.3.23 (b) With the manual handle feed function (15-inch) Fig. 12.3.23 (c) (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary positio...

  • Page 1702

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1664 - 6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the key together with an arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse. Fig. 12.3.23 (d) MDI arrow keys Explanation - Valid operations The valid operations on the ...

  • Page 1703

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1665 - 12.3.24 Setting and Displaying Tool Management Data (15-inch Display Unit) The tool management function totally manages tool information including tool offsets and tool life information. This function provides a magazine screen and ...

  • Page 1704

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1666 - 5 To set the tool management data number of a pot, type the tool management data number, then press MDI key . To delete the tool management data number set for a pot, follow the steps below. <1> Press horizontal soft key [ERAS...

  • Page 1705

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1667 - 12.3.24.2 Displaying and setting tool management screen (15-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 3 Press vertical soft key...

  • Page 1706

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1668 - 7 To end the edit operation, press horizontal soft key [EXIT]. This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen. Fig. 12.3.24.2 (b) Tool management data screen (check function) (15-inch) 8 When horizontal...

  • Page 1707

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1669 - Explanation - Another method Tool management data, customize data, and names set for tool states can be input/output also by using external I/O devices. See III-8, "DATA I/O". - Displayed information • Life information...

  • Page 1708

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1670 - NOTE 1 The tool types and data access information vary depending on the specifications defined by the machine tool builder. 2 The same type of tools must have the same life count type. Life counter: The number of use times/use peri...

  • Page 1709

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1671 - • Tool offset information Fig. 12.3.24.2 (e) Tool management data tool offset screen (15-inch) H : Tool length compensation number (for machining center systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. D : Cutter compensation n...

  • Page 1710

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1672 - • Customize information Fig. 12.3.24.2 (f) Tool management data customize data screen (15-inch) Customize 0 : Bit-type customize information. For each bit, 1 or 0 can be input. Customize 1 to 4 : Customize information. Any valu...

  • Page 1711

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1673 - - Tool management extension function When tool management extension functions are enabled, you can use the following functions in addition to the tool management functions: • A value with a decimal point can be set as customize d...

  • Page 1712

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1674 - 12.3.24.3 Each tool data screen (15-inch display unit) Each tool data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 3 Press vertical soft key [...

  • Page 1713

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1675 - When a data item is set as a screen element of the tool management data screen twice or more using the tool management data display customize function (one of the tool management extension functions), only the data item with the smal...

  • Page 1714

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1676 - Horizontal soft key [PUNCH] Writes data related to the tool management function. Can be used only in the standard mode. Requires placing the NC in the EDIT mode. Operation in the management data edit mode To edit data, press hori...

  • Page 1715

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1677 - 12.3.24.4 Displaying the total life of tools of the same type (15-inch display unit) Total life data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGE...

  • Page 1716

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1678 - Fig. 12.3.24.4 (b) Time display (15-inch) Displayed information S-NO. : Sequential number of each tool type TYPE NO. : Tool type number T-REM-LIFE : Total of remaining life values of tools with the same tool type number T-L-COUN...

  • Page 1717

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1679 - Key operations - MDI key operations Displays the previous page. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page. Displays the next page. The cursor moves to the first data item on that page. Moves the cursor up on the screen....

  • Page 1718

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1680 - NOTE 1 After horizontal soft key [T-ASCE -SORT], [T-DESC -SORT], [R-ASCE -SORT], or [R-DESC -SORT] is pressed, the cursor is positioned at the top of page 1 of the total life data screen. 2 When the power is turned on, data of the co...

  • Page 1719

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1681 - Detailed life data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 3 Press vertical soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total life data screen appears. 4 S...

  • Page 1720

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1682 - Key operations - MDI key operations Displays the previous page. Displays the next page. Moves the cursor up on the screen. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page. Moves the cursor down on the screen. The cursor move...

  • Page 1721

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1683 - 12.3.24.5 Tool geometry data screen (15-inch display unit) Tool geometry data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 3 Selecting vertica...

  • Page 1722

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1684 - Key operations - Operations in the standard mode MDI key operations Numeral keys Inputs a numeric value. Moves the cursor up on the screen. Moves the cursor down on the screen. Moves the cursor left on the screen. Moves the c...

  • Page 1723

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1685 - Example Set the edit mode. When the tool geometry with tool geometry number 1 occupies 1 pot in the left direction, 0.5 pots in the right direction, and 1.5 pots in the down direction, set data as shown in the figure below: Fig. 12...

  • Page 1724

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1686 - If a tool to be registered for a magazine is determined to interfere with another tool, the warning message “TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR:xxxx,xxxx” is displayed. xxxx indicates the tool number of each of the two tools. If a t...

  • Page 1725

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1687 - - Tool management screen You can use bit 2 of tool information to switch between a oversize tool and normal tool. For a oversize tool, set a tool geometry number fit for the tool. Fig. 12.3.24.5 (e) Bit for switching between a nor...

  • Page 1726

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1688 - 12.3.25 Displaying and Switching the Display Language (15-inch Display Unit) The language used for display can be switched to another language. A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of th...

  • Page 1727

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1689 - Explanation - Language switching The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0. - Selectable languages The display languages selectable on this screen are as follows: 1. English 2. Japanese ...

  • Page 1728

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1690 - 12.3.26 Protection of Data at Eight Levels (15-inch Display Unit) You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels and one of eight protection levels for each type of CNC and PMC data. When an attempt is made to change CNC and PMC dat...

  • Page 1729

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1691 - Explanation - Operation level setting To select operation level 0 to 3, use the corresponding memory protection key signal. To select operation level 4 to 7, use the corresponding password. Table 12.3.26.1 (a) Operation level settin...

  • Page 1730

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1692 - 12.3.26.2 Password modification (15-inch display unit) The current operation level is displayed. The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified. Displaying and setting the password modification screen Procedure 1 ...

  • Page 1731

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1693 - Explanation Up to eight characters (only uppercase alphabetic characters and numeric characters) can be input. NOTE 1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters are available: • Uppercase alp...

  • Page 1732

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1694 - 12.3.26.3 Protection level setting (15-inch display unit) The current operation level is displayed. The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed. The change protection level and output prot...

  • Page 1733

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1695 - Explanation When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation level, the protection level of the data item cannot be changed. The protection level of a data item cannot be changed to a protection level hig...

  • Page 1734

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1696 - NOTE 1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided. 2 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the protection level cannot be changed. 3 The protection level of data cannot be cha...

  • Page 1735

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1697 - 12.3.26.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program (15-inch display unit) The display/operations indicated below can be performed from the directory screen. The change protection level and output ...

  • Page 1736

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1698 - Explanation The change protection level (0 to 7) and output protection level (0 to 7) are displayed as "CHANGE PROTECTION LEVEL VALUE/OUTPUT PROTECTION LEVEL". NOTE 1 When the protection level of data is higher than the cu...

  • Page 1737

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1699 - 12.3.27 Precision Level Selection (15-inch Display Unit) An intermediate precision level between the parameters for emphasis on velocity (precision level 1) and the parameters for emphasis on precision (precision level 10) set on th...

  • Page 1738

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1700 - 5 To change the precision level, key in a desired precision level (1 to 10), then press the key on the MDI panel. 6 When the precision level is changed, a RMS value is obtained from the velocity-emphasized parameter set and precisi...

  • Page 1739

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1701 - 12.3.28 Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data (15-inch Display Unit) Displaying tool life management data on a screen enables the current status of tool life management to be grasped. Also on the screen, tool life manage...

  • Page 1740

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1702 - M If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1), the following parameters can be used to display arbitrary groups and remaining set values. • If bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1 An ...

  • Page 1741

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1703 - 12.3.28.1 Tool life management (list screen) (15-inch display unit) This screen can display the life management status of all tools in tool groups and whether the life of the tool groups has expired. It also enables you to set tool...

  • Page 1742

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1704 - NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, NEXT GROUP, USING GROUP, and SELECTED GROUP are each represented with an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. - Contents of (B) (B) displays the set life value, the ...

  • Page 1743

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1705 - If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, an arbitrary group number is displayed in the parentheses beside the tool group number. If no arbitrary group number is specified, “********” is displayed instead. Fig. 12.3.28.1 (b) Disp...

  • Page 1744

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1706 - NOTE As for USING GROUP or NEXT GROUP settings: 1) During automatic operation (OP signal = “1” and bit 1 (TCI) of parameter No. 6804 = 1), only the tool life counter can be changed. 2) In the reset state (OP signal = “0” an...

  • Page 1745

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1707 - Method 2 1 Press page key or to display desired groups. 2 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to the desired group at either the left or right. - Switching to the group editing screen Switch to tool life management (group ed...

  • Page 1746

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1708 - 12.3.28.2 Tool life management (group editing screen) (15-inch display unit) On this screen, it is possible to edit tool life management data (such as tool life value, tool life counter, and tool data) for the tool group of interest...

  • Page 1747

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1709 - SELECTED GROUP: Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way or life counting has been performed most recently. COUNT OVERRIDE: “1.0TIMES” is displayed if the tool life counter override signal is disabled (b...

  • Page 1748

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1710 - NOTE 1 The tool life counter indicates the count value for the tool indicated with @. 2 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 = 0, a tool number remains prefixed with @ even if the life of the tool has expired until another tool is s...

  • Page 1749

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1711 - T If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) Turret type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0) • OPTION GROUP: No display. • REST COUNT: Remaining set value used until a new tool...

  • Page 1750

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1712 - M T If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a tool life value, and a tool life counter value can be set for the tool group. First of all, add a tool number (T code). NOTE 1 As for USING GROUP or NEXT...

  • Page 1751

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1713 - Procedure - Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group number, and remaining set value Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group number,...

  • Page 1752

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1714 - - Adding tool numbers Tool numbers can be added to a tool group as follows: 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) just before a tool number to be added. 3 Enter the tool number from t...

  • Page 1753

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1715 - - Selecting tool skip Tool data can be placed in a skip state as follows: 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) for a tool you want to skip. 3 Press horizontal soft key [STATE]. 4 Pr...

  • Page 1754

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1716 - 12.3.29 Displaying and Setting Workpiece Setting Error Compensation Data (15-inch Display Unit) An amount of error used in workpiece setting error compensation can be set on the workpiece setting error screen. The workpiece setting ...

  • Page 1755

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1717 - • It must have been correctly specified which axis is a table rotation axis. If parameter No. 19680 = 12 (table rotation type), axis numbers must have been specified correctly in parameter Nos. 19681 and 19686. If parameter No. 1...

  • Page 1756

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1718 - 12.3.30 Displaying and Setting Pattern Data Inputs (15-inch Display Unit) Described below are a method for displaying machining menus (pattern menus) created by machine tool builders and a method for setting them. The descriptions...

  • Page 1757

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1719 - On this screen, a pattern to be used can be selected. The following two methods can be used to select patterns. • Using the cursor Move the cursor to a pattern name you want to select, using cursor key or , and then press soft ke...

  • Page 1758

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1720 - - Explanations about the custom macro screen (pattern data screen) BOLT HOLE An arbitrary character string consisting of 12 or less characters can be displayed as a pattern data title. TOOL. An arbitrary character string cons...

  • Page 1759

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1721 - 12.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or ...

  • Page 1760

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1722 - 12.4.25 Machining Parameter Tuning (15-inch Display Unit) .......1820 12.4.26 Displaying Memory Data (15-inch Display Unit) .............1828 12.4.27 Parameter Tuning Screen (15-inch Display Unit)..............1830 12.4.28 Periodic M...

  • Page 1761

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1723 - Screens of a 7.2/8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully utilize ...

  • Page 1762

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1724 - Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing Procedure 1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop. 2 Press function key . 3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen. Fig. 12.4.1 (b) SETTING screen (10....

  • Page 1763

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1725 - Explanation - Setting parameters with external input/output devices See III-8 for setting parameters with external input/output devices such as the memory card. - Parameters that require turning off the power Some parameters are n...

  • Page 1764

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1726 - 12.4.2 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can be compensated in detection unit per axis. Pitch error compensation data is set for each compen...

  • Page 1765

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1727 - • Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of the rotary axis type (for each axis): Parameter No. 3625 - Bi-directional pitch error compensation The bi-directional pitch error compensation function allows indepe...

  • Page 1766

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1728 - • Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter No. 3622 • Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end (for travel in the ne...

  • Page 1767

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1729 - 12.4.3 Displaying and Setting Three-Dimensional Error Compensation Data In ordinary pitch error compensation, compensation is applied to a specified compensation axis (single axis) by using its position information. For example, pit...

  • Page 1768

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1730 - The compensation amount Cx for X-axis at P is determined as follows: The compensation amount Cy and Cz on Y and Z-axes are determined in the same way. The actual compensation amounts are the calculated compensation amounts multipli...

  • Page 1769

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1731 - Displaying and setting three-dimensional error compensation data Procedure 1 Set the following parameters: • First compensation axis for three-dimensional error compensation : Parameter No. 10800 • Second compensation axis for th...

  • Page 1770

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1732 - 3 Press the continuous menu key several times, then press chapter selection soft key [3D ERR COMP]. The following screen appears: Fig. 12.4.3 (a) 3-DIMENSIONAL ERROR COMPENSATION screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the positi...

  • Page 1771

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1733 - 12.4.4 Servo Parameters This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time of field tuning of the machine tool. Procedure for servo parameter setting Procedure 1 Turn on the...

  • Page 1772

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1734 - 12.4.5 Servo Tuning Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set. Procedure for servo tuning Procedure 1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state. 2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and ...

  • Page 1773

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1735 - 12.4.6 Spindle Setting Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring are provided. Setting ...

  • Page 1774

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1736 - 12.4.7 Spindle Tuning Spindle tuning data is displayed and set. Setting for spindle tuning Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function key , continuous menu...

  • Page 1775

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1737 - 12.4.8 Spindle Monitor Spindle-related data is displayed. Displaying the spindle monitor Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function key , continuous menu k...

  • Page 1776

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1738 - 12.4.9 Color Setting Screen Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen. Displaying the color setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [COLOR]. 3 Pr...

  • Page 1777

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1739 - Procedure for operating the color setting screen - Modifying the color (color palette values) 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The soft key display changes to the following operation soft keys: 2 Move the cursor to a color number whose c...

  • Page 1778

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1740 - - Calling the color (color palette values) 1 Press operation soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area where color palette values are stored. (When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not...

  • Page 1779

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1741 - 12.4.10 Machining Parameter Tuning In AI contour control, by setting a velocity-emphasized parameter set and precision-emphasized parameter set and setting the precision level matching a machining condition such as rough machining o...

  • Page 1780

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1742 - Fig. 12.4.10 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.4.10 (b) Machining parameter tuning screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows: Press page key or , and cursor...

  • Page 1781

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1743 - 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining parameters are set. 8 In addition to the setting method described above, a parameter setting method using soft keys is available. Pressing soft key [INIT] displays the standard value (recomm...

  • Page 1782

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1744 - - Acceleration change time (bell-shaped) Set a time constant for a bell-shaped portion in acceleration/ deceleration before look-ahead interpolation. Unit of data: ms The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is r...

  • Page 1783

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1745 - - Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations Unit of data: mm/sec2, inch/sec2, deg/sec2 (machine unit) Set an...

  • Page 1784

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1746 - - Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Unit of data: % Set the ratio (in %) of the change time of jerk control to the change time of acceleration in smoo...

  • Page 1785

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1747 - - Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. Unit of data: ms The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in t...

  • Page 1786

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1748 - - Arbitrary items Two arbitrary parameters can be registered. Each item can correspond to a CNC parameter or servo parameter. A parameter number corresponding to each item is to be specified with parameters. As indicated below, set...

  • Page 1787

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1749 - 12.4.11 Displaying Memory Data The contents of the CNC memory can be displayed starting at a specified address. Displaying memory data Procedure 1 Set bit 0 (MEM) of parameter No. 8950 to 1 to display the memory contents display sc...

  • Page 1788

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1750 - Explanation A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options: Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal) Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal) Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal) Double display (8 bytes in de...

  • Page 1789

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1751 - 12.4.12 Parameter Tuning Screen The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the following: 1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collec...

  • Page 1790

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1752 - Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen Procedure 1 Set the MDI mode. 2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for "PARAMETER WRITE" in Sub...

  • Page 1791

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1753 - Returning to the menu screen Procedure 1 Press soft key [SELECT] on the parameter tuning menu screen described in Subsection III-12.4.12.1. The screen and soft keys shown below are displayed. (The screen below is displayed when "...

  • Page 1792

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1754 - Explanation - Items displayed with [START UP] The items of [START UP] indicate the screens for setting the minimum required parameters for starting up the machine. Table 12.4.12.1 (a) Items displayed with [START UP] Display item De...

  • Page 1793

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1755 - 12.4.12.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified. The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by ...

  • Page 1794

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1756 - 5 Press soft key [INIT]. The standard value (recommended by FANUC) for the item selected by the cursor is displayed in the key input buffer. Pressing soft key [EXEC] in this state initializes the item to the standard value. 6 Press s...

  • Page 1795

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1757 - 12.4.12.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) This screen enables the CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and acceleration/deceleration to be displayed and set. The parameters displayed can be divided into four...

  • Page 1796

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1758 - 12.4.12.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FS...

  • Page 1797

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1759 - 12.4.12.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting...

  • Page 1798

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1760 - 12.4.12.7 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified. For the display and setting procedure, see the description of the parameter tuning screen (system setting) in Subsect...

  • Page 1799

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1761 - 12.4.12.8 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings) The parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits and whether to display the servo setting and spindle tuning screens can be displayed and modified. Moreover, ...

  • Page 1800

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1762 - 12.4.12.9 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo tuning screen, see the description of the servo tuning screen in Subsectio...

  • Page 1801

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1763 - 12.4.12.11 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the machining parameter tuning screen, see the descrip...

  • Page 1802

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1764 - Explanation - Parameters displayed for parameter tuning Table 12.4.12 (a) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (1) Menu Group Parameter No. Name Brief description Standard setting981 Sets the path of each axis. 982 Sets the...

  • Page 1803

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1765 - Table 12.4.12 (b) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (2) Menu Group Parameter No. Name Brief description Standard setting3716#0 A/Ss Sets the type of spindle motor: 0:Analaog/1:Serial. 3717 Sets a motor number to be assigned...

  • Page 1804

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1766 - Table 12.4.12 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3) Menu Group Parameter No. Name Brief description Standard settingAXIS SETTING Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes: 0:Metric (millimeter machine) 1:In...

  • Page 1805

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1767 - Table 12.4.12 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard settingAXIS SETTING Coordinate 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position 1241 Machine coordina...

  • Page 1806

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1768 - 12.4.13 Periodic Maintenance Screen Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, and the method for co...

  • Page 1807

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1769 - 2 Setting a life time, remaining time, and count type Select the life time, remaining time, and count type of a consumable to be displayed from the setting screen. For the procedure, see Remaining time in Status screen. Procedure fo...

  • Page 1808

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1770 - 4 The screen display returns to the status screen, and the item name selected on the menu screen is added to the status screen. Initially, there is no item name set on the machine menu screen, so item names must be registered in adv...

  • Page 1809

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1771 - Setting the remaining time 1 On the status screen, place the cursor on an item for which the remaining time is to be set (the item name must have been set in advance). 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press soft key [CHANGE]. 3 The ...

  • Page 1810

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1772 - - Life time Set the life time of a consumable. Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The life time is then set, and the same value is set also as the remaining time. At thi...

  • Page 1811

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1773 - - Count type As the count type, select the way of counting. Place the cursor on the count type of a target registration number, then press soft key [TYPE]. Count types are displayed as soft keys as shown below. Select one of these ...

  • Page 1812

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1774 - - Displaying the screen 1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [MACHINE]. On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods: • Registration from a program • Registra...

  • Page 1813

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1775 - NOTE 1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names. 2 When an item name ...

  • Page 1814

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1776 - 12.4.14 System Configuration Screen The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software. Procedure for displaying the screen Procedure 1 Press the key to display a screen that sh...

  • Page 1815

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1777 - Hardware configuration screen This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC. Fig. 12.4.14 (b) Hardware configuration screen Software configuration screen This screen shows the names and series/editions of the ...

  • Page 1816

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1778 - Servo information screen When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo motors and servo amplifier modules) can be displayed on the NC. Displaying the screen 1 When the system config...

  • Page 1817

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1779 - 12.4.15 Overview of the History Function The history function makes it possible to record a history of operations performed by the operator, alarms and external operator messages issued, and other history data, check the history, an...

  • Page 1818

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1780 - NOTE 1 History data remains even after the power is turned off. Memory clear operation, however, erases history data as well. 2 Set the time and date correctly on the setting screen. 3 All history data including data of alarms, exter...

  • Page 1819

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1781 - 12.4.15.1 Alarm history From all history data recorded, only alarm history is extracted and displayed on the screen. Note that when the amount of history data exceeds the storage capacity, history data is automatically erased in ord...

  • Page 1820

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1782 - Procedure 1 Press function key to display a screen of parameters and so on. 2 Press return menu key . 3 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [HISTRY] is displayed. 4 Press soft key [HISTRY]. The alarm history scre...

  • Page 1821

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1783 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3196 HAL [Data type] Bit # 7 HAL When an alarm is issued, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinates, and machine coordinates present at the issuance of the alarm) is: 0: Recorde...

  • Page 1822

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1784 - 12.4.15.2 External operator message history From all history data recorded, only external operator message history and macro message history are extracted and displayed on the screen. When the amount of history data exceeds the stor...

  • Page 1823

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1785 - Erasing history data from the external operator message history screen Procedure 1 Display the external operator message history screen. 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 3 Press soft key [CLEAR]. All history data is then erased. NOTE ...

  • Page 1824

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1786 - 12.4.15.3 Operation history This function displays a history of the operator's key operations and signal operations made when a failure occurred or an alarm was issued, and also information about alarms. The following data is record...

  • Page 1825

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1787 - Parameter setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3106 OPH [Data type] Bit # 4 OPH The operation history screen is: 0: Not displayed. 1: Displayed. 3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history [Input ...

  • Page 1826

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1788 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3196 HAL HOM HMV HPM HWO HTO [Data type] Bit # 0 HTO A modification history of tool offset data is: 0: Not recorded. 1: Recorded. # 1 HWO A modification history of workpiece offset data/extende...

  • Page 1827

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1789 - 12991 (2nd) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal ...

  • Page 1828

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1790 - 12996 (7th) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal ...

  • Page 1829

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1791 - Screen display Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is displayed. 3 Press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY], then press newly displayed soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. The opera...

  • Page 1830

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1792 - Displayed information 1 Serial number and display start history number/total number of history data items A serial number is indicated on the left side of each recorded history data item. A smaller serial number indicates an older da...

  • Page 1831

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1793 - • I/O signals When bit 6 (HDE) of parameter No. 3195 is set to 0, I/O signals specified on the operation history signal selection screen are recorded. Recorded signals are indicated on a bit-by-bit basis with information about the...

  • Page 1832

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1794 - v Date and time when history data was erased. These are displayed with black characters. NOTE 1 When times are recorded at regular intervals, if there is no data to record within an interval, the time is not recorded. (When the date...

  • Page 1833

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1795 - 3 Modification of tool offset data If bit 0 (HTO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when tool offset data is modified, the number and type of the tool offset are recorded as well as the tool offset data before modification, the too...

  • Page 1834

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1796 - 12.4.15.4 Selecting operation history signals I/O signals to be recorded as history data can be selected. Up to 60 signals can be set. Setting data 1 Press function key . 2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [O...

  • Page 1835

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1797 - Clearing data individually 1 Display the operation history signal selection screen. 2 Move the cursor to the data to be cleared. 3 Press soft key [DELETE]. 4 Press soft key [EXEC]. Clearing all data 1 Display the operation histor...

  • Page 1836

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1798 - 12.4.15.5 Outputting all history data All history data can be output to external input/output devices. It is impossible, however, to output history data individually. Procedure 1 Make an output device ready for output. 2 Set the ED...

  • Page 1837

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1799 - <Example> • Alarm 01_SR01973 *G0. G97. G69. G99. G21. G50.2 G25. G13.1 B0. D0. E0. *F100. H0. M10. *N123. Test_ S1000. T1010. X1 ABS 197.999 MCN 197.999 Y1 ABS -199806.00 MCN -199806.00 Z1 ABS 297.009 MCN 0.123 C1 ABS 10395...

  • Page 1838

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1800 - <Example> Tool Offset 01_X0002 0.000 → 1 at 12:15:43 Tool Offset 02_XW0001 -9999.999 → 9999.999 at 12:15:46 Tool Offset 01_RG0032 0.000 → 0.003 at 12:15:52 Tool Offset 02_T0001 5. → 2. at 19:34:11 Tool Offset 02_W...

  • Page 1839

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1801 - 8 Modification of custom macro common variables (#100 to #999) After "Macro variable", "path-number_", "#variable-number", "common-variable-value-before-modification", "common-variable-val...

  • Page 1840

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1802 - Screens of a 15-inch display unit 12.4.16 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15-inch Display Unit) When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to ...

  • Page 1841

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1803 - 5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value and the value is displayed. 6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing. Procedure for e...

  • Page 1842

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1804 - Explanation - Setting parameters with external input/output devices See III-8 for setting parameters with external input/output devices such as the memory card. - Parameters that require turning off the power Some parameters are n...

  • Page 1843

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1805 - 12.4.17 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data (15-inch Display Unit) If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can be compensated in detection unit per axis. Pitch error compensation dat...

  • Page 1844

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1806 - • Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of the rotary axis type (for each axis): Parameter No. 3625 - Bi-directional pitch error compensation The bi-directional pitch error compensation function allows indepe...

  • Page 1845

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1807 - • Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter No. 3622 • Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end (for travel in the ne...

  • Page 1846

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1808 - 12.4.18 Displaying and Setting Three-Dimensional Error Compensation Data (15-inch Display Unit) In ordinary pitch error compensation, compensation is applied to a specified compensation axis (single axis) by using its position infor...

  • Page 1847

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1809 - The compensation amount Cx for X-axis at P is determined as follows: The compensation amount Cy and Cz on Y and Z-axes are determined in the same way. The actual compensation amounts are the calculated compensation amounts multipli...

  • Page 1848

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1810 - Displaying and setting three-dimensional error compensation data Procedure 1 Set the following parameters: • First compensation axis for three-dimensional error compensation : Parameter No. 10800 • Second compensation axis for th...

  • Page 1849

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1811 - 3 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times, then press vertical soft key [3D ERR COMP]. The following screen appears: Fig. 12.4.18 (a) 3-DIMENSIONAL ERROR COMPENSATION screen (15-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the position of ...

  • Page 1850

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1812 - 12.4.19 Servo Parameters (15-inch Display Unit) This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time of field tuning of the machine tool. Procedure for servo parameter setting...

  • Page 1851

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1813 - 12.4.20 Servo Tuning (15-inch Display Unit) Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set. Procedure for servo tuning Procedure 1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state. 2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to di...

  • Page 1852

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1814 - 12.4.21 Spindle Setting (15-inch Display Unit) Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring...

  • Page 1853

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1815 - 12.4.22 Spindle Tuning (15-inch Display Unit) Spindle tuning data is displayed and set. Setting for spindle tuning Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press functi...

  • Page 1854

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1816 - 12.4.23 Spindle Monitor (15-inch Display Unit) Spindle-related data is displayed. Displaying the spindle monitor Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function...

  • Page 1855

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1817 - 12.4.24 Color Setting Screen (15-inch Display Unit) Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen. Displaying the color setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to d...

  • Page 1856

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1818 - Procedure for operating the color setting screen - Modifying the color (color palette values) 1 The following horizontal soft keys are displayed: 2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are to be modified. T...

  • Page 1857

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1819 - - Calling the color (color palette values) 1 Press horizontal soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area where color palette values are stored. 2 Press horizontal soft key [RECALL]. The horizontal soft key d...

  • Page 1858

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1820 - 12.4.25 Machining Parameter Tuning (15-inch Display Unit) In AI contour control, by setting a velocity-emphasized parameter set and precision-emphasized parameter set and setting the precision level matching a machining condition su...

  • Page 1859

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1821 - Procedure for machining parameter tuning Procedure 1 Set the MDI mode. 2 Press function key . 3 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display vertical soft key [MCHN TUNING]. The following screen appears: Fig. 12.4.2...

  • Page 1860

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1822 - The table below indicates the initial settings. Table 12.4.25 (a) Initial settings AI contour control Setting item Emphasis on velocity(LV1) Emphasis on precision (LV10) Unit Acceleration rate of acceleration/deceleration before in...

  • Page 1861

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1823 - - Acceleration change time (bell-shaped) Set a time constant for a bell-shaped portion in acceleration/ deceleration before look-ahead interpolation. Unit of data: ms The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is r...

  • Page 1862

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1824 - - Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations Unit of data: mm/sec2, inch/sec2, deg/sec2 (machine unit) Set an...

  • Page 1863

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1825 - - Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Unit of data: % Set the ratio (in %) of the change time of jerk control to the change time of acceleration in smoo...

  • Page 1864

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1826 - - Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. Unit of data: ms The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in t...

  • Page 1865

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1827 - - Arbitrary items Two arbitrary parameters can be registered. Each item can correspond to a CNC parameter or servo parameter. A parameter number corresponding to each item is to be specified with parameters. As indicated below, set...

  • Page 1866

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1828 - 12.4.26 Displaying Memory Data (15-inch Display Unit) The contents of the CNC memory can be displayed starting at a specified address. Displaying memory data Procedure 1 Set bit 0 (MEM) of parameter No. 8950 to 1 to display the mem...

  • Page 1867

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1829 - Explanation A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options: Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal) Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal) Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal) Double display (8 bytes in de...

  • Page 1868

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1830 - 12.4.27 Parameter Tuning Screen (15-inch Display Unit) The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the following: 1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine i...

  • Page 1869

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1831 - Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen Procedure 1 Set the MDI mode. 2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for "PARAMETER WRITE" in Sub...

  • Page 1870

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1832 - Returning to the menu screen Procedure 1 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT] on the parameter tuning menu screen described in Subsection III-12.4.27.1. The screen and soft keys shown below are displayed. (The screen below is displayed...

  • Page 1871

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1833 - Explanation - Items displayed with [START UP] The items of [START UP] indicate the screens for setting the minimum required parameters for starting up the machine. Table 12.4.27.1 (a) Items displayed with [START UP] Display item Des...

  • Page 1872

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1834 - 12.4.27.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15-inch display unit) This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified. The parameters can be initialized to the standard ...

  • Page 1873

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1835 - 5 Press horizontal soft key [INIT]. The standard value (recommended by FANUC) for the item selected by the cursor is displayed in the key input buffer. Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] in this state initializes the item to the sta...

  • Page 1874

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1836 - 12.4.27.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (15-inch display unit) This screen enables the CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and acceleration/deceleration to be displayed and set. The parameters displayed c...

  • Page 1875

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1837 - 12.4.27.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB amplifier setting screen, see th...

  • Page 1876

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1838 - 12.4.27.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description o...

  • Page 1877

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1839 - 12.4.27.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the servo setting screen can be displayed. For details of the servo setting screen, see the description of the servo ...

  • Page 1878

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1840 - 12.4.27.7 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) (15-inch display unit) The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified. For the display and setting procedure, see the description of the parameter tuning screen (syst...

  • Page 1879

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1841 - 12.4.27.8 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings) (15-inch display unit) The parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits and whether to display the servo setting and spindle tuning screens can be displayed a...

  • Page 1880

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1842 - 12.4.27.9 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo tuning screen, see the description of the servo tun...

  • Page 1881

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1843 - 12.4.27.11 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen (15-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the machining parameter tuning ...

  • Page 1882

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1844 - *1 : The value 1 is set for the paths as many as the number of loader paths starting from the greatest path number. For path 1, the value 0 is set at all times. Example) When the number of loader paths is 3 in a 10-path system:The va...

  • Page 1883

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1845 - Table 12.4.27 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3) Menu Group Parameter No. Name Brief description Standard settingAXIS SETTING Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes: 0:Metric (millimeter machine) 1:In...

  • Page 1884

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1846 - Table 12.4.27 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard settingAXIS SETTING Coordinate 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position 1241 Machine coordina...

  • Page 1885

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1847 - 12.4.28 Periodic Maintenance Screen (15-inch Display Unit) Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time...

  • Page 1886

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1848 - 2 Setting a life time, remaining time, and count type Select the life time, remaining time, and count type of a consumable to be displayed from the setting screen. For the procedure, see Remaining time in Status screen. Procedure fo...

  • Page 1887

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1849 - 4 The screen display returns to the status screen, and the item name selected on the menu screen is added to the status screen. Initially, there is no item name set on the machine menu screen, so item names must be registered in adv...

  • Page 1888

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1850 - Setting the remaining time 1 On the status screen, place the cursor on an item for which the remaining time is to be set (the item name must have been set in advance). 2 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE]. 3 The screen display cha...

  • Page 1889

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1851 - - Life time Set the life time of a consumable. Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The life time is then set, and the same value is set also as the remaining t...

  • Page 1890

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1852 - - Count type As the count type, select the way of counting. Place the cursor on the count type of a target registration number, then press horizontal soft key [TYPE]. Count types are displayed as soft keys as shown below. Select on...

  • Page 1891

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1853 - - Displaying the screen 1 When the status screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [MACHINE]. On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods: • Registration from a program •...

  • Page 1892

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1854 - NOTE 1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names. 2 When an item name ...

  • Page 1893

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1855 - 12.4.29 System Configuration Screen (15-inch Display Unit) The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software. Procedure for displaying the screen Procedure 1 Press the key, the...

  • Page 1894

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1856 - Hardware configuration screen This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC. Fig. 12.4.29 (b) Hardware configuration screen Software configuration screen This screen shows the names and series/editions of the ...

  • Page 1895

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1857 - Servo information screen When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo motors and servo amplifier modules) can be displayed on the NC. Displaying the screen 1 When the system config...

  • Page 1896

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1858 - 12.4.30 Overview of the History Function (15-inch Display Unit) The history function makes it possible to record a history of operations performed by the operator, alarms and external operator messages issued, and other history data...

  • Page 1897

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1859 - NOTE 1 History data remains even after the power is turned off. Memory clear operation, however, erases history data as well. 2 Set the time and date correctly on the setting screen. 3 All history data including data of alarms, exter...

  • Page 1898

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1860 - 12.4.30.1 Alarm history From all history data recorded, only alarm history is extracted and displayed on the screen. Note that when the amount of history data exceeds the storage capacity, history data is automatically erased in ord...

  • Page 1899

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1861 - Procedure 1 Press function key to display a screen of parameters and so on. 2 Press vertical soft key [HISTRY] to display the alarm history screen. 3 The screen display can be changed to the previous page and the next page by using ...

  • Page 1900

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1862 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3196 HAL [Data type] Bit # 7 HAL When an alarm is issued, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinates, and machine coordinates present at the issuance of the alarm) is: 0: Recorde...

  • Page 1901

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1863 - 12.4.30.2 External operator message history From all history data recorded, only external operator message history and macro message history are extracted and displayed on the screen. When the amount of history data exceeds the stor...

  • Page 1902

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1864 - Erasing history data from the external operator message history screen Procedure 1 Display the external operator message history screen. 2 Press horizontal soft key [CLEAR]. All history data is then erased. NOTE When history data...

  • Page 1903

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1865 - 12.4.30.3 Operation history This function displays a history of the operator's key operations and signal operations made when a failure occurred or an alarm was issued, and also information about alarms. The following data is record...

  • Page 1904

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1866 - Parameter setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3106 OPH [Data type] Bit # 4 OPH The operation history screen is: 0: Not displayed. 1: Displayed. 3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history [Input...

  • Page 1905

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1867 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3196 HAL HOM HMV HPM HWO HTO [Data type] Bit # 0 HTO A modification history of tool offset data is: 0: Not recorded. 1: Recorded. # 1 HWO A modification history of workpiece offset data/extende...

  • Page 1906

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1868 - 12991 (2nd) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal ...

  • Page 1907

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1869 - 12996 (7th) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal ...

  • Page 1908

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1870 - Screen display Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is displayed. 3 Press vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY], then press newly displayed vertical soft ke...

  • Page 1909

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1871 - Displayed information 1 Serial number and display start history number/total number of history data items A serial number is indicated on the left side of each recorded history data item. A smaller serial number indicates an older da...

  • Page 1910

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1872 - • I/O signals When bit 6 (HDE) of parameter No. 3195 is set to 0, I/O signals specified on the operation history signal selection screen are recorded. Recorded signals are indicated on a bit-by-bit basis with information about the...

  • Page 1911

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1873 - v Date and time when history data was erased. These are displayed with black characters. NOTE 1 When times are recorded at regular intervals, if there is no data to record within an interval, the time is not recorded. (When the date...

  • Page 1912

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1874 - 3 Modification of tool offset data If bit 0 (HTO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when tool offset data is modified, the number and type of the tool offset are recorded as well as the tool offset data before modification, the too...

  • Page 1913

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1875 - 12.4.30.4 Selecting operation history signals I/O signals to be recorded as history data can be selected. Up to 60 signals can be set. Setting data 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times until ve...

  • Page 1914

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1876 - Clearing data individually 1 Display the operation history signal selection screen. 2 Move the cursor to the data to be cleared. 3 Press horizontal soft key [DELETE]. 4 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC]. Clearing all data 1 Displa...

  • Page 1915

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1877 - 12.4.30.5 Outputting all history data All history data can be output to external input/output devices. It is impossible, however, to output history data individually. Procedure 1 Make an output device ready for output. 2 Set the ED...

  • Page 1916

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1878 - <Example> • Alarm 01_SR01973 *G0. G97. G69. G99. G21. G50.2 G25. G13.1 B0. D0. E0. *F100. H0. M10. *N123. Test_ S1000. T1010. X1 ABS 197.999 MCN 197.999 Y1 ABS -199806.00 MCN -199806.00 Z1 ABS 297.009 MCN 0.123 C1 ABS 10395...

  • Page 1917

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1879 - <Example> Tool Offset 01_X0002 0.000 → 1 at 12:15:43 Tool Offset 02_XW0001 -9999.999 → 9999.999 at 12:15:46 Tool Offset 01_RG0032 0.000 → 0.003 at 12:15:52 Tool Offset 02_T0001 5. → 2. at 19:34:11 Tool Offset 02_W...

  • Page 1918

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1880 - 8 Modification of custom macro common variables (#100 to #999) After "Macro variable", "path-number_", "#variable-number", "common-variable-value-before-modification", "common-variable-val...

  • Page 1919

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1881 - 12.5 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY By pressing the function key , data such as alarms, and alarm history data can be displayed. For information relating to alarm display, see Section III-7.1. For information relating to alarm ...

  • Page 1920

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1882 - 12.6 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER/NAME, SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS, AND WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION The program number, program name, sequence number, and current CNC status are always displayed on ...

  • Page 1921

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1883 - 12.6.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the next to last line on the screen allowing th...

  • Page 1922

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1884 - MSTR: Manual numerical command start state (The state in which a manual numerical command is being executed)Alternatively, tool retract and recover operation state (The state in which a recover operation and repositioning operation a...

  • Page 1923

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1885 - AICC1: Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control I mode. AICC2 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control II mode. MEM-CHK : Indicates that a program memory check is being made...

  • Page 1924

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1886 - Example 3) When a parameter is output to an external input/output device (10) Tool post name The number of a path whose status is indicated is displayed. PATH1 : Indicates that the status being indicated is for path 1. Other na...

  • Page 1925

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1887 - Screens of a 15-inch display unit 12.6.3 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and Sequence Number (15-inch Display Unit) The number and name of the program currently selected or currently executed and the current sequence n...

  • Page 1926

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1888 - 12.6.4 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation (15-inch Display Unit) The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the next to last line on...

  • Page 1927

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1889 - MSTR: Manual numerical command start state (The state in which a manual numerical command is being executed)Alternatively, tool retract and recover operation state (The state in which a recover operation and repositioning operation a...

  • Page 1928

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1890 - AICC1: Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control I mode. AICC2 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control II mode. MEM-CHK : Indicates that a program memory check is being made...

  • Page 1929

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1891 - Example 2) When a parameter is entered Example 3) When a parameter is output to an external input/output device (10) Tool post name The number of a path whose status is indicated is displayed. PATH1 : Indicates that the sta...

  • Page 1930

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1892 - 12.7 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION Overview Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the life of the LCD. To prevent this, the CNC screen ...

  • Page 1931

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1893 - - Screen erasure by using the key + function key When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the key and a function key. - Set time Only the time set in parameter No. 3123 for path 1 is vali...

  • Page 1932

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1894 - 12.8 LOAD METER SCREEN Overview The servo and spindle load meters can be displayed in place of the modal code display part and the remaining travel distance part of the current position display on the program check screen. This func...

  • Page 1933

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1895 - Fig. 12.8.1 (b) Spindle load meter Screen switching The servo load meter and spindle load meter are displayed by pressing soft key [MONITOR] on the left side of the screen. Initially the servo load meter is displayed. Each time sof...

  • Page 1934

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1896 - 12.8.2 Two-Path Display and Three-Path Display Screen layout In the two- or three-path display mode, the modal information display part on the program check screen can be replaced by the servo or spindle load meter. Fig. 12.4.30.5...

  • Page 1935

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1897 - Screen switching By pressing soft key [LOAD METER], the screen display can be switched among the modal information display, servo load meter display, and spindle load meter display. Modal information ...

  • Page 1936

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1898 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3192 PLD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 7 PLD When the current position is indicated for a path, and when the program check screen is displayed in a two- or three-pa...

  • Page 1937

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1899 - 13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION Chapter 13, "GRAPHIC FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 13.1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY...........................................................1900 13.2 DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY...................................

  • Page 1938

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1900 - 13.1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY The graphic display functions enable drawing of the tool path of the program currently used for machining. These functions are intended to display the movement of the tool during automatic operation or during manual operat...

  • Page 1939

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1901 - Fig. 13.1 (b) Tool path graphic screen (T series) - Tool path In a graphic coordinate system set by the graphic parameters described later, a tool path in the workpiece coordinate system is drawn. Even when the tool position changes discon...

  • Page 1940

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1902 - Graphic parameter screen Explanation Press the function key then press the [PARAM] soft key to display the tool path graphic screen. On the graphic parameter screen, make settings necessary for drawing a tool path. The graphic parameter scree...

  • Page 1941

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1903 - - Graphic parameter screen page 2 Fig. 13.1 (d) Graphic parameter screen page 2 On graphic parameter screen page 2, graphic colors, rotation angles, and whether to perform automatic erase operation are set. - Graphic parameter screen page...

  • Page 1942

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1904 - T - Graphic parameter screen page 1 Fig. 13.1 (f) Graphic parameter screen page 1 On graphic parameter screen page 1, a graphic coordinate system, graphic range, and so forth are set. In the setting of a graphic coordinate system, the coor...

  • Page 1943

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1905 - - Graphic parameter screen page 2 Fig. 13.1 (g) Graphic parameter screen page 2 (T series) On graphic parameter screen page 2, graphic colors and whether to perform automatic erase operation are set. - Graphic parameter screen page 3 Fig....

  • Page 1944

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1906 - Graphic parameter setting Explanation For tool path drawing, a graphic coordinate system, tool path graphic colors, and graphic range need to be set on the graphic parameter screen. The graphic parameters to be set on the graphic parameter scr...

  • Page 1945

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1907 - M - Horizontal rotation angle When a three-dimensional graphic coordinate system such as 4.XYZ or 5.ZXY is selected, the coordinate system can be rotated with the horizontal plane used as the rotation plane. Set a rotation angle from -360° t...

  • Page 1946

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1908 - Y XZX'Z'Vertical rotation axis rotation plane Initial verticalrotation axisVertical rotation plane 20°65°Y' Vertical rotation axis Fig. 13.1 (l) Coordinate system rotation in vertical direction - Graphic color Set a graphic color number ...

  • Page 1947

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1909 - When a scale is automatically determined, the scale is clamped to within the range 0.01 to 100. Moreover, a maximum value must be greater than the corresponding minimum value. NOTE When the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic ra...

  • Page 1948

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1910 - Operation for graphic parameter setting Operation - Moving the cursor The cursor can be moved to a desired parameter by the page key or and the cursor key , , , or . With the cursor keys, however, you cannot move from page 1 or 2 to page 3....

  • Page 1949

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1911 - NOTE 1 Set the machine lock state to perform drawing only without moving the tool. 2 When the feedrate is high, the tool path may not be drawn correctly. In such a case, decrease the feedrate by performing, for example, a dry run. Enlarged/re...

  • Page 1950

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1912 - - Procedure for changing the graphic range with a rectangle A tool path can be drawn by enlarging a specified rectangular area. (1) Press the [SCALE] soft key then the [RECTANGLE] soft key. Two cursors, one in red and the other in yellow, app...

  • Page 1951

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1913 - 13.2 DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY Overview The dynamic graphic display function has two features: • Path Drawing The path of coordinates specified in a program is drawn on the screen. By displaying a travel path on the screen, the path can be ch...

  • Page 1952

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1914 - 13.2.1 Path Drawing Overview The following tool path drawing screens are used to make various settings and execute drawing: • GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen This screen is used to set data needed for tool path drawing. • PATH...

  • Page 1953

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1915 - 13.2.1.1 GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen This screen is used to set graphic parameters needed for tool path drawing. Data set using this screen is made valid by displaying the PATH GRAPHIC screen or executing drawing. If a tool pat...

  • Page 1954

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1916 - Fig. 13.2.1.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page) 2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a desired setting item. 3 Move the cursor to a desired sett...

  • Page 1955

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1917 - Explanation The setting items on the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen are described below. - Graphic coordinate system Select a graphic coordinate system for drawing from the following and set its number. YXSetting=0 (XY)ZYSetting=1 (ZY) Z YSetting=...

  • Page 1956

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1918 - - Blank figure With a drawing program, set the figure, position, and dimensions of a blank to be machined. The graphic range where the blank figure is included in the drawing area is automatically decided by the value set here. NOTE 1 With a ...

  • Page 1957

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1919 - Dimensions Set the dimensions of each type of blank figure as indicated below. Type of blank figureDimension I Dimension J Dimension K Rectangular parallelepipedLength in X-axis direction Length in Y-axis direction Length in Z-axis directio...

  • Page 1958

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1920 - - Rotation angle Set a rotating angle of the graphic coordinate system that centers on the graphic range center. The rotating angle is a range of -360°-+360°. Set a rotating angle as a reference position (position of the rotating angle 0°) ...

  • Page 1959

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1921 - - Graphic color Set colors to be used for tool path drawing. The colors that can be set are indicated below together with their setting values: Graphic color WhiteRedGreenYellow Blue Purple Light blueWhiteSetting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Path...

  • Page 1960

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1922 - 13.2.1.2 PATH GRAPHIC screen The PATH GRAPHIC screen is used to draw a tool path. The following operations can be performed: • Starting/ending tool path drawing • Rewind of a drawing target program • Erasing a drawn tool path The scre...

  • Page 1961

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1923 - Path Graphic Screen Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen. 2 Press the [PATH EXEC] soft key. The PATH GRAPHIC screen is displayed. Fig. 13...

  • Page 1962

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1924 - 6 Press the [ROTATION] soft key to display the soft keys for rotating the graphic coordinate system. Fig. 13.2.1.2 (f) PATH GRAPHIC screen (rotating the graphic coordinate system) For the operation of each soft key, see the explanation. Ex...

  • Page 1963

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1925 - NOTE The file that can be selected as the drawing target program is only a file that can be selected as the main program. - Rewind of a drawing target program If the execution of drawing of a selected program has ended or is stopped halfway,...

  • Page 1964

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1926 - NOTE When the new path was drawn by the operation of starting drawing without erasing of the old path before the operation, it is impossible to redraw the old path by each operation of enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range and changing/r...

  • Page 1965

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1927 - - Erasing a drawn tool path Press the [ERASE] soft key to erase a drawn tool path. NOTE 1 If the screen display is switched or the path is switched during tool path drawing, the background operation is stopped to end drawing. 2 A tool path on...

  • Page 1966

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1928 - - Changing the graphic coordinate system The following soft keys displayed by step 5 are used. A graphic coordinate system selected here is the same one as set in the graphic parameter for the graphic coordinate system. • [XY] soft key This ...

  • Page 1967

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1929 - - Rotating the graphic coordinate system The following soft keys displayed by step 6 are used. • [↑] soft key This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system upward. • [↓] soft key This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate syste...

  • Page 1968

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1930 - 13.2.1.3 PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen The tool position during operation can be checked by displaying the cursor for indicating the tool position during operation on the tool path drawn on the PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen. The scree...

  • Page 1969

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1931 - Path Graphic (Tool Position) Screen Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the PATH GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen. 2 Press the [TOOL POS] soft key. The screen display changes to the PATH GRAPH...

  • Page 1970

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1932 - Explanation Use the following procedure to check the tool position during operation on the PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen: (1) Select a drawing target program for operation. (2) Draw the tool path of the selected program on the PATH GRAPH...

  • Page 1971

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1933 - 13.2.2 Animation Overview For animation drawing, make necessary settings and perform operations for drawing execution on the following screens: • GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen On this screen, data required to execute animation ...

  • Page 1972

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1934 - 13.2.2.1 GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) SCREEN This screen is used to set graphic parameters needed for animation drawing. Data set using this screen is made valid by displaying the ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen or executing drawing. Graphic ...

  • Page 1973

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1935 - Fig. 13.2.2.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page) 2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a desired setting item. 3 Move the cursor to a desired sett...

  • Page 1974

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1936 - Explanation The setting items on the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen are described below. However, the graphic parameters listed below are shared for tool path drawing. So, refer to the explanation of the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen for tool path drawin...

  • Page 1975

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1937 - Dimensions Set the dimensions of each type of blank figure as indicated below. Type of blank figureDimension I Dimension J Dimension K Rectangular parallelepipedLength in X-axis direction Length in Y-axis direction Length in Z-axis directi...

  • Page 1976

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1938 - - Tool length offset (Anime) For animation drawing, whether to enable or disable the tool length offset can be selected. Setting 0: The tool length offset is disabled for drawing. 1: The tool length offset is enabled for drawing. NOTE In a...

  • Page 1977

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1939 - 13.2.2.2 ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen The ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen is used to draw a animation. The following operations can be performed: • Starting/ending animation drawing • Rewind of a drawing target program • Initializing a blank • E...

  • Page 1978

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1940 - Animation Graphic Screen Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen. 2 Press the [ANIME EXEC] soft key. The ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen is displayed...

  • Page 1979

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1941 - 6 Press the [ROTATION] soft key to display the soft keys for rotating the graphic coordinate system. Fig. 13.2.2.2 (f) ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen (rotating the graphic coordinate system) For the operation of each soft key, see the explanation...

  • Page 1980

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1942 - NOTE 1 Set the unit of scale for one enlargement/reduction operation in parameter No. 14713. 2 An enlargement/reduction scale used here is set in the graphic parameter for scale. - Moving the graphic range The following soft keys displayed by...

  • Page 1981

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1943 - • [YXZ] soft key This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YXZ (with a setting of 6). • [YZX] soft key This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YZX (with a setting of 7). • [OK] soft key This soft key changes th...

  • Page 1982

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1944 - - Drawing of a tool In animation drawing, not only a blank figure but also a tool figure is drawn in three dimensions. NOTE The following function is necessary to draw in the tool figure. - Tool geometry size data 100/300 pairs Figure da...

  • Page 1983

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1945 - Table 13.2.2.2 (b) List of drawable tools (for milling) Tool name Tool geometry size data Cutter compensation Parameter No. Drill Setting Diameter Tip length No.27372 Tool angle counter sink tool Setting Small diameter Tool angle No.27375 ...

  • Page 1984

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1946 - 13.2.3 Programmable Data Input (G10) for Blank Figure Drawing Parameters Overview Each of the drawing parameters for a blank figure, a position, and dimensions that are for the automatic scaling of the drawing areas of tool path drawing and an...

  • Page 1985

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1947 - - Dimensions of a blank (I_,J_,K_) For the shape of each blank, specify the dimensions of the blank as follows: Blank figureAddress I Address J Address K Rectangular parallelepipedLength in X-axis direction Length in Y-axis direction Length i...

  • Page 1986

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1948 - 13.2.4 Warning Messages Warning message Content START REJECTED This program cannot be drawn. NO PROGRAM SELECTED No drawing target program is selected. UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN DRAWING An NC statement/macro statement that can not execute draw...

  • Page 1987

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1949 - 13.2.6 Restrictions - Simultaneous drawing with multiple paths This function does not support simultaneous tool path drawing by program execution with multiple paths. For example, the tool paths of programs executed simultaneously with multip...

  • Page 1988

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1950 - 3. Functions that perform different operations If the following functions are specified, the operations described below result: 1) G02.2/G03.2 (involute interpolation) Circular interpolation is performed. 2) G02.3/G03.3 (exponential interpolati...

  • Page 1989

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1951 - 9) G53 (Machine coordinate system selection) 10) G54 to G59 (Workpiece coordinate system selection) 11) G54.1 (Extended workpiece coordinate system selection) 12) G65 (Macro call) 13) G68/G69 (Coordinate system rotation, three-dimensional coord...

  • Page 1990

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1952 - 5) Movement on an axis based on real-time custom macro specification 6) Operation based on manual interrupt, manual handle interrupt, etc. 7) Operation based on synchronous control, mixture control, and superimposed control 8) Operation based o...

  • Page 1991

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1953 - • Data items and commands that can be switched For the following data item and command, switching of diameter/radius specification is performed according to the switched specification: - Move command from a program - Current position display...

  • Page 1992

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1954 - (1) The execution macro specified with system variable #8610 is called. If bit 4 (P98) of compilation parameter No. 9163 is 0, the execution macro is called with an operation equivalent to a simple call (G65), and if P98 is 1, it is called with...

  • Page 1993

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1955 - - Drawing start position In tool path drawing, if G92, G52, or G92.1 (machining center system) or G50, G52, or G50.3 (lathe system) is specified at the start of a drawing target program, the position specified with the G code is the drawing st...

  • Page 1994

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1956 - 14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION Chapter 14, "VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY .............................................................1957

  • Page 1995

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION - 1957 - 14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY Overview This function is used to perform program editing and changing of various data using the keyboard displayed on the LCD with a touch panel. Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the upper left 1/4 ar...

  • Page 1996

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1958 - - Simultaneous pressing of two keys The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET" keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follows: (1) Press the "SPCL" key. The ...

  • Page 1997

    B-63944EN/03 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION - 1959 - Operation - Function key page switching Pressing "MENU" located near the lower right corner of the screen switches the screen to page 1, page 2, page 3, and back to page 1 in this order. Function keys on page 1 Function ke...

  • Page 1998

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-63944EN/03 - 1960 - - Input key The display "INPUT" on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the input key. - Cancel key The displays "BS" and "CAN" on the virtual MDI keyboard are equivalent to the cancel key. - Shif...

  • Page 1999

    IV. MAINTENANCE

  • Page 2000

  • Page 2001

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1963 - 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE This chapter describes routine maintenance work that the operator can perform when using the CNC. WARNING Only those persons who have been educated for maintenance and safety may perform maintenance work not descri...

  • Page 2002

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1964 - 1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED If an unexpected operation occurs or an alarm or warning is output when the CNC and machine are used, the problem needs to be solved quickly. For this purpose, the status of the problem must ...

  • Page 2003

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1965 - 1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS With the CNC, various data items such as offset data and system parameters are stored in the SRAM of the control unit and are protected by a backup battery. However, an accident can erase the data. By st...

  • Page 2004

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1966 - - Data restoration work In order to restore lost data to the state of the stored data, input the data backed up according to the previous item into the CNC. For the method of data input operation, see the chapter of "DATA INPUT/OUTPU...

  • Page 2005

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1967 - 1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY This chapter describes how to replace the CNC backup battery and absolute Pulsecoder battery. This section consists of the following subsections:: 1.3.1 Replacing Battery for LCD-mounted Type CNC Control U...

  • Page 2006

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1968 - 1.3.1 Replacing Battery for LCD-mounted Type CNC Control Unit When using a lithium battery - Replacement procedure When a lithium battery is used Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC specification: A98L-0031...

  • Page 2007

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1969 - Battery caseConnectorLithium batteryA02B-0236-K102 Fig. 1.3.1 (b) Unit with option slots Battery cable Fig. 1.3.1 (c) Clamping the battery cable WARNING Using other than the recommended battery may result in the battery exploding. Re...

  • Page 2008

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1970 - When using commercial alkaline dry cells (size D) - Replacement procedure <1> Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available. <2> Turn on the power to the control unit. <3> Remove the battery case cove...

  • Page 2009

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1971 - 1.3.2 Replacing the Battery for Stand-alone Type CNC Control Unit When using a lithium battery - Replacing the battery If a lithium battery is used, have A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC internal code: A98L-0031-0012) handy. <1> Turn the CNC...

  • Page 2010

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1972 - CAUTION Complete steps <1> to <3> within 30 minutes. If the battery is left removed for a long time, the memory would lose the contents. If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be completed within 30 minutes, save t...

  • Page 2011

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1973 - 1.3.3 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the PANEL i. This battery is factory-set in the PANEL i. This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year. When the battery volta...

  • Page 2012

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1974 - Connector(BAT1)Lithium batteryA02B-0200-K102 Fig. 1.3.3 (a) Lithium battery connection for PANEL i

  • Page 2013

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1975 - 1.3.4 Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders (1) When the absolute pulsecoder battery voltage falls, "APC" blinks in the status display on the screen. When the battery voltage further falls, alarms DS0306 to 0308 are issued. (2) When a...

  • Page 2014

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1976 - NOTE The absolute Pulsecoder of the servo motor αi/αis series or βiS (βiS 0.4 to βiS 22) series is incorporated with a backup capacitor as standard. This backup capacitor enables an absolute position detection to be continued for abou...

  • Page 2015

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1977 - - Replacing D-size alkaline dry cells in the battery case Replace four D-size alkaline batteries (A06B-6050-K061) in the battery case installed in the machine. (1) Have four D-size alkaline batteries on hand. (2) Loosen the screws on the b...

  • Page 2016

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1978 - - Attaching the built-in battery (αi series servo amplifier) Attach the lithium battery (A06B-6073-K001) to the servo amplifier. [Attachment procedure] (1) Remove a battery cover from the servo amplifier. (2) Attach the battery as shown ...

  • Page 2017

    B-63944EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1979 - - Attaching the built-in battery (β series servo amplifier) Attach the lithium battery (A06B-6093-K001) to the servo amplifier. [Attachment procedure] (1) In case of SVU-12 or SVU-20, remove the battery cover under the servo amplifier gr...

  • Page 2018

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-63944EN/03 - 1980 - CAUTION 1 The connector of the battery can be connected with either of CX5X and CX5Y. 2 Attaching the battery from the cable outlet applies tension to the cable. Therefore, attach the cable from another place to prevent the cable from be...

  • Page 2019

    APPENDIX

  • Page 2020

  • Page 2021

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1983 - A PARAMETERS This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual. For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other parameters, refer to the parameter manual. NOTE A parameter that is valid with only one of the path cont...

  • Page 2022

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1984 - A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 ISO TVC [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TVC TV check 0: Not performed 1: Performed # 1 ISO Code used for data output 0: EIA code 1: ISO code NOTE AS...

  • Page 2023

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1985 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0010 PRM [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 1 PRM When parameters are output, the parameters whose values are 0 are: 0: Output. 1: Not output. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0012 MIRx [Input...

  • Page 2024

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1986 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 NCR CTV [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit # 1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0: Performed 1: Not performed # 3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in...

  • Page 2025

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1987 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0984 LCP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 LCP Set whether the path is a loader control path. 0...

  • Page 2026

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1988 - # 3 AZR When no reference position is set, the G28 command causes: 0: Reference position return using deceleration dogs (as during manual reference position return) to be executed. 1: Alarm (PS0304) "G28 was specified when no reference positio...

  • Page 2027

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1989 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 EDMxEDPx ZRNx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 ZRNx If a move command other than G28 is specified by automatic operation when no reference position return is performed yet after the power ...

  • Page 2028

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1990 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx DIAx ROSx ROTx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or ...

  • Page 2029

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1991 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1007 G90x RAAx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 3 RAAx Rotary axis control is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. When an absolute command is specified, the rotary axis control function determines ...

  • Page 2030

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1992 - # 1 RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction 0: In which the distance to the target is shorter. 1: Specified by the sign of command value. NOTE RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1. # 2 RRLx Relative coordinates are 0: N...

  • Page 2031

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1993 - 1020 Program axis name for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 67,85 to 90 An axis name (axis name 1: parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily selected from 'A', 'B', 'C', 'U', 'V', 'W', 'X', 'Y', and 'Z'....

  • Page 2032

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1994 - 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 To determine a plane for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and so forth (G17: Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp ...

  • Page 2033

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1995 - 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the...

  • Page 2034

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1996 - 1031 Reference axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes The unit of some parameters common to all axes such as those for dry run feedrate and single-digit F1 feedrate may vary accord...

  • Page 2035

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1997 - # 3 FPC When a floating reference position is set with a soft key, the relative position indication is: 0: Not preset to 0 (The relative position indication remains unchanged.) 1: Preset to 0. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1202 G92 [Input ty...

  • Page 2036

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 1998 - 1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system 1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system 1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine co...

  • Page 2037

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1999 - 1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of dat...

  • Page 2038

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2000 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1301 OTS NPC [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 2 NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before movement, the movement specified in G31 (skip) and G37 (automatic tool length measurement) ...

  • Page 2039

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2001 - 1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis 1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, d...

  • Page 2040

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2002 - 1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis 1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm,...

  • Page 2041

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2003 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1402 JRV NPC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 NPC Feed per revolution without the position coder (function for converting feed per revolution F to feed per minute F in the feed per revolutio...

  • Page 2042

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2004 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1405 FR3 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 FR3 The increment system of an F command without a decimal point in feed per revolution is: 0: 0.01 mm/rev (0.0001 inch/rev for inch input...

  • Page 2043

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2005 - 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Ref...

  • Page 2044

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2006 - 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data ran...

  • Page 2045

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2007 - 1428 Reference position return feedrate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid ...

  • Page 2046

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2008 - 1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range...

  • Page 2047

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2009 - 1444 External deceleration rate setting 3 for each axis in rapid traverse [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the a...

  • Page 2048

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2010 - 1460 Upper limit of feedrate for F1 to F4 1461 Upper limit of feedrate for F5 to F9 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment...

  • Page 2049

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2011 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1490 PGF [Data type] Bit path # 7 PGF The feedrate specified for circular interpolation, involute interpolation, spiral/conical interpolation, and NURBS interpolation in the high-speed program check mode is: 0: T...

  • Page 2050

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2012 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1606 MNJx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 MNJx In manual handle interrupt or automatic manual simultaneous operation (interrupt type): 0: Only cutting feed acceleration/deceleration is enab...

  • Page 2051

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2013 - For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration Speed Rapid traverse rate(Parameter No. 1420) Time T1 T2 T2T2T2 T1 T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620 T2 : Setting of parameter No. 1621 (However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.) Total acceleration (decelerat...

  • Page 2052

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2014 - 1660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depen...

  • Page 2053

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2015 - 1672 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid traverse, or acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum torque acceleration/deceleration [Input type] Para...

  • Page 2054

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2016 - 1710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular cutting feedrate change by automatic corner override [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Set a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) f...

  • Page 2055

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2017 - 1713 Start distance (Le) for inner corner override [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of mi...

  • Page 2056

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2018 - 1732 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Dep...

  • Page 2057

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2019 - 1737 Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour control for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit) [Min...

  • Page 2058

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2020 - 1772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 200 Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped accel...

  • Page 2059

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2021 - 1788 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on acceleration change for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit) [Minimum unit of...

  • Page 2060

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2022 - 1790 Ratio of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 50 Set the ratio of t...

  • Page 2061

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2023 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 APCxAPZxDCRx OPTx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 1 OPTx Position detector 0...

  • Page 2062

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2024 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1817 TANx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.. # 6 TANx Tandem control 0: Not used 1: Used NOTE Set ...

  • Page 2063

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2025 - # 3 SDCx A linear scale with an absolute address zero point is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1819 DATx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 2 DATx When a linear scale with an absolute address zero...

  • Page 2064

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2026 - 1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] See below : Set a command multiplier i...

  • Page 2065

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2027 - Least input increment Least command increment 0.000001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0000005 mm Millimeter input 0.000001 mm (radius specification) 0.000001 mm 0.0000001 inch (diameter specification) 0.0000005 mm Millimeter machine Inch input0.000000...

  • Page 2066

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2028 - As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the reference position return in the grid method. [Size of the reference counter]=[Grid interval]/[Detection unit] [Grid interval]=[Amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder] T...

  • Page 2067

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2029 - 1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis. If the p...

  • Page 2068

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2030 - 1841 Position deviation limit of each axis in moving state during other than Dual Check Safety monitoring (for Dual Check Safety Function) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Par...

  • Page 2069

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2031 - 1883 Distance 1 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference marks) or distance 1 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address zero point) NOTE When this parameter ...

  • Page 2070

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2032 - Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Zero point of encoder Encoder endReference position…….. Mark 1 = mark 2 41.8 8.242.08.0Parameter No.1821Parameter No.1882Parameter No.1884 × 1,000,000,000 + Parameter No.1823 [Example of parameter settings] When an ...

  • Page 2071

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2033 - <3> By jog feed or handle feed, place the machine at the accurate reference position. <4> In parameter No. 1883, set the machine coordinate of that time converted to the detection unit (machine coordinate × CMR). <5> If necessary, s...

  • Page 2072

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2034 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1902 ASE FMD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 FMD The FSSB setting mode is: 0: Aut...

  • Page 2073

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2035 - # 6 PM1 The first separate detector interface unit is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. # 7 PM2 The second separate detector interface unit is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. NOTE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the parameter FMD ...

  • Page 2074

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2036 - Correspondence between connectors and connector numbers Connector Connector number JF107 6 JF108 7 Example of setting) Separate detector connection destination Parameter setting Controlled axis Connectors for 1st unit Connectors for 2nd unit Connector...

  • Page 2075

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2037 - Parameters No.2000 to 2999 are for digital servo, The following parameters are not explained in this manual. Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65270EN) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2011 XIAx [Input type] Parameter in...

  • Page 2076

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2038 - # 7 OVM In Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function, override function for M02,M30 is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, ...

  • Page 2077

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2039 - 3013 X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid dat...

  • Page 2078

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2040 - Example 1. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 6 When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is allocated to X0005. #7 #...

  • Page 2079

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2041 - Value of parameter No. 3021 (the first digit) Setting value Input signal address Output signal address 0 #0 #0 1 #1 #1 : 7 #7 #7 [Example of setting] Axis number No.3021Signal allocation 1 0 +J1<G0100#0>, -J1<G0102#0>, ZP1<F0090#0>...

  • Page 2080

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2042 - Value of parameter No. 3022 (the first digit) Setting value Input signal address Output signal address 0 Bit position A Bit position A 1 Bit position B Bit position B 2 Bit position C Bit position C 3 Bit position D Bit position D (The bit positions A,...

  • Page 2081

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2043 - 3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 8 Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function. When 0 is set, the allowa...

  • Page 2082

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2044 - # 5 DRC When relative positions are displayed: 0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation are displayed. 1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius com...

  • Page 2083

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2045 - # 5 OPM Operating monitor 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed # 6 OPS The speedometer on the operating monitor screen indicates: 0: Spindle motor speed 1: Spindle speed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 NDAx NDPx [Input type] Parameter input ...

  • Page 2084

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2046 - # 1 DAP For absolute coordinate display: 0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. 1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed. NOTE In machining center systems, whether to ...

  • Page 2085

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2047 - 3141 Path name (1st character) 3142 Path name (2nd character) 3143 Path name (3rd character) 3144 Path name (4th character) 3145 Path name (5th character) 3146 Path name (6th character) 3147 Path name (7th character) [Input type] Paramet...

  • Page 2086

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2048 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 NE9 NE8 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999 0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited When this parameter is set to 1, the following editin...

  • Page 2087

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2049 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3203 MCL MER MZE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 MZE After MDI operation is started, program editing during operation is: 0: Enabled 1: Disabled # 6 MER When the last block of a progra...

  • Page 2088

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2050 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3207 VRN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 5 VRN On the custom macro variable screen, the variable names of common variables #500 to #549 are: 0: Not displayed. 1: Displayed. 3210 Program protect...

  • Page 2089

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2051 - 3211 Program protection key (KEY) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 When the value set as the password (set in parameter No.3210) is set in this parameter, the locked state is released and the user ca...

  • Page 2090

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2052 - 3222 Program protection range (minimum value) (PMIN) 3223 Program protection range (maximum value) (PMAX) [Input type] Locked parameter [Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The programs in a range set here can be locked. Set the m...

  • Page 2091

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2053 - # 1 PDM On the Data Server file list screen: 0: M198 operation folders and DNC operation files can be set. 1: Folders in the Data Server can be set as the foreground folder and background folder. NOTE When an M198 external subprogram call or DNC ...

  • Page 2092

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2054 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3400 PGD MGC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 MGC When a single block specifies multiple M commands, an M code group check is: 0: Made. 1: Not made. # 5 PGD The G10.9 command (programm...

  • Page 2093

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2055 - # 5 ABS Program command in MDI operation 0: Assumed as an incremental command 1: Assumed as an absolute command NOTE ABS is valid when bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No.3401 is set to 1. When G code system A of the lathe system is used, this parameter ...

  • Page 2094

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2056 - # 4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state: 0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set. 1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set. # 6 CLR Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and emergenc...

  • Page 2095

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2057 - # 7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block 0: One 1: Up to three #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CCR G36 DWL AUX 3405 DWL AUX [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 AUX When the second auxiliary ...

  • Page 2096

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2058 - # 4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering 0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”. In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", ...

  • Page 2097

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2059 - 3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum un...

  • Page 2098

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2060 - 3432 Range specification 6 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameter Nos.3421 an...

  • Page 2099

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2061 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3450 BDX AUP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 AUP The second auxiliary function specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format, with a decimal point, or with a negative value is...

  • Page 2100

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2062 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3451 GQS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 GQS When threading is specified, the threading start angle shift function (Q) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3452...

  • Page 2101

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2063 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3455 AXDx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used, the value is determined: 0: In accordance with the l...

  • Page 2102

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2064 - # 1 MC2 MTB dedicated directory 2 "//CNC_MEM/MTB2/" of the initial directories is: 0: Set as a search directory. 1: Not set as a search directory. # 2 MC1 MTB dedicated directory 1 "//CNC_MEM/MTB1/" of the initial director...

  • Page 2103

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2065 - # 7 SCF A search folder is: 0: Not added. 1: Added. When a search folder is added, a search is made in the following order: 0) Folder only for embedded macro (With the embedded macro-function.) 1) Folder where the main program is stored 2) Common ...

  • Page 2104

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2066 - 3472 Minimum radius needed to maintain the actual speed in spiral or conic interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the referenc...

  • Page 2105

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2067 - 3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid ...

  • Page 2106

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2068 - 3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Set the mag...

  • Page 2107

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2069 - 3625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error compensation of rotation axis type NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] m...

  • Page 2108

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2070 - 3627 Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference position is made from the direction opposite to the direction of reference position return NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before oper...

  • Page 2109

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2071 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 EMS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 EMS The multi-spindle control function is: 0: Used. 1: Not used. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3716 A/Ss [Input type] Parameter input [Dat...

  • Page 2110

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2072 - 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data...

  • Page 2111

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2073 - 3781 P code for selecting the spindle in multi-spindle control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 If bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, set the P code to select each spindle under multi-...

  • Page 2112

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2074 - Parameters Nos. 4000 to 4799 below are basically used with the serial spindle amplifier. For details of these parameters, refer to either of the following manuals and other related documents, depending on the spindle that is actually connected. • FA...

  • Page 2113

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2075 - 4913 Spindle speed fluctuation width (i) for not issuing a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 99999 When the spindle speed fluctuation det...

  • Page 2114

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2076 - 4960 M code specifying the spindle orientation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Valid data range] 6 to 97 Set an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode. NOTE 1 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M cod...

  • Page 2115

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2077 - 4962 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Valid data range] 6 to 9999999 Two methods are available for specifying spindle positioning. One method uses axis address for arbitrary...

  • Page 2116

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2078 - 4964 Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the number of M codes used for Half-fixed angle positioning using M codes. A...

  • Page 2117

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2079 - # 6 EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length compensation A or tool length compensation B in the offset mode (G43 or G44): 0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is specified next. 1: Th...

  • Page 2118

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2080 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 SUV SUP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 SUP # 1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation. SUV SUP Type ...

  • Page 2119

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2081 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ORC 5004 ODI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corrected as: 0: Diameter value 1: Radius value NOTE This parameter is valid only for an ax...

  • Page 2120

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2082 - Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command 5028 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number (wear offset...

  • Page 2121

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2083 - 5029 Number of tool compensation value memories common to paths NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 999 When using mem...

  • Page 2122

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2084 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TCT OWD5040 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 OWD In radius programming (bit 1 (ORC) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1), 0: Tool offset values of both geometry compensation and wear ...

  • Page 2123

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2085 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5042 OFE OFD OFC OFA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the powermust be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 OFA # 1 OFC # 2 ...

  • Page 2124

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2086 - 5071 Number of first axis for grinding –wheel wear compensation 5072 Number of second axis for grinding–wheel wear compensation [Input Type] Parameter Input [Data Type] Byte path [Valid data Range] 1 to number of controlled axis This par...

  • Page 2125

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2087 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5101 FXY [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle is: 0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle: Z-ax...

  • Page 2126

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2088 - Grinding axis number in Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71) 5176 Grinding axis number in Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes For the Lathe system: Set the Grin...

  • Page 2127

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2089 - Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73) 5178 Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes For the Lathe sy...

  • Page 2128

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2090 - 5180 Axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75). NOTE The ax...

  • Page 2129

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2091 - 5182 Axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface...

  • Page 2130

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2092 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5200 CRG G84 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping: 0: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the issue of the G84 (or G74) comm...

  • Page 2131

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2093 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5203 HRM HRG [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 HRG Rigid tapping by the manual handle is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. # 1 HRM When the tapping axis moves in the negative direction during ri...

  • Page 2132

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2094 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5400 SCR XSC D3R [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 D3R When Reset is done by reset operation or reset signal from PMC, three-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, tilted working plane...

  • Page 2133

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2095 - 5412 Rapid traverse rate for canned cycle for drilling in three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on ...

  • Page 2134

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2096 - 5440 Positioning direction and overrun distance in single directional positioning [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applie...

  • Page 2135

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2097 - 5463 Automatic override tolerance ratio for polar coordinate interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Typical setting: 90% (treated as 90% when set to 0) Set the tolerance ratio...

  • Page 2136

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2098 - 5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of a preceding block [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of th...

  • Page 2137

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2099 - 5642 Rotation axis number subject exponential interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets the ordinal number, among the controlled axes, for the rotation ax...

  • Page 2138

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2100 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBM HGO MGO G67 6000 SBM HGO V15 MGO G67 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 G67 If the macro modal call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro modal call mode (G66/G66.1) is not se...

  • Page 2139

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2101 - # 4 HGO When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is executed, a high-speed branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before the executed statement is: 0: Not made. 1: Made. # 5 SBM Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the sin...

  • Page 2140

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2102 - # 3 PV5 Custom macro common variables: 0: #500 to #549 are output. (Note) 1: #100 to #149 and #500 to 549 are output. (Note) NOTE Output variables are as follows according to the combination of added options. When the parameter PV5=0 Option “...

  • Page 2141

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2103 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6003 MSB MPR TSE MIN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 2 MIN Custom macro interrup...

  • Page 2142

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2104 - # 5 D15 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401 through #2800, as Series 15 are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. When bit 3 (...

  • Page 2143

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2105 - # 3 MGE Specifies whether a G code modal call is made after movement or for each block. 0: Make a call for each block (equivalent to G66.1). 1: Make a call after movement (equivalent to G66). # 4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is spec...

  • Page 2144

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2106 - # 6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or a particular code during the calling of a G code, and the calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or particular code are: 0: Not all...

  • Page 2145

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2107 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 60...

  • Page 2146

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2108 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6019 MCO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 MCO When data is output, the decimal number value of the macro variable data is 0: Not output as a comment. 1: Output at the same time as a comment. Afte...

  • Page 2147

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2109 - 6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999) 6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Val...

  • Page 2148

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2110 - 6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 (#499)) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 400 When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro ...

  • Page 2149

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2111 - 6037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 500 When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro common va...

  • Page 2150

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2112 - 6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G codes as many as the value se...

  • Page 2151

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2113 - 6041 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] -999 to 999 6042 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code with a decimal point [Input type] ...

  • Page 2152

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2114 - 6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path...

  • Page 2153

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2115 - 6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word p...

  • Page 2154

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2116 - 6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010 6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011 6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012 6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program numbe...

  • Page 2155

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2117 - 6060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040 6061 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9041 6062 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program n...

  • Page 2156

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2118 - 6071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001 6072 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9002 6073 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9003 6074 M code used to call the subprogram of program numbe...

  • Page 2157

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2119 - 6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020 6081 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9021 6082 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9022 6083 M code used to call the custom macro of progr...

  • Page 2158

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2120 - 6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004 6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH) These parameters set t...

  • Page 2159

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2121 - # 4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.) 1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. # 5 SLS 0: The multi...

  • Page 2160

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2122 - # 2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G31 P98/99) is used, the skip position held in a system variable (#5061 to #5080) is: 0: Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the servo system. 1: Position tha...

  • Page 2161

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2123 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path 1S1 to 1S8 These parameters specify whether to enable or disable each high-speed skip signal when the G31 skip command is issued. Th...

  • Page 2162

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2124 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 ...

  • Page 2163

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2125 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 SFN SFP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 62...

  • Page 2164

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2126 - 6220 Period during which skip signal input is ignored for the continuous high-speed skip function and EGB axis skip function [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] 8msec [Valid data range] 3 to 127(× 8msec) This param...

  • Page 2165

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2127 - 6254 ε value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals) 6255 ε value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) ε v...

  • Page 2166

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2128 - 6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) 6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) 6284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3) 6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit...

  • Page 2167

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2129 - # 2 MC5 # 3 MC8 These parameters set the number of M code groups and the number of M codes per group. (See explanations of parameters Nos. 6411 to 6490.) MC5 MC8 M code group setting 0 0 Standard (20 groups of four) 1 0 16 groups of five 0 1 1...

  • Page 2168

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2130 - # 7 MG4 In the manual handle retrace function, for blocks for which multi-step skip G04 is enabled (when the multi-step skip software option is used, and the settings of parameter Nos. 6202 to 6206 are valid): 0: Backward movement is not prohibited...

  • Page 2169

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2131 - 6410 Travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Set the travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator i...

  • Page 2170

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2132 - 6439 M code of group H in manual handle retrace (1) to 6442 M code of group H in manual handle retrace (4) 6443 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (1) to 6446 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (4) 6447 M code of group J in manua...

  • Page 2171

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2133 - 6487 M code of group T in manual handle retrace (1) to 6490 M code of group T in manual handle retrace (4) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Set a group of M codes output during backward movement. ...

  • Page 2172

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2134 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6700 PCM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts 0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6...

  • Page 2173

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2135 - 6712 Total number of machined parts [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the total number of machined parts. The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or ...

  • Page 2174

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2136 - 6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1 [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 59999 For details, see the description of parameter No. 6754. 6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2 [Inp...

  • Page 2175

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2137 - # 2 LTM The tool life count is specified by: 0: Count. 1: Duration. NOTE After changing this parameter,set data again by using G10 L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups). # 3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signal, the group...

  • Page 2176

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2138 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 M6E EMD LVF TSM 6801 M6E EMD LVF NOTE The use of this parameter varies depending on whether the tool management function or tool life management function is used. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit pa...

  • Page 2177

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2139 - # 7 M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06: 0: The T code is treated as a back number or the group number to be selected next. Which number is assumed depends on the setting of bit 7 (M6T) of parameter No. 6800. 1: Life counting f...

  • Page 2178

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2140 - #1 TCO #2 E17 Specifies whether to allow the FOCAS2 or PMC window function to write tool information of a group being used or a group to be used next during automatic operation (the OP signal is set to "1"). 6802#1(TCO) 1 6802#2(E17)Conditi...

  • Page 2179

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2141 - # 4 ARL Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB of tool life management is: 0: Output for each tool. 1: Output for the last tool of a group. This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is set to 1. # 5 TGN In the tool lif...

  • Page 2180

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2142 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6804 LFI ETE TCI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 TCI During automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"), editing of tool life data is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. NOTE When this para...

  • Page 2181

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2143 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6805 TAD TRU TRS LFB FGL FCO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows: 0: Every second. 1: Every 0.1 second....

  • Page 2182

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2144 - # 5 TRS Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid when reset signal RST is not "1" and: 0: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0") is observed. 1: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0"), au...

  • Page 2183

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2145 - 6811 Tool life count restart M code [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 127 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99) When 0 is specified, it is ignored. When the life is specified by count, the tool change signal (TLC...

  • Page 2184

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2146 - 6844 Remaining tool life (use count) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 This parameter sets a remaining tool life (use count) used to output the tool life arrival notice signal when the tool life is spe...

  • Page 2185

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2147 - 6950 Minimum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW201) 6951 Minimum value of the operating range of the 2-nd position switch (PSW202)to to 6965 Minimum value of the operating range of the 16-th position switch (PSW216) [...

  • Page 2186

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2148 - # 2 JTF In manual numerical specification, T function specification is: 0: Allowed. 1: Not allowed. # 3 JBF In manual numerical specification, B function specification is: 0: Allowed. 1: Not allowed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7040 RPS ...

  • Page 2187

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2149 - 7066 Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the time constant change function of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input ...

  • Page 2188

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2150 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7103 HIT HNT RTH [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 RTH By a reset or emergency stop, the amount of manual handle interruption is: 0: Not canceled. 1: Canceled. # 2 HNT When compared with ...

  • Page 2189

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2151 - t Rapid Traverse Rate A:amount of pulses corresponds to value of Rapid Traverse Rate.B:amount of pulses accumulated in CNC. C:amount of pulses the same as B. ABC Amount of pulses exported by CNC in Manual Handle Feed Amount of pulses B is calcu...

  • Page 2190

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2152 - NOTE Due to change of mode, clamping can be performed not as an integral multiple of the selected magnification. The distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the manual pulse generator. 7160 Approach handle clamp feedrate [Input t...

  • Page 2191

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2153 - # 2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed # 3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse overri...

  • Page 2192

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2154 - 7210 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑” 7211 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓” 7212 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→” 7213 ...

  • Page 2193

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2155 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7300 MOUMOA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 6 MOA In program restart operation, before movement to a machining restart point: 0: The last M, S, T, and B codes are output. 1: All M codes and t...

  • Page 2194

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2156 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7502 LC2 LC1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 LC1 # 5 LC2 LC2 LC1 End timing of servo learning function during high-speed cycle cutting retract function 0 0 Disables the servo learning...

  • Page 2195

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2157 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7505 HUN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter bit is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 1 HUN During high-speed cutting, the increment sys...

  • Page 2196

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2158 - 7515 Number of retract operation distributions in a high-speed cycle machining retract operation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the number of retract operation distribution...

  • Page 2197

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2159 - 7640 Master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Within a path) This parameter sets the master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning...

  • Page 2198

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2160 - 7642 Master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning (spindle number common to the system) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Common to the system) This parameter sets the m...

  • Page 2199

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2161 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7700 HDR HBR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 HBR When the electronic gear box (EGB) function is used, performing a reset: 0: Cancels the synchronous mode (G81 or G81.5). 1: Does not cancel ...

  • Page 2200

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2162 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7701 LZR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 LZR When L (number of hob threads) = 0 is specified at the start of EGB synchronization (G81): 0: Synchronization is started, assuming that L = 1 i...

  • Page 2201

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2163 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7703 ARO ARE ERV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ERV During EGB synchronization (G81), feed per revolution is performed for: 0: Feedback pulses. 1: Pulses converted to the speed for the work...

  • Page 2202

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2164 - 7710 Axis number of an axis to be synchronized using the method of command specification for a hobbing machine NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2...

  • Page 2203

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2165 - 7740 Feedrate during retraction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to t...

  • Page 2204

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2166 - FFG N/M of the EGB dummy axis: 1/1 Gear ratio of the C-axis A: 1/36 (One rotation about the C-axis to 36 motor rotations) Number of detector pulses per C-axis rotation α: 1,000,000 pulses/rev C-axis CMR: 1 C-axis FFG n/m: 1/100 In this case, the num...

  • Page 2205

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2167 - 7777 Angle shifted from the spindle position (one-rotation signal position) which the workpiece axis uses as the reference of phase synchronization [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] deg [Minimum unit of data] Depen...

  • Page 2206

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2168 - 7783 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 999999999 For a slave axis, set the number of pulses generated...

  • Page 2207

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2169 - # 2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control 0: Same signals as those used for the CNC 1: Signals specific to the PMC The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below. Signals No.8001#2...

  • Page 2208

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2170 - # 6 FR1 # 7 FR2 Set the feedrate unit for cutting feedrate (feed per rotation) for an axis controlled by the PMC. Bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002Bit 6 (FR1) of parameter No. 8002Millimeter input (mm/rev) Inch input(inch/rev) 0 0 1 1 0.0001 0...

  • Page 2209

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2171 - # 6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is: 0: Invalid. With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm (PS0224) is not issued. 1: Valid. A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an NC axis acco...

  • Page 2210

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2172 - P8010 Description 29 DI/DO 29th group (G7142toG7153) is used. : : 35 DI/DO 35th group (G8166toG8177) is used. 36 DI/DO 36th group (G8178toG8189) is used. 37 DI/DO 37th group (G9142toG9153) is used. 38 DI/DO 38th group (G9154toG9165) is used. 39 DI/DO 3...

  • Page 2211

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2173 - 8030 Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 For each axis, this param...

  • Page 2212

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2174 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8162 PKUx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 2 PKUx In the parking state, 0: The absolute, relative, and machine coordinates are not updated. 1: The absolute and relative coordinates are upda...

  • Page 2213

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2175 - 8180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 101, 102, 103, . . . , (path number)*100+(intra-path relative axis number) (101, 102, 103, . . . , 2...

  • Page 2214

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2176 - 8186 Master axis under superimposed control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 101, 102, 103, . . . , (path number)*100+(intra-path relative axis number) (101, 102, 103, . . . , 201, 202, 203, . . . , 1001, 1002,...

  • Page 2215

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2177 - # 2 AZR 0: The machine tool is moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference position return along the slanted axis under angular axis control. 1: The machine tool is not moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference position ret...

  • Page 2216

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2178 - 8211 Axis number of a slanted axis subject to angular axis control 8212 Axis number of a Cartesian axis subject to slanted axis control NOTE When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] ...

  • Page 2217

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2179 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8302 SMA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 7 SMA When an absolute position detector is attached, ...

  • Page 2218

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2180 - # 7 SOF In axis synchronous control, the synchronization establishment function based on machine coordinates is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. Set this parameter with a slave axis. When using synchronization error compensation, set this parameter to 0. ...

  • Page 2219

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2181 - # 4 MVB In the modification mode, a move command in a direction that increases a synchronization error is: 0: Ignored. 1: Valid. When there are multiple slave axes for one master axis, an attempt to reduce the synchronous error of a slave axis by a...

  • Page 2220

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2182 - 8311 Axis number of master axis in axis synchronous control NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to Number of control...

  • Page 2221

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2183 - 8312 Enabling/disabling mirror image in axis synchronous control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] -127 to 128 This parameter sets mirror image for the slave axis. When 100 or a more value is set with this param...

  • Page 2222

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2184 - 8323 Limit in positional deviation check in axis synchronous control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between...

  • Page 2223

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2185 - 8327 Torque difference alarm detection timer [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter sets a time from the servo preparation completion signal, SA <F000.6>, being s...

  • Page 2224

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2186 - 8332 Maximum allowable synchronization error for synchronization error excessive alarm 2 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of d...

  • Page 2225

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2187 - 8336 Synchronization error compensation gain 2 for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 1024 This parameter sets synchronization error compensation gain 2 for synchronization error smooth suppression...

  • Page 2226

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2188 - 8456 Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI contour control 8457 Override for range 3 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI contour control 8458 Override for r...

  • Page 2227

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2189 - 8486 Maximum travel distance of a block where smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing is applied [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the ref...

  • Page 2228

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2190 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8900 PWE [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit # 0 PWE The setting, from an external device and MDI panel, of those parameters that cannot be set by setting input is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. 10461 RGB ...

  • Page 2229

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2191 - 10803 Number of compensation points for three-dimensional error compensation (first compensation axis) 10804 Number of compensation points for three-dimensional error compensation (second compensation axis) 10805 Number of compensation points for ...

  • Page 2230

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2192 - 10809 Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (first compensation axis) 10810 Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (second compensation axis) 10811 Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (third comp...

  • Page 2231

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2193 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11005 SIC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 0 SIC Spindle indexing is: 0: Performed based on absolute coordinates. 1: Performed based on machine coordinates. 11090 Path number with which the rota...

  • Page 2232

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2194 - 11201 The number of decimal places of rotation direction errors in workpiece setting error compensation [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 8 This parameter sets the number of decimal places of rotation directi...

  • Page 2233

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2195 - 11203 Override for rapid traverse during workpiece setting error compensation mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 When the parameter RCM (No.11200#0)=1 in order to enable tool direc...

  • Page 2234

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2196 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11221 MTW [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 MTW Multiple tilted working plane commands are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11222 PDM CIM NIM [Input type] Parameter i...

  • Page 2235

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2197 - 11261 The amount of a retract operation in the tool axis direction during tool retract and return [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system...

  • Page 2236

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2198 - 11307 Display sequence of the coordinates in current position display NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 5 This ...

  • Page 2237

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2199 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11308 COW [Input type] parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 COW When the file of specified name already exists on memory card, 0: It is not overwritten Alarm (SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST) is generated. 1: It is ov...

  • Page 2238

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2200 - 11344 Blank reference position in dynamic graphic display [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit...

  • Page 2239

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2201 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11349 WNS ABC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 1 ABC In animated simulation in the dynamic graphic display function, when a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle, which is a hole machining canned c...

  • Page 2240

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2202 - 12310 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based vertical direction handle feed/interrupt are performed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data rang...

  • Page 2241

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2203 - 12311 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when a movement is made in the first axis direction in tool axis normal direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction handle feed/interrupt [Input type] Parameter ...

  • Page 2242

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2204 - 12313 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when the first rotation axis is turned in tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 24 This parameter set...

  • Page 2243

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2205 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12320 JFR FLL TWD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TWD The directions of three-dimensional machining manual feed (other than tool tip center rotation feed) when the tilted working plane comma...

  • Page 2244

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2206 - 12322 Angle used to determine whether to assume the tool axis direction to be parallel to the normal direction (parameter No. 12321) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] deg [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the incre...

  • Page 2245

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2207 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13113 CFD CLR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 CLR Upon reset, the display of a travel distance by three-dimensional machining manual feed is: 0: Not cleared. 1: Cleared. # 3 CFD As fee...

  • Page 2246

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2208 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13201 TDN TDC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 TDC The function of customizing the...

  • Page 2247

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2209 - # 3 DOB On the tool management function screen, B-axis offset data is: 0: Displayed. 1: Not displayed. NOTE This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe system or compound system. # 4 DO2 On the tool management function...

  • Page 2248

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2210 - 13220 Number of valid tools in tool management data NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by...

  • Page 2249

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2211 - 13223 Start pot number of the first cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 This parameter sets the start ...

  • Page 2250

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2212 - 13233 Start pot number of the third cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 This parameter sets the start ...

  • Page 2251

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2213 - 13265 Number for selecting a spindle position offset number with tool life or H code for using the tool length offset in tool life management with tool life management [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 9...

  • Page 2252

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2214 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13600 MSA MCR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 MCR When an allowable acceleration rate adjustment is made with the machining condition selection function (machining parameter adjustment scre...

  • Page 2253

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2215 - 13610 Acceleration rate for acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation in AI contour control (precision level 1) 13611 Acceleration rate for acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation in AI contour control (precision le...

  • Page 2254

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2216 - 13614 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate change under control on the rate of change of acceleration (precision level 1) 13615 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in...

  • Page 2255

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2217 - NOTE 1 For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, parameter No. 13614 and No. 13615 (allowable acceleration rate change amount in speed control based on acceleration rate change under control on the rate of change of acceleration) are valid. 2 For an ax...

  • Page 2256

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2218 - 13620 Allowable acceleration rate when AI contour control is used (precision level 1) 13621 Allowable acceleration rate when AI contour control is used (precision level 10) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/sec/s...

  • Page 2257

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2219 - 13626 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used (precision level 1) 13627 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used (precision level 10) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, de...

  • Page 2258

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2220 - 13630 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when AI contour control is used 13631 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when ...

  • Page 2259

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2221 - 14010 Maximum allowable travel distance when the reference position is established for a linear scale with an absolute address reference position [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range]...

  • Page 2260

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2222 - NOTE 1 When the electric gear box (EGB) function is used Although an amplifier is not actually required for an EGB dummy axis, set this parameter with assuming that a dummy amplifier is connected. That is, as the address conversion table value for a no...

  • Page 2261

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2223 - - Example 2 Example of axis configuration and parameter settings when the electronic gear box (EGB) function is used (EGB slave axis: A-axis, EGB dummy axis: B-axis) 10 21 32 44 55 664 7-56 83 Slave numberATR No.14340 to 14357 XYAZC(M1)(M2)B(Dummy)A...

  • Page 2262

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2224 - 14358 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on FSSB line 2 14359 ATR value corresponding to slave 02 on FSSB line 2 : 14375 ATR value corresponding to slave 18 on FSSB line 2 NOTE When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before o...

  • Page 2263

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2225 - 14376 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the first separate detector interface unit 14377 ATR value corresponding to connector 2 on the first separate detector interface unit : 14383 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the first separa...

  • Page 2264

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2226 - 14713 Unit of magnification by which enlargement and reduction is performed with the dynamic graphic display function [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the unit of magnification by which...

  • Page 2265

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2227 - 18060 M code that prohibits backward movement [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 1 to 999 When an M code that prohibits backward movement is specified during backward movement, backward movement of blocks before ...

  • Page 2266

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2228 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19500 FNW [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 6 FNW When the feedrate is determined according to the feedrate difference and acceleration in AI contour control: 0: The maximum feedrate at which ...

  • Page 2267

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2229 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19503 ZOL HPF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 HPF When a feedrate is determined based on acceleration in AI contour control, smooth feedrate control is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. # 4 ZOL T...

  • Page 2268

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2230 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19530 CYS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 6 CYS Specifies whether when the cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation function is used, cutting point compensation is performed betw...

  • Page 2269

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2231 - 19535 Limit of travel distance moved with the cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in the previous block unchanged. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Dep...

  • Page 2270

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2232 - A ccelerationSpeedFbFaA aP1P2P3P4 P5 A bA cceleration patternP0 Set the speed at each of the acceleration setting points (P0 to P5) in a corresponding parameter, then in parameters for each axis, set acceleration rates applicable in the following ...

  • Page 2271

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2233 - 19541 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P1) 19542 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P2) 19543 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P3) 19544 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P4) ...

  • Page 2272

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2234 - 19556 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P5 during movement in - direction and acceleration) 19557 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in + direction and deceleration) 19558 Optimal ...

  • Page 2273

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2235 - 19581 Tolerance smoothing for nano smoothing [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive...

  • Page 2274

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2236 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19604 TPC [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 5 TPC In the case that there is no address P at the start of tool center point control (G43.4/G43.5), tool posture control 0: Does not work. 1: Works....

  • Page 2275

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2237 - Compensation vector Programmed path Tool center path Compensation Center ZY Direction from compensation center to command end position Compensation Vector Programmed path Tool center path Compensationcenter ZY Direction from...

  • Page 2276

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2238 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19608 MIR PRI DET NI5 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 NI5 The interference check in 3-dimensional cutter compensation is performed by: 0: Projecting a look-ahead command position onto a plane...

  • Page 2277

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2239 - 19631 Variation for determining an angle when the leading-edge offset function is performed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Val...

  • Page 2278

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2240 - 19635 Angle used as a criterion for the interference check in 3-dimensional cutter compensation [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [V...

  • Page 2279

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2241 - 19658 Angular displacement of a rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] deg [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (ref...

  • Page 2280

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2242 - 19661 Rotation center compensation vector in tool axis direction tool length compensation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the appli...

  • Page 2281

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2243 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19665 SVC SPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by: 0: Automatic calculation. 1: Using parameter No. 19667. Bit 5 (SVC) of parameter No. 19665 Bit 4 (SPR)...

  • Page 2282

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2244 - 19666 Tool holder offset value [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of d...

  • Page 2283

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2245 - 19680 Mechanical unit type [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. Parameter No. 19680 Mechanical unit type Controlled rotation axis Master and slave 0 Mechanism havin...

  • Page 2284

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2246 - 19681 Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis. For a hypothetical axis (when...

  • Page 2285

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2247 - 19683 Inclination angle when the first rotation axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the reference axis is to be followed. [Valid data ra...

  • Page 2286

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2248 - 19685 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 di...

  • Page 2287

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2249 - 19688 Inclination angle when the second rotation axis is inclined [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of ...

  • Page 2288

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2250 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 RFC WKP NPC IA2 IA1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set 0 as ...

  • Page 2289

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2251 - 19697 Reference tool axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees. Als...

  • Page 2290

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2252 - 19698 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA) 19699 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum ...

  • Page 2291

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2253 - 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of ...

  • Page 2292

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2254 - 19703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 1970...

  • Page 2293

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2255 - 19709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersection offset...

  • Page 2294

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2256 - 19712 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19714 ...

  • Page 2295

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2257 - 19738 Angle to check if Tool posture is near Singular posture or not [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit ...

  • Page 2296

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2258 - 19741 Upper limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of...

  • Page 2297

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2259 - 19744 Lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit o...

  • Page 2298

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2260 - # 6 CRS In tool center point control, when the deviation from the path during movement at the specified cutting feedrate or rapid traverse rate is determined to exceed the limit: 0: The feedrate or rapid traverse rate is not decreased. 1: The feedr...

  • Page 2299

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2261 - 19752 Limit of the deviation from the path (for cutting feed) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range...

  • Page 2300

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2262 - 27351 Cutting edge length applied when a general-purpose tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This param...

  • Page 2301

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2263 - 27353 Holder width applied when a general-purpose tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter se...

  • Page 2302

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2264 - 27355 Holder width 2 applied when a general-purpose tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter ...

  • Page 2303

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2265 - 27357 Cutting edge width applied when a threading tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter se...

  • Page 2304

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2266 - 27359 Holder width applied when a threading tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets the ...

  • Page 2305

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2267 - 27361 Holder length applied when a groove cutting tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter se...

  • Page 2306

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2268 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 27363 BTP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 0 BTP When a round-nose tool is drawn in animated simulation, the tip is: 0: Positioned on the front. 1: Positioned on the rear. Front RearTip HolderHol...

  • Page 2307

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2269 - 27365 Holder width applied when a round-nose tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets th...

  • Page 2308

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2270 - 27367 Cutting edge length applied when a point nose straight tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This p...

  • Page 2309

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2271 - 27369 Holder width applied when a point nose straight tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This paramete...

  • Page 2310

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2272 - 27371 Holder width 2 applied when a point nose straight tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parame...

  • Page 2311

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2273 - 27373 Length of cut applied when a flat end milling cutter is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This paramete...

  • Page 2312

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2274 - 27375 Included angle applied when a chamfering tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] degree [Valid data range] 0 to 90 This parameter sets the included angle applied when a a chamferin...

  • Page 2313

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2275 - 27377 Cutter length applied when a chamfering tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets t...

  • Page 2314

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2276 - 27379 Shank diameter applied when a chamfering tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets ...

  • Page 2315

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2277 - 27381 Length of cut applied when a reamer is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter sets the length...

  • Page 2316

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2278 - 27383 Length of cut applied when a face milling cutter is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter se...

  • Page 2317

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2279 - 27385 Holder length applied when a multifunction tool is drawn in animated simulation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric input), 0.0001inch (inch input) [Valid data range] 0 or larger This parameter set...

  • Page 2318

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2280 - A.2 DATA TYPE Parameters are classified by data type as follows: Data type Valid data rangeRemarks Bit Bit machine group Bit path Bit axis Bit spindle 0 or 1 Byte Byte machine group Byte path Byte axis Byte spindle -128 to 127 0 to 255 Some paramete...

  • Page 2319

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2281 - A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the real type, real machine group type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type and ...

  • Page 2320

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2282 - (C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unitValid data range IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999000.00 IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000 IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999 IS-D 0.00001 ...

  • Page 2321

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX B.PROGRAM CODE LIST - 2283 - B PROGRAM CODE LIST ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)without custom macro with custom macro Usable as file name Number 0 0 30 0 20 * Number 1 1 B1 1 01 * Number 2 2 B2 2 02...

  • Page 2322

    B.PROGRAM CODE LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2284 - ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)without custom macro with custom macro Usable as file name Space SP A0 SP 10 Absolute rewind stop % A5 ER 0B Control out (start of comment...

  • Page 2323

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX B.PROGRAM CODE LIST - 2285 - ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)without custom macro with custom macro Usable as file name Lowercase letter q q 71 * Lowercase letter r r 72 * Lowercase letter s s F3 ...

  • Page 2324

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2286 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT C LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT With some functions, the format used for specification on the machining center system differs from the format used for specification on the lathe system. Moreover, some functions are ...

  • Page 2325

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2287 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT(1/11) Functions Illustration Program format Positioning (G00) Start pointIP G00 IP_ ; Linear interpolation (G01) Start pointIP G01 IP_ F_; Circular interpolation (G02, G03) (x, y)G03(x, y)JRIG02RIJStart pointStart point•...

  • Page 2326

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2288 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT (2/11) Functions Illustration Program format Three-dimensional circular interpolation (G02.4, G03.4) XYZStartpointIntermediate point(X1,Y1,Z1)End point (X2,Y2,Z2) G02.4 XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ; First block (mid...

  • Page 2327

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2289 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT(3/11) Functions Illustration Program format Programmable data input (G10) • For machining center Tool compensation memory A G10 L01 P_ R_ ; Tool compensation memory B G10 L10 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount) G10 L11 P...

  • Page 2328

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2290 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT (4/11) Functions Illustration Program format Reference position return (G28) 2nd Reference position return (G30) Start pointReference position (G28)Intermediate point 2nd reference position(G30)IPG28 IP_ ; G30 IP_ ; Moveme...

  • Page 2329

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2291 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT(5/11) Functions Illustration Program format Normal direction control (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) Tool ToolC-axis C-axisProgrammed path Normal direction (in which the tool moves)G41.1 ; Normal direction control on : right G42.1 ; No...

  • Page 2330

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2292 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT (6/11) Functions Illustration Program format Tool offset (G45 to G48) G 45G 46G 47G 48IncreaseDecreaseDouble decreaseDouble increaseOffset amountIPIP• For machining center IP_ D_ ;G45G46G47G48 D : Tool offset number Scalin...

  • Page 2331

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2293 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT(7/11) Functions Illustration Program format Selection of workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) Workpiece coordinate systemWorkpieceoriginoffsetIPMachine coordinate systemG54::IP_ ;G59 Rotary table dynamic fixture offset (G5...

  • Page 2332

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2294 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT (8/11) Functions Illustration Program format Mirror image for double turret (G68, G69) • For lathe only G68 : Mirror image for double turret G69 : Mirror image cancel Coordinate system rotation, Three-dimensional coordin...

  • Page 2333

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2295 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT(9//11) Functions Illustration Program format Figure copy (G72.1, G72.2) YP1P0Start point60°X Start point P0P1XYRotational copy G72.1X_ Y_Z_ X_Y_ Z_R_ ;P_ L_(G17)(G18)(G19) Linear copy G72.2I_ J_K_ I_J_ K_;P_ L_(G17)(G18)(...

  • Page 2334

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2296 - C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT (10/11) Functions Illustration Program format Absolute/incremental programming (G90/G91) • For machining center G90_ ; Absolute programming G91_ ; Incremental programming : G90_ G91_ ; Programming in both modes • Fo...

  • Page 2335

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2297 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT(11/11) Functions Illustration Program format Speed display function of a milling tool with servo motor (G96.1,G96.2,G96.3,G96.4) G96.1 P_R_; The next block starts operating upon completion of spindle indexing (the SV speed co...

  • Page 2336

    D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2298 - D RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Linear axis - In case of millimeter input, feed screw is millimeter Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 Least command increment (mm) 0.01 0...

  • Page 2337

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE - 2299 - - In case of inch input, feed screw is inch Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Least input increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 Least command increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 Max. program...

  • Page 2338

    D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2300 - - Rotary axis Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Least input increment (deg) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 Least command increment (deg) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 Max. programmable dimension (deg) ±999,999.99 ±999,...

  • Page 2339

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 2301 - E NOMOGRAPHS Appendix E, "NOMOGRAPHS", consists of the following sections: E.1 INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH...................................2302 E.2 SIMPLE CALCULATION OF INCORRECT THREAD LENGTH..................................................

  • Page 2340

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2302 - E.1 INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH The leads of a thread are generally incorrect in δ1 and δ2, as shown in Fig. E.1 (a), due to automatic acceleration and deceleration. Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of δ1 and δ2 in the program. ...

  • Page 2341

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 2303 - - How to use nomograph First specify the class and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy, a, will be obtained at (1), and depending on the time constant of cutting feed acceleration/ deceleration, the δ1 value when V = 10mm/s will be obtained at ...

  • Page 2342

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2304 - E.2 SIMPLE CALCULATION OF INCORRECT THREAD LENGTH δ2δ1 Fig. E.2 (a) Incorrect threaded portion Explanation - How to determine δ2 a=∆LL (mm) R : Spindle speed (min-1) L : Thread lead (mm) * When time constant T1 of the servo system is 0.033 s. ...

  • Page 2343

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 2305 - Reference V : Speed in threadingServo time constant50msecV=10mm/sec( 0.39in/sec)V=20mm/sec( 0.79in/sec)V=30mm/sec( 1.18in/sec)V=40mm/sec( 1.57in/sec)V=2in/secV=1in/secδ1 (V=10mm/sec)33msecδ18 (mm)0.3 (in)δ164200.20.10.0070.0100.0150.0200.025Metr...

  • Page 2344

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2306 - E.3 TOOL PATH AT CORNER When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning system when a servo motor is used) is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path (too...

  • Page 2345

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 2307 - Explanation - Analysis The tool path shown in Fig. E.3 (b) is analyzed based on the following conditions: • Feedrate is constant at both blocks before and after cornering. • The controller has a buffer register. (The error differs with the reading...

  • Page 2346

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2308 - - Initial value calculation Y0X0V0 Fig. E.3 (c) Initial value The initial value when cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command distribution by the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system ti...

  • Page 2347

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS - 2309 - E.4 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING When a servo motor is used, the positioning system causes an error between input commands and output results. Since the tool advances along the specified segment, an error is not produced in linear interpol...

  • Page 2348

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2310 - F. SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE F SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE

  • Page 2349

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2311 - F.SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATEEither the clear state or reset state is entered during a reset is set by bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 (0: reset state/1: clear state). The symbols in the figure below have the following meaning...

  • Page 2350

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2312 - F. SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE Tool position compensation at a reset ○ : Cancelled. × : Not canceled. Bit 3 (LVC) of parameter No. 5006 and bit 7 (TGC) of parameter No. 5003 Compensation method LVC=0 TGC=0 LVC=1 TGC=0 LV...

  • Page 2351

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2313 - G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLEG CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE Appendix G, "CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE", consists of the following sections: G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE 2314 G.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTE...

  • Page 2352

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2314 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE Character Code Comment CharacterCodeComment A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056 D 068 9 057 E 069 032 Space F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark G 071 ” 034 Quotation mark H 07...

  • Page 2353

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2315 - G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLEG.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE

  • Page 2354

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2316 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE

  • Page 2355

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2317 - G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLE

  • Page 2356

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2318 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE

  • Page 2357

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX - 2319 - G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLE

  • Page 2358

    APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2320 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE

  • Page 2359

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2321 - H ALARM LIST Appendix H, "ALARM LIST", consists of the following itemss: (1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm)...........................2322 (2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm) .........................................2322 (3) C...

  • Page 2360

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2322 - (1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm) (2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm) (3) Communication alarms (SR alarm) Alarm numbers are common to all these alarm types. Depending on the state, an alarm is displayed as in the following examples: PS&...

  • Page 2361

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2323 - Number Message Description 0021 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error. Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not specified simultaneously. This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be s...

  • Page 2362

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2324 - Number Message Description 0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code (such as for tool radius/tool nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled. - A torque limit skip was not specified in a tor...

  • Page 2363

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2325 - Number Message Description 0052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNRThe block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01 (or vertical line). Modify the program. 0053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I,...

  • Page 2364

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2326 - Number Message Description 0071 DATA NOT FOUND - The address to be searched was not found. - The program with specified program number was not found in program number search. - In the program restart block number specification, the specified block nu...

  • Page 2365

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2327 - Number Message Description 0081 G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED - For machining center series The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified without specifying an H code. Correct the program. - For lathe The automatic tool compensation function (G36...

  • Page 2366

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2328 - Number Message Description 0094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG) P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting operation was performed.) Perform the correct operati...

  • Page 2367

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2329 - Number Message Description 0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro. The nesting level including function brackets is 5. 0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGEThe value of an argument in a custom macro function ...

  • Page 2368

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2330 - Number Message Description 0146 ILLEGAL USE OF G-CODE The modal G code group contains an illegal G code in the polar coordinate interpolation mode or when a mode was canceled. Only the following G codes are allowed: G40, G50, G69.1 An illegal G code wa...

  • Page 2369

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2331 - Number Message Description 0160 MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE A waiting M-code is in error. <1> When different M codes are specified for path 1 and path 2 as waiting M codes without a P command. <2> When the waiting M codes are not identical eve...

  • Page 2370

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2332 - Number Message Description 0178 ILLEGAL COMMAND G05 The settings of bits 4 to 6 of parameter No.7501 are invalid or G05 was specified in any of the following mode. - Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) - Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) - Polar coo...

  • Page 2371

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2333 - Number Message Description 0210 CAN NOT COMMAND M198/M99 1 The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted during scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an M198 command was attempted during DNC operation. Modify the program. 2 The e...

  • Page 2372

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2334 - Number Message Description 0242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.2/G03.2 An illegal value was specified in the involute curve. The coordinate instruction I, J or K of the basic circle on the currently selected plane or the basic circle radius R is “0”, or th...

  • Page 2373

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2335 - Number Message Description 0303 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS NOT PERFORMED When the setting of a reference position at any position was possible in Cs contour control (parameter CRF (No. 3700#0) = 1), a G00 command was issued for the Cs contour axis wi...

  • Page 2374

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2336 - Number Message Description 0318 ILLEGAL RELIEF AMOUNT IS IN THE DRILLING CYCLE Although an escape directions is set in a multiple repetitive canned cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75), a negative value is specified for ∆d. 0319 THE END POINT COMMAND IS I...

  • Page 2375

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2337 - Number Message Description 0338 CHECK SUM ERROR An incorrect value was detected in a check sum. (malfunction prevention function) 0340 ILLEGAL RESTART(NANO SMOOTHING) With manual absolute turned on, an attempt was made to restart the operation in nan...

  • Page 2376

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2338 - Number Message Description 0356 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, THE COMP CONTROL IS CAN'T BE USED. While the axis being subject to composite control was moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the composite control by a composite control axis select...

  • Page 2377

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2339 - Number Message Description 0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR 1) The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function. 2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The address Q range is 1 to...

  • Page 2378

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2340 - Number Message Description 0389 ILLEGAL RTM SIGNAL BIT Bits other than bits 0 to 7 cannot be specified with a DI/DO signal. 0391 RTM BRANCH OVER The number of branches supported with real time custom macros was exceeded. 0392 TOO MANY SENTENCE CONTROL ...

  • Page 2379

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2341 - Number Message Description 0429 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G10.6 When retract was started in a threading block, a retract command had been issued for the long axis direction of threading. 0430 TOOL LIFE PAIRS ZERO Tool life management group number parameter No...

  • Page 2380

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2342 - Number Message Description 0446 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G96.1/G96.2/G96.3/G96.4 G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, and G96.4 are specified in the block that includes other commands. Modify the program. 0447 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA The live tool axis is incorrectly set. C...

  • Page 2381

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2343 - Number Message Description 1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in the type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom macros. 1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was sp...

  • Page 2382

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2344 - Number Message Description 1144 G10 FORMAT ERROR The G10 L No. contains no relevant data input or corresponding option. Data setting address P or R is not specified. An address not relating to the data setting is specified. Which address to specify var...

  • Page 2383

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2345 - Number Message Description 1300 ILLEGAL ADDRESS The axis No. address was specified even though the parameter is not an axis–type while loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a tape or by entry of the G10 parameter. Axis No. cannot b...

  • Page 2384

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2346 - Number Message Description 1362 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR 2 (TLAC) Illegal parameter setting (tool axis setting) 1370 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR (DM3H-1) Out–of–range data was set during setting of the three–dimensional handle feed parameter. 1371 PAR...

  • Page 2385

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2347 - Number Message Description 1544 S-CODE OVER MAX The S command exceeds the maximum spindle rotation number. 1548 ILLGAL AXIS MODE The spindle positioning axis/Cs contour control axis was specified during switching of the controlled axis mode. 1561 ILLE...

  • Page 2386

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2348 - Number Message Description 1594 EGB FORMAT ERROR Error in the format of the block of an EGB command (1) T (number of teeth) is not specified in the G81 block. (2) In the G81 block, the data specified for one of T, L, P, and Q is out of its valid range....

  • Page 2387

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2349 - Number Message Description 1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed. 1809 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G41/G42 Specified direction tool length compensation parameters are incorrect. A move instruction for a axis of ro...

  • Page 2388

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2350 - Number Message Description 1968 ILLEGAL FILE NAME (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card file name 1969 ILLEGAL FORMAT (MEMORY CARD)Check the file name. 1970 ILLEGAL CARD (MEMORY CARD) This memory card cannot be handled. 1971 ERASE ERROR (MEMORY CARD) An er...

  • Page 2389

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2351 - Number Message Description 2061 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control. - A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point control (type 2) mode. - With a table rotary type or mixed-type m...

  • Page 2390

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2352 - Number Message Description 5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR Errors for three-dimensional coordinate conversion command are: (1) No I, J, or K command was issued in three-dimensional coordinate conversion command block. (without coordinate rotation option) (2) All...

  • Page 2391

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2353 - Number Message Description 5066 RESTART ILLEGAL SEQUENCE NUMBER A sequence number from 7000 to 7999 was read during the search for the next number in a restart program for the back or restart function. 5068 FORMAT ERROR IN G31P90 No travel axis was spe...

  • Page 2392

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2354 - Number Message Description 5195 DIRECTION CAN NOT BE JUDGED Measurement is invalid in the tool compensation measurement value direct input B function. [For 1-contact input] 1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant. - The machine is at a stop in ...

  • Page 2393

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2355 - Number Message Description 5245 OTHERAXIS ARE COMMANDED - For a flexible synchronization control group for which a PMC axis was a master axis, an attempt was made to turn on the synchronous mode during time other than automatic operation.- An attempt w...

  • Page 2394

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2356 - Number Message Description 5329 M98 AND NC COMMAND IN SAME BLOCK A subprogram call which is not a single block was commanded during canned cycle mode. 5339 ILLEGAL FORMAT COMMAND IS EXECUTED IN SYNC/MIX/OVL CONTROL. 1. The value of P, Q, or L specifie...

  • Page 2395

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2357 - Number Message Description 5364 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN PROGRAM CHECK (1) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the high-speed program check mode. (2) The angular axis control option or customer's board option is enabled. (3) One of the following operati...

  • Page 2396

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2358 - Number Message Description 5421 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control. - A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point control (type 2) mode. - With a table rotary type or mixed-type m...

  • Page 2397

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2359 - Number Message Description 5436 ILLEGAL PARAMETER SETTING OF ROTARY AXIS(TLAC) Illegal parameter setting. (axis of rotation setting) 5437 ILLEGAL PARAMETER SETTING OF MASTER ROTARY AXIS(TLAC) Illegal parameter setting. (master axis of rotation setting)...

  • Page 2398

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2360 - Number Message Description 5460 ILLEGAL USE OF 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION - In the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode (except the tool side offset function for a tool rotation type machine), a move command other than G00/G01 is specified. - ...

  • Page 2399

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2361 - (4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm) Number Message Description SW0100 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON The parameter setting is enabled (PWE, one bit of parameter No. 8000 is set to “1”). To set the parameter, turn this parameter ON. Otherwise, set to...

  • Page 2400

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2362 - Number Message Description SV0301 APC ALARM: COMMUNICATION ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a communication error, the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data transfer error) The absolute-position detector, cable, or serv...

  • Page 2401

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2363 - Number Message Description SV0385 SERIAL DATA ERROR(EXT) The communications data could not be received from the separate detector. SV0386 DATA TRANS. ERROR(EXT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications data from the standalone detec...

  • Page 2402

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2364 - Number Message Description SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was exceeded. SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified as a parameter was exceeded. SV0...

  • Page 2403

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2365 - Number Message Description SV0454 ILLEGAL ROTOR POS DETECT The magnetic pole detection function terminated abnormally.The magnetic pole could not be detected because the motor did not run. SV0456 ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP An attempt was made to set the curr...

  • Page 2404

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2366 - Number Message Description SV0478 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA(SV) The servo detected that an error occurred during transfer of axis data in the n-axis. When an alarm occurred because the configuration of the servo amplifier was changed, set the axis number for t...

  • Page 2405

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2367 - Number Message Description SV0496 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA(CNC) The CNC detected that an error occurred during transfer to axis data. When an alarm occurred because the configuration of the servo amplifier was changed, set the axis number for the servo amplif...

  • Page 2406

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2368 - Number Message Description SV1071 EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:CNC) The CNC detected that the positional deviation during a travel exceeded the set value (parameters No. 1838 and No. 1841) in the n-axis. SV1072 EXCESS ERROR(STOP:CNC) The CNC detected that the po...

  • Page 2407

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2369 - Number Message Description OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was triggered. This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end. When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped duri...

  • Page 2408

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2370 - Number Message Description PW0002 PMC address is not correct(AXIS). The address to assign the axis signal is incorrect. This alarm may occur in the following case: - The parameter No.3021 setting is incorrect. PW0003 PMC address is not correct(SPINDLE)...

  • Page 2409

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2371 - Number Message Description PW1102 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP.) The parameter for setting slope compensation is incorrect. This alarm occurs in the following cases: - When the number of pitch error compensation points on the axis on which slope compensat...

  • Page 2410

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2372 - Number Message Description SP1210 TOOL CHANGE SP MOTION OVERFLOW The amount of distribution to a spindle is too much. (specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL) SP1211 TOOL CHANGE SP ORTN EXCESS ERROR During a tool change, a too much orientation error was detec...

  • Page 2411

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2373 - Number Message Description SP1975 ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An position coder error was detected on the analog spindle. SP1976 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR The amplifier No. could not be set to the serial spindle amplifier. SP1977 SERIAL SPIND...

  • Page 2412

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2374 - (10) Alarm list (serial spindle) When a serial spindle alarm occurs, the following number is displayed on the CNC. NOTE *1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on. When the red LED is o...

  • Page 2413

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2375 - Number Message SPM indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9007 SSPA:07 OVER SPEED 07 Check for a sequence error. (For example, check whether spindle synchronization was specified when the spindle could not be turned.) The motor speed h...

  • Page 2414

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2376 - Number Message SPM indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9020 SSPA:20 EXCESS OFFSET CURRENT V 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is detected. (The initial value of the V phase current detection circuit is abnorma...

  • Page 2415

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2377 - Number Message SPM indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9034 SSPA:34 ILLEGAL PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according to the manual. If the parameter number is unknown, connect the spindle check board, and check the indicated...

  • Page 2416

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63944EN/03 - 2378 - Number Message SPM indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9051 SSPA:51 LOW VOLT POWER CIRCUIT 51 1 Check and correct the power supply voltage. 2 Replace the MC. Input voltage drop was detected. (PSM alarm indication: 4) (Momentary powe...

  • Page 2417

    B-63944EN/03 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 2379 - Number Message SPM indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9069 SAFETY SPEED OVER 69 1 Check the specified speed. 2 Check parameter settings. 3 Check the sequence. In the state in which safety speed monitoring was enabled, the system de...